TOPS-20
                       Operator's Command Language
                             Reference Manual


                         Electronic Distribution


                                July 1990


                 This  manual  describes   all   operator
                 commands that use the Operator Interface
                 Command Language (OPR), LCP,  Privileged
                 Commands, and PTYCON commands.

                 Change bars in margins indicate material
                 that has been added or changed since the
                 previous   release   of   this   manual.
                 Bullets  indicate that material has been
                 deleted.

                 This manual supersedes the manual of the
                 same name and order number, AA-H600C-TM.


                 OPERATING SYSTEM:  TOPS-20 (KL Model B) Version 7.0

                 SOFTWARE:  GALAXY Version 6



                 digital equipment corporation
                 maynard, massachusetts



  First Printing, January 1980
  Updated, April 1982
  Updated, December 1982
  Revised, September 1985
  Revised, June, 1988
  Software Update Tape 3, July 1990



  The information in this document is subject to change  without  notice
  and  should  not  be  construed  as  a commitment by Digital Equipment
  Corporation.  Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no  responsibility
  for any errors that may appear in this document.

  The software described in this document is furnished under  a  license
  and  may  only  be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
  license.

  No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
  equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
  affiliated companies.


  Copyright  C 1980,  1982,   1985,   1988,   1990   Digital   Equipment
  Corporation.

  All Rights Reserved.
  Printed in U.S.A.



  The Reader's Comments form on the last page of this document  requests
  the   user's   critical  evaluation  to  assist  in  preparing  future
  documentation.

  The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

  CI             DECtape     LA50             SITGO-10
  DDCMP          DECUS       LN01             TOPS-10
  DEC            DECwriter   LN03             TOPS-20
  DECmail        DELNI       MASSBUS          TOPS-20AN
  DECnet         DELUA       PDP              UNIBUS
  DECnet-VAX     HSC         PDP-11/24        UETP
  DECserver      HSC-50      PrintServer      VAX
  DECserver 100  KA10        PrintServer 40   VAX/VMS
  DECserver 200  KI          Q-bus            VT50
  DECsystem-10   KL10        ReGIS
  DECSYSTEM-20   KS10        RSX              d i g i t a l





                                     CONTENTS



  PREFACE


  CHAPTER 1       INTRODUCTION


  CHAPTER 2       THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR

          2.1     INTRODUCTION TO THE OPERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . 2-1
          2.2     RUNNING OPR AND EXITING FROM IT  . . . . . . . . . 2-2
          2.2.1     Issuing OPR Commands to and from Remote Stations 2-5
          2.2.2     Multiple OPRs on the System  . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
          2.3     RUNNING SEMI-OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
          2.3.1     SEMI-OPR Limitations and Restrictions  . . . . . 2-7
          2.3.2     SEMI-OPR Commands  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
          2.4     OPR COMMAND FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
          2.4.1     ? (Question Mark) - Listing Available Commands . 2-9
          2.4.2     ESCape - Using Recognition . . . . . . . . . .  2-11
          2.4.3     <CTRL/H> - Reprinting Faulty Commands  . . . .  2-13
          2.4.4     Continuing OPR Command Lines . . . . . . . . .  2-14
          2.5     OPR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-15
          2.5.1     ORION-To-OPR Messages  . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-15
          2.5.2     OPR Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-16


  CHAPTER 3       OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

                  ABORT - Aborting Jobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
                  ALIGN - Aligning Printer Paper . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
                  BACKSPACE - Backspacing Files by Page  . . . . .  3-13
                  CANCEL - Canceling Requests  . . . . . . . . . .  3-18
                  CLOSE - Closing the Log Buffer File  . . . . . .  3-22
                  CONTINUE - Restarting a Stopped Job  . . . . . .  3-24
                  DEFINE - Defining a Node . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-30
                  DEFINE - Defining Aliases for Printer
                  Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-34
                  DISABLE - Stopping System Process Features . . .  3-39
                  DISMOUNT - Dismounting a Structure or Tape-drive  3-48
                  ENABLE - Allowing System Process Features  . . .  3-52
                  ENTER - Entering Another Command Level . . . . .  3-61
                  EXIT - Leaving OPR Level . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-63
                  FORWARDSPACE - Forward Spacing into Pages  . . .  3-64
                  HELP - Getting Help on OPR Commands  . . . . . .  3-68
                  HOLD - Holding Job Requests in the Queue . . . .  3-70
                  IDENTIFY - Identifying Tape Mounts . . . . . . .  3-73
                  MODIFY - Modifying the Priority of Requests  . .  3-77
                  MOUNT - Mounting Structures  . . . . . . . . . .  3-80
                  NEXT - Specifying the Next Request to Run  . . .  3-83


                                   iii



                  PUSH - Pushing Out of OPR Command Level  . . . .  3-88
                  RELEASE - Releasing Job Requests Held in the
                  Queue  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  3-90
                  REPORT - Reporting Comments to SYSERR  . . . . .  3-93
                  REQUEUE - Rescheduling Job Requests  . . . . . .  3-95
                  RESPOND - Responding to Messages . . . . . . . . 3-101
                  ROUTE - Routing Output Between Nodes . . . . . . 3-104
                  SEND - Sending Messages  . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
                  SET - Setting Parameters for System Devices  . . 3-115
                    SET BATCH-STREAM - Setting Batch Stream
                    Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
                    SET CARD-PUNCH - Setting Card Punch Parameters 3-119
                    SET DISK-DRIVE - Setting Disk-Drive Parameters 3-123
                    SET JOB - Setting Characteristics for Jobs . . 3-126
                    SET NODE - Setting Node Parameters . . . . . . 3-128
                    SET ONLINE - Setting a Device On-Line  . . . . 3-132
                    SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH - Setting
                    Paper-Tape-Punch Parameters  . . . . . . . . . 3-134
                    SET PLOTTER - Setting Plotter Parameters . . . 3-137
                    SET PORT CI - Controlling the CI port  . . . . 3-140
                    SET PORT NI - Controlling the NI Port  . . . . 3-145
                    SET PRINTER - Setting Line Printer Parameters  3-147
                    SET SCHEDULER - Setting System Performance . . 3-153
                    SET STRUCTURE - Setting Structure Parameters . 3-156
                    SET TAPE-DRIVE - Setting Tape-Drive Parameters 3-161
                  SHOW - Displaying System Information . . . . . . 3-167
                    SHOW ALIAS - Displaying Printer Alias Names  . 3-168
                    SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES - Displaying Status of
                    Remote Broadcasting of ORION Messages  . . . . 3-173
                    SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS - Displaying
                    Cluster Link Status  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
                    SHOW CONFIGURATION - Displaying Disk Drive
                    Configuration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
                    SHOW CONTROL-FILE - Displaying Batch Control
                    Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
                    SHOW MESSAGES - Displaying Outstanding
                    Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
                    SHOW OPERATORS - Displaying Operators on the
                    System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
                    SHOW PARAMETERS - Displaying Device Settings . 3-187
                    SHOW QUEUES - Displaying Queued Job Requests . 3-193
                    SHOW ROUTE-TABLE - Displaying Node Routing
                    Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
                    SHOW SCHEDULER - Displaying the System
                    Scheduler  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
                    SHOW STATUS - Displaying Device/System
                    Information  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
                    SHOW TIME - Displaying Date and Time . . . . . 3-211
                  SHUTDOWN - Terminating Device Scheduling . . . . 3-212
                  START - Starting Device Scheduling . . . . . . . 3-217
                  STOP - Stopping Devices Temporarily  . . . . . . 3-222
                  SUPPRESS - Suppressing Printer Form-Feeds  . . . 3-227


                                    iv



                  SWITCH - Switching Tape Drives and Volids  . . . 3-231
                  TAKE - Executing OPR Commands Automatically  . . 3-233
                  UNDEFINE - Removing Structure Parameters . . . . 3-235
                  WAIT - Controlling Input from Batch Jobs . . . . 3-237


  CHAPTER 4       LCP COMMANDS

          4.1     INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
          4.2     LOADING AND DUMPING LAT TERMINAL SERVERS . . . . . 4-3
          4.3     OPR COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN LCP  . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
          4.4     LCP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
                    CLEAR - Clearing LAT host parameters . . . . . . 4-8
                    SET - Setting LAT host parameters  . . . . . .  4-11
                    SHOW - Displaying LAT Host and Terminal Server
                    Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  4-14
                    START - Making the LAT Host Available  . . . .  4-19
                    STOP - Making the LAT Host Unavailable . . . .  4-20
                    ZERO - Resetting LAT Counters to Zero  . . . .  4-21


  CHAPTER 5       ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS

          5.1     INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
          5.2     PRIVILEGED COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS  . . . . . . . . . 5-2
                  ^ECEASE - Scheduling System Shutdown . . . . . . . 5-3
                  ^ECREATE - Creating/Removing Directories . . . . . 5-8
                  ^EDEFINE - Defining and Deleting System Logical
                  Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-46
                  ^EEDDT - Debugging the EXEC  . . . . . . . . . .  5-49
                  ^EPRINT - Print Directory Parameters . . . . . .  5-50
                  ^EQUIT - Halting the EXEC  . . . . . . . . . . .  5-55
                  ^ESEND - Sending Messages to Users Immediately .  5-57
                  ^ESET - Setting Job, System, and Terminal
                  Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5-59
                  ^ESPEAK - Giving Commands To SYSJOB  . . . . . .  5-71


  CHAPTER 6       PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE

          6.1     INTRODUCTION TO PTYCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
          6.2     STARTING PTYCON  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
          6.3     COMMUNICATION WITH PTYCON AND ITS SUBJOBS  . . . . 6-4
          6.3.1     Subjobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
          6.3.2     Creating Subjobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
          6.3.3     Communicating with Subjobs through PTYCON  . . . 6-6
          6.3.4     Communicating Directly with Subjobs  . . . . . . 6-9
          6.3.5     Subjob Output  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-11
          6.3.6     Logging Out Subjobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-12
          6.4     PTYCON COMMAND FEATURES  . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-13
          6.4.1     Listing Available Commands and Arguments with a
                    Question Mark  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-13


                                    v



          6.4.2     Using Recognition Input  . . . . . . . . . . .  6-14
          6.5     PTYCON COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS  . . . . . . . . . .  6-14
                    ACCEPT - Accepting Output on Your Terminal . .  6-16
                    BELL - Sounding Bell for Output Waiting  . . .  6-18
                    CONNECT - Connecting to a Subjob . . . . . . .  6-19
                    DEFINE - Defining a Subjob . . . . . . . . . .  6-21
                    DISCARD - Eliminating Subjob Output  . . . . .  6-23
                    EXIT - Leaving PTYCON Command Level  . . . . .  6-25
                    GET - Executing an Auto-File . . . . . . . . .  6-27
                    HELP - Printing PTYCON Commands  . . . . . . .  6-30
                    KILL - Killing PTYCON Subjobs  . . . . . . . .  6-31
                    LOG - Recording Interactions with PTYCON . . .  6-33
                    PUSH - Performing Tasks at EXEC Level  . . . .  6-35
                    REDEFINE - Changing the PTYCON ESCape Character 6-37
                    REFUSE - Refusing Output from Unconnected
                    Subjobs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6-38
                    SAVE - Recording Input to PTYCON Subjobs . . .  6-40
                    SILENCE - Silencing Output to Your Terminal  .  6-42
                    WHAT - Displaying the Status of Subjobs  . . .  6-44
          6.6     PTYCON WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES  . . . . . . .  6-46


  INDEX


  TABLES

          5-1     Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands  . . . . . . . .  5-12




                                    vi




                                    vi



                                 PREFACE

  The commands described in  the  TOPS-20  Operator's  Command  Language
  Reference  Manual  are  arranged  in  an alphabetical order within the
  command language being described:  OPR,  ^E  privileged  commands,  or
  PTYCON.

  This manual is designed primarily for the beginning operator  as  well
  as the experienced operator who needs additional information about the
  various TOPS-20 operator commands.  It assumes  that  the  reader  has
  OPERATOR, SEMI-OPERATOR, or WHEEL privileges and knows how to login as
  an operator.

  This manual assumes that you, the operator, have read all or parts  of
  the following manuals:

       TOPS-20 User's Guide

       TOPS-20 Operator's Guide

  In addition, you may need  to  reference  the  following  manuals  for
  information related to the operational tasks you must perform:

       TOPS-20 KL Model B Installation Guide

       TOPS-20 Utilities Guide

       TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual

       TOPS-20 IBM Emulation/Termination Manual

       DECnet/SNA TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's Guide

       DECnet/SNA Gateway Management Guide.

       DECnet-20/PSI-20 System Manager's Guide

       TOPS-20 DECnet Reference Manual


                                   vii



  The contents of this manual are as follows:

       1.  Chapter 1 briefly introduces OPR, ^E privileged commands, and
           PTYCON.

       2.  Chapter 2 is an introduction to OPR, the Operator Interface.

       3.  Chapter  3  describes  all  OPR  commands,  their   keywords,
           arguments, switches, and values.  The OPR commands are listed
           in alphabetical order.

       4.  Chapter 4 contains an introduction to LCP,  the  LAT  Control
           Program,  and  describes  all  LCP  commands, their keywords,
           arguments,   switches,   and   values.    The   LCP   command
           descriptions are in alphabetical order.

       5.  Chapter 5 describes all ^E (<CTRL/E>) privileged commands for
           special operator tasks.

       6.  Chapter 6 describes all PTYCON commands.


                     Conventions Used In This Manual


  Symbol                          Meaning

  <RET>               Press the key labeled RETURN or CR.

  <ESC>               Press the key labeled ESC, ESCAPE, ALT, or PRE.

  <CTRL/C>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and C simultaneously.

  <CTRL/E>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and E simultaneously.

  <CTRL/I>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and  I  simultaneously
                      or press the key labeled TAB.

  <CTRL/X>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and X simultaneously.

  <CTRL/H>            Press the keys labeled CTRL and H simultaneously.



                                   viii



                                   1-1



                                CHAPTER 1

                               INTRODUCTION



  OPR is the operator interface.  The operator's command language allows
  you  to communicate with certain components of TOPS-20, to control the
  batch streams and the input and output devices.  You also use  OPR  to
  send messages to jobs, terminals, and batch-streams, and to respond to
  requests for  operator  action,  such  as  from  the  PLEASE  program.
  Chapter  2  contains  a thorough introduction to using OPR.  Chapter 3
  describes all OPR commands in alphabetical  order.   LCP  is  the  LAT
  Control  Program.  LAT (Local Area Transport) is a protocol to control
  communication between LAT  terminal  servers  and  LAT  hosts  on  the
  Ethernet.  Chapter 4 contains a detailed introduction to LAT functions
  that you can control with LCP, and also describes the LCP commands, in
  alphabetical order.

  ^E (Control-E) privileged commands are commands that  can  affect  the
  entire  system,  and  therefore  can be used only by those with OPR or
  WHEEL privileges enabled.  The first  character  of  each  command  is
  <CTRL/E>   (typed   in  by  pressing  the  keys  labeled  CTRL  and  E
  simultaneously), which echoes on your terminal as ^E.

  ^E privileged commands allow you  to  shut  down  the  system,  create
  accounts,  define  system-wide logical names, and send messages to all
  users simultaneously.  ^E privileged commands and their functions are:

        o  ^ECEASE - shuts down the system

        o  ^ECREATE - creates a directory

        o  ^EDEFINE - defines system-wide logical names

        o  ^EEDDT - debugs the EXEC

        o  ^EPRINT - displays directory parameters

        o  ^EQUIT - halts the EXEC

        o  ^ESEND - sends system-wide messages



                                   1-1
                                INTRODUCTION


        o  ^ESET - sets system-wide and local parameters

        o  ^ESPEAK - gives commands to SYSJOB

  ^E commands are described in Chapter 5 in alphabetical order.   PTYCON
  is  a program that allows you to RUN more than one job simultaneously,
  without requiring each job to have an associated timesharing terminal.
  PTYCON  runs  each  job  as  a  subjob controlled by a pseudo-terminal
  (PTY).   PTYCON  can  send  information  to  each  PTY   and   receive
  information  from  each  PTY.   Each  PTY  is  in  effect  a  software
  simulation of a timesharing terminal.

  PTYCON allows the many operator jobs, such as GALAXY, OPR, and NMLT20,
  to be run from a single terminal, under the control of the operator.

  PTYCON commands are described in  Chapter  6  in  alphabetical  order.
  Chapter 6 also contains an introduction to using PTYCON.




                                   1-2


                                CHAPTER 2
                       THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



  2.1  INTRODUCTION TO THE OPERATOR INTERFACE

  OPR, the Operator Interface, is both a component and the main  command
  language  used  in  the  TOPS-20  operating  system.   This  component
  provides you, the operator, with the language to communicate with  the
  following components of the TOPS-20 operating system:

       1.  QUASAR, the GALAXY Scheduler

       2.  BATCON, the Batch Controller

       3.  LPTSPL, the Line-Printer Spooler

       4.  SPRINT, the Reader Interpreter

       5.  CDRIVE, the Card-Reader Spooler

       6.  SPROUT, the Card-Punch, Paper-Tape-Punch, and Plotter Spooler

       7.  MOUNTR, the Tape-Drive and Disk-Drive Controller

       8.  NEBULA, the Cluster GALAXY Message Router

  Further information on these components can be found  in  the  TOPS-20
  Operator's Guide.

  You also use the OPR command language to communicate with:

        o  Any program requesting operator action (such  as  the  PLEASE
           program)

        o  Any user on the system

        o  All users on a remote system in the cluster

  The component that receives the OPR commands and communicates with all
  the other operating system components is ORION.


                                   2-1
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  2.2  RUNNING OPR AND EXITING FROM IT

  To start OPR, you must have WHEEL or OPERATOR privileges.   (See  your
  System  Manager  to  get  these  privileges if you do not already have
  either of them.)

  To handle all batch software tasks and all PLEASE, MOUNT, and DISMOUNT
  requests,  you  must  have  OPR  running.   Normally,  commands in the
  PTYCON.ATO file start  OPR  automatically  as  a  PTYCON  subjob.   An
  example of this command file is shown on the next page.

       SILENCE
       LOG
       DEFINE ^$OPR
       CONNECT OPR
       LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
       ENABLE
       !NEW OPERATOR INTERFACE PARSER
       OPR
       TAKE SYS:SYSTEM.CMD
       PUSH
       ENABLE
       ^ESET LOGIN ANY
               S
       ^ESEND  SYSTEM IN OPERATION
       POP

  The command TAKE SYS:SYSTEM.CMD in the above  PTYCON.ATO  example  can
  contain  any  number  of  OPR  commands  to  set and start devices and
  streams automatically.  An example of a  SYSTEM.CMD  command  file  is
  shown below.

       SET BATCH-STREAM 0 TIME-LIMIT 5
       SET BATCH-STREAM 1 TIME-LIMIT 10
       SET BATCH-STREAM 2:3 TIME-LIMIT 11000
       SET BATCH-STREAM 3 PRIORITY-LIMITS 20:63
       SET BATCH-STREAM 0:1 PRIORITY-LIMITS 1:19
       START BATCH-STREAM 0:3
       SET PRINTER 0 PAGE-LIMIT 20000
       SET PRINTER 1 PAGE-LIMIT 500
       START PRINTER 0:1
       START READER 0
       START CARD-PUNCH 0

  These commands are  described  in  various  sections  of  the  TOPS-20
  Operator's Guide and in Chapter 3 of this manual.

                                   NOTE

          It is the responsibility of  your  System  Manager  to
          determine whether OPR is to run as a subjob of PTYCON.
          In addition,  your  System  Manager  should  determine
          whether any other program or utility should be started
          as a PTYCON subjob.

                                   2-2
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  To start OPR yourself under a job with OPERATOR  privileges,  all  you
  need to do is to type ENABLE and then type OPR.

       @ENABLE<RET>
       $OPR<RET>
       OPR>

  OPR is your primary  interface  with  the  operating  system  and  its
  devices.   Thus,  it  is  recommended  that if your installation has a
  hardcopy central terminal (CTY), it should be dedicated to OPR.  To do
  this,  LOGIN and ATTACH to PTYCON; the OPR> prompt then appears at the
  CTY.  In the following example, your password is FOO and your  account
  number is OPERATOR.

       <CTRL/C>
        CLOYD Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20753)
       @LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
        Job 12 on TTY21 30-Apr-79 07:10:32
       @ENABLE<RET>
       $SYSTAT OPERATOR<RET>

          0   DET  SYSJOB  OPERATOR
          1   205  PTYCON  OPERATOR
          2   207  BATCON  OPERATOR
          3   210  EXEC    OPERATOR
          4   211  OPR     OPERATOR
                   .
                   .
       $ATTACH OPERATOR 1<RET>
        [Attached to TTY205, confirm]<RET>
        Detaching Job # 12
       Password: FOO<RET>
       <RET>
       OPR>

  If your installation has  more  than  one  terminal  assigned  to  its
  operators,  you  can run separate OPRs from different terminals.  (See
  Section 2.2.2.) Thus, OPR can run as a  subjob  under  PTYCON  at  one
  terminal  and  as  a job by itself at another terminal.  All OPRs have
  the same functionality as the OPR running as a subjob  of  PTYCON  and
  CONNECTed  to  the  CTY.   ORION,  the  OPR-controlling component, can
  handle an unlimited number of terminals running  OPR.   Multiple  OPRs
  are discussed in Section 2.2.2.

  If you want OPR as a subjob under PTYCON and the PTYCON.ATO  file  did
  not  automatically  start  OPR,  you can either CONNECT to a subjob to
  start OPR or DEFINE a subjob as OPR  and  then  CONNECT  to  it.   The
  examples below show both methods of creating an OPR subjob.

       PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
       [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB 0]



                                   2-3
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


        CLOYD Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20753)
       @LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
        Job 37 on TTY211 2-DEC-79 09:23:01
       @ENABLE<RET>
       $OPR<RET>
       OPR>

  or

       PTYCON> DEFINE 0 OPR<RET>
       PTYCON> OPR-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
       PTYCON>

       **** OPR(0)  09:32:01  ****

        CLOYD Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20753)
       @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
       @
       PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
       [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR(0)]
       <RET>
       @ENABLE<RET>
       $OPR<RET>
       OPR>

  When you issue a command to OPR,  OPR  validates  the  syntax  of  the
  command  and  generates error messages for any errors it may find.  If
  there are no errors, the command is passed to the correct  process  to
  be executed.

  If you receive an  error  message,  you  can  retype  the  entire  OPR
  command,  or  press  <CTRL/H>  to  reprint the command up to the point
  where the error occurred in the command.  (Refer to Section 2.4.2.)

  To exit from OPR at any time, simply  issue  the  command  EXIT.   You
  immediately  return  to  TOPS-20 command level and you are prompted by
  the dollar-sign ($).  For example:

       OPR>EXIT<RET>
       $

  If OPR is a subjob of PTYCON, you  can  type  <CTRL/X>  to  return  to
  PTYCON command level.  For example:

       OPR>^X
            ^
            |
        <CTRL/X>
       PTYCON>

  In addition, you can give the PUSH command to OPR to return to TOPS-20
  command  processor  level.   Then, you can execute any program or task


                                   2-4
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  and then give the POP command to return to OPR.  However,  you  cannot
  LOGOUT while PUSHed to OPR.

       OPR>PUSH<RET>

        TOPS-20 Command processor 7(4138)
       @ENABLE<RET>
       $DUMPER<RET>
       DUMPER>
                  .
                  .
                  .
       $DISABLE<RET>
       @POP<RET>
       OPR>



  2.2.1  Issuing OPR Commands to and from Remote Stations

  In a data networking environment, a DECSYSTEM-20 communicates with one
  or  more separate computer processors.  Each processor in a network is
  called a "node." The DECSYSTEM-20, running TOPS-20, is a "host"  node.
  The host node is the only type of node in the TOPS-20 network that can
  support interactive users on a timesharing basis.  The operator at the
  host  node  is  the system operator.  The system operator controls the
  devices connected to his host node and those connected to  the  remote
  stations that are controlled by his host node.

  In a DECnet network, two or more  hosts  may  communicate.   The  host
  operator  logs  into  his  "local"  host.   The other hosts are called
  "remote" hosts.  The host operator cannot control  devices  at  remote
  hosts.

  The processors in the TOPS-20 network,  other  than  host  nodes,  are
  known  as  remote  stations.   These  remote  stations  do not support
  interactive users, and usually have  one  card  reader  and  one  line
  printer.  Remote stations are used for remote submission of batch jobs
  to a host node.   The  operator  at  a  remote  station  is  a  remote
  operator.    The  remote  operator  can  control  only  those  devices
  connected to his remote station.  He cannot  control  devices  at  the
  host node.

  The remote station is an IBM-type node.  Your remote station operators
  should   have  additional  documentation.   The  following  manual  is
  available for remote  station  operators:   IBM  Emulation/Termination
  Manual is useful for IBM-type remote stations.

  This  manual  helps  the  remote  station  operator  determine   those
  functions he can perform at the remote station.  The commands that the
  remote station operator uses will  work  on  his  remote  station;  no
  further specification is necessary.


                                   2-5
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  The system operator can perform any of the functions in  this  manual.
  However, no operator can control devices at a remote host node.

  The OPR program allows the operator to specify a remote  node  as  the
  destination  for  a  command.   Many  OPR commands recognize the /NODE
  switch.  The /NODE switch can specify  either  a  DECnet  or  IBM-type
  remote  station,  or it can specify the operator's host node; any node
  name may  be  specified.   However  for  remote  DECnet  nodes,  these
  commands  have no effect.  To use the /NODE switch, type the following
  in the command line:

       /NODE:node-name::

  Two colons (::) following the node name are optional.



  2.2.2  Multiple OPRs on the System

  You can have more than one OPR running on the same  operating  system.
  ORION   keeps   track   of   each   OPR   and  sends  the  appropriate
  acknowledgement messages to the OPR that sent the command.

  Only  the  host  system  can  have   more   than   one   OPR   running
  simultaneously.  Remote stations can only have one OPR running.  Thus,
  if you have remote stations at your  installation,  any  message  sent
  from a remote station to the host system displays at all OPR's running
  at the host.  If a message is sent to a remote station from  the  host
  (the /NODE:  switch), the message displays only at that node.

  Each OPR that is processing can be set to enable or disable the  types
  of messages to be displayed at that OPR console.  For example, one OPR
  could be responsible for only tape and disk mounts and dismounts,  and
  another  OPR  could  be responsible for everything else.  Refer to the
  detailed descriptions of the DISABLE and ENABLE commands elsewhere  in
  this manual.



  2.3  RUNNING SEMI-OPR

  SEMI-OPR is a new user privilege that permits a designated user to use
  a  subset  of  OPR  commands.   This  subset of OPR commands are those
  commands for accessing information  (such  as  SHOW)  and  controlling
  certain  devices  (such  as  FORWARDSPACE).   A  user may be given the
  SEMI-OPR  privilege  by  another  user  who  has  WHEEL  or   OPERATOR
  privileges.

  The System Administrator can  enable  the  SEMI-OPR  privilege  for  a
  particular  user  with the ^ECREATE command (or BUILD command) at EXEC
  command level.  For example, you can authorize user  <BROWN>  to  have
  the SEMI-OPR privilege by performing the following:


                                   2-6
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


       $^ECREATE <EBROWN><RET>
       [Old]
       $$SEMI-OPERATOR<RET>
       $$<RET>
       $

  The System Administrator can also determine which devices  a  SEMI-OPR
  can  control  when  a  GALGEN  is performed.  The devices are printer,
  card-reader, tape drive, plotter, card punch, and paper-tape-punch.

  The operator of your system can turn on or turn  off  SEMI-OPR  system
  wide with the OPR commands ENABLE and DISABLE.  For example, to ENABLE
  SEMI-OPR:

       OPR>ENABLE SEMI-OPR<RET>
       OPR>
       13:06:10       --SEMI-OPERATOR enable--
       OPR>

  To DISABLE SEMI-OPR:

       OPR>DISABLE SEMI-OPR<RET>
       OPR>
       13:06:19       --SEMI-OPERATOR disable--
       OPR>

  When the user activates SEMI-OPR by typing OPR at EXEC  command  level
  followed by a carriage-return, the SEMI-OPR> prompt appears.  When the
  user types a  "?"  for  the  SEMI-OPR>  prompt,  only  those  commands
  applicable to SEMI-OPR appear.

       @ENABLE<RET>
       $OPR<RET>
       SEMI-OPR>?

            ALIGN              BACKSPACE       CONTINUE        EXIT
            FORWARDSPACE       HELP            IDENTIFY        PUSH
            SHOW               SHUTDOWN        START           STOP
            SUPPRESS           TAKE            WAIT

       SEMI-OPR>



  2.3.1  SEMI-OPR Limitations and Restrictions

  The following limitations and restrictions should be  remembered  when
  designating and using SEMI-OPR:

        o  The user must ENABLE capabilities at EXEC  command  level  to
           run SEMI-OPR.



                                   2-7
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


        o  The system must be running a Release 7 monitor and GALAXY 6.

        o  SEMI-OPR can execute only certain OPR commands.

        o  SEMI-OPR cannot run LCP and NCP (ENTER command),  or  another
           application program by way of OPR.



  2.3.2  SEMI-OPR Commands

  For users to utilize SEMI-OPR, they must have SEMI-OPERATOR privileges
  enabled  and SEMI-OPR must be enabled.  SEMI-OPR commands allow a user
  to access information and to have limited control over  devices.   The
  following are the permitted SEMI-OPR commands:

       ALIGN              BACKSPACE       CONTINUE        EXIT
       FORWARDSPACE       HELP            IDENTIFY        PUSH
       SHOW               SHUTDOWN        START           STOP
       SUPPRESS           TAKE            WAIT

                                   NOTE

          The above list  contains  all  the  possible  SEMI-OPR
          commands.    However,  the  System  Administrator  can
          define a subset of  the  SEMI-OPR  commands  based  on
          device  types.   Therefore, when a SEMI-OPR requests a
          list of available  commands  by  typing  a  "?",  only
          commands  enabled  by  the  System  Administrator  are
          displayed.

  For a more detailed  description  of  the  above  commands,  refer  to
  Chapter  3,  and  remember  the limitations and restrictions listed in
  Section 2.3.1.



  2.4  OPR COMMAND FEATURES

  The OPR command language has three command features that allow you  to
  do the following:

       1.  List available commands - ?

       2.  Use recognition - <ESC>

       3.  Reprint faulty commands - <CTRL/H>

  These features are described in detail in the  following  sections  of
  this chapter.

  If you are a remote station operator (that is,  if  your  installation


                                   2-8
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  has  DECnet software), you will not have the above features.  However,
  you can obtain help with the HELP command at OPR command level.  Refer
  to Chapter 3 for a description of the HELP command.

  In  addition,  CTRL/character  commands  such  as  CTRL/R  and  CTRL/U
  function at OPR command level as they do at TOPS-20 command level.



  2.4.1  ?  (Question Mark) - Listing Available Commands

  You can type a question mark at command level or while in the  process
  of typing a command.

  When you type a question  mark  to  the  OPR>  prompt,  it  lists  the
  available  OPR commands.  When you type a question mark in the process
  of entering an OPR command, it lists the available  keywords  to  that
  command.   When  you type a question mark after the keyword, OPR lists
  the available values, arguments, and/or switches to that keyword.   If
  you type a question mark after an entire OPR command, OPR replies with
  the message:  "confirm with  carriage  return",  retypes  your  entire
  command, and waits for you to press the carriage return key.

                         ----- Restriction -----

  If you type a question mark after an OPR command  argument  or  switch
  and  there  are  no  additional  arguments  that  can be supplied, OPR
  responds with the message:  "confirm with carriage  return"  and  then
  retypes  your  complete  OPR  command  and  waits for you to press the
  carriage return key.  (All OPR  commands  must  end  with  a  carriage
  return;  the  ESCape,  <CTRL/H>,  and  ?   features do not require the
  carriage return.)

                           ----- Examples -----

       1.  Start OPR and, after the system prompts you with OPR>, type a
           question mark.

           @ENABLE<RET>
           $OPR<RET>
           OPR>? one of the following
            ABORT      ALIGN      BACKSPACE       CANCEL      CLOSE
            CONTINUE   DEFINE     DISABLE         DISMOUNT    ENABLE
            ENTER      EXIT       FORWARDSPACE    HELP        HOLD
            IDENTIFY   MODIFY     MOUNT           NEXT        PUSH
            RELEASE    REPORT     REQUEUE         RESPOND     ROUTE
            SEND       SET        SHOW            SHUTDOWN    START
            STOP       SUPPRESS   SWITCH          TAKE        UNDEFINE
            WAIT
             or one of the following:
            LCP   NCP
           OPR>


                                   2-9
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


                                       NOTE

                   The NCP command appears in the above  example
                   when  your  installation  has DECnet software
                   and  your  system  has  been  generated   for
                   network  communication.  Refer to the TOPS-20
                   DECnet Reference Manual for a description  of
                   NCP commands.

       2.  Type a question mark after typing  a  letter.   OPR  responds
           with the commands that begin with that letter.

           OPR>A? one of the following:
            ABORT     ALIGN
           OPR>A

       3.  Type a question mark after typing the ABORT  command  to  the
           OPR>  prompt;  OPR then lists the available arguments for the
           ABORT command, retypes your command, and waits for one of the
           arguments.

           OPR>ABORT ?
            BATCH-STREAM      CARD-PUNCH   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
            PLOTTER           PRINTER      READER
           OPR>ABORT PRINTER 0<RET>
           OPR>
           08:56:41        Printer 0  --Aborting--
                           Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
           OPR>
           08:56:47        Printer 0  --End--
                           Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
                           -- Job Aborted by Operator --
           OPR>

       4.  Type the same  ABORT  command  as  above  with  the  argument
           PRINTER  and then type a question mark.  OPR replies with the
           following:

           OPR>ABORT PRINTER ? unit number
             or one of the following:
            CLUSTER   DQS           LAT
           OPR>ABORT PRINTER

           Supply the unit number (0) and  then  type  another  question
           mark.   OPR  replies with any additional switches that may be
           supplied.

           OPR>ABORT PRINTER 0 ? /PURGE
             or /REASON:
             or confirm with carriage return
           OPR>ABORT PRINTER 0 /REASON:PRINTER JAM<RET>
           OPR>


                                   2-10
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


           09:30:45        Printer 0  --Aborting--
                           Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
           OPR>
           09:30:53        Printer 0  --End--
                           Job BATCH9 Req #133 for BHARDY
                           -- Job Aborted by Operator --
           OPR>



  2.4.2  ESCape - Using Recognition

  The ESCape feature allows recognition input and guide words to  appear
  on your console when you give an OPR command.

  To give the ESCape feature, you must press the key labeled  ESC,  SEL,
  PRE, or ALT depending on the type of terminal at your installation.

                                   NOTE

          All OPR commands accept  recognition  input  when  you
          press  the  ESCape  key, and most OPR commands provide
          guide words within parentheses.   However,  only  this
          section of the manual describes this ESCape feature of
          the OPR command language.

          ESCape is not available at remote  station  terminals.
          If you are at a remote station, use the HELP command.
  To use the ESCape key for recognition, type  the  first  one  or  more
  letters  of  an  OPR  command  to  make  it  unique from all other OPR
  commands, such as REQ (for the REQUEUE command), and press the  ESCape
  key.   OPR  responds  with  the  remainder of the command REQUEUE, the
  guide words within parentheses (current job  on),  and  waits  for  an
  argument for the REQUEUE command.

           <ESC>
             |
             V
       OPR>REQUEUE (current job on)

  Now type the first one or more letters of a REQUEUE argument, such  as
  PR  (for  PRINTER)  and  press  the ESCape key.  OPR responds with the
  remainder of the keyword PRINTER, the guide words  within  parenthesis
  (unit  number  or remote printer type), and waits for a unit number to
  be specified.

                               <ESC>
                                 |
                                 V
  OPR>REQUEUE (current job on) PRINTER (unit number or remote printer
  type)

  Now type the unit number of the line printer followed  by  the  REASON
  switch to the REQUEUE command.  After you type the slash and the first

                                   2-11
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  letter of the switch, press the ESCape key.   OPR  responds  with  the
  remainder of the switch name.

  OPR>REQUEUE (current job on) PRINTER (unit number or remote printer
  type) 0

    <ESC>
      |
      V
  /REASON:PRINTER JAM<RET>
  OPR>
  09:04:33        Printer 0  --Requeued--
                  Job CBUILD Req #188 for SAMBERG
  OPR>
  09:04:45        Printer 0  --End--
                  Job CBUILD Req #188 for SAMBERG
                  -- Job Requeued by OPERATOR --
  OPR>

                           ----- Examples -----

       1.  Type the  OPR  command  DISABLE  using  the  ESCape  key  for
           recognition.

                 <ESC><ESC>               <ESC>
                   |    |                   |
                   V    V                   V
           OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY (of) FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES<RET>
           OPR>

       2.  Type the OPR command ABORT with the use of the ESCape key for
           recognition and guide words.

               <ESC>                 <ESC>
                 |                     |
                 V                     V
           OPR>ABORT (Current Job on) BATCH-STREAM (Stream Number) 1

             <ESC>
               |
               V
           /NOERROR-PROCESSING<RET>
           OPR>
           10:23:02        Batch-stream 1  --Aborted--
                           Job TBUILD Req #127 for HURLEY
                           No Reason Given with Noerror-processing
           OPR>
           10:23:17        Batch-stream 1  --End--
                           Job TBUILD Req #127 for HURLEY
                           -- Job Aborted by Operator --
           OPR>



                                   2-12
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  2.4.3  <CTRL/H> - Reprinting Faulty Commands

  The <CTRL/H> feature prints the command you issued that resulted in an
  OPR  error  message.   An OPR error message occurs when a command does
  not have the correct format, syntax, switch, or value.

  When you press <CTRL/H>  after  the  error  message  appears  on  your
  terminal,  OPR retypes your entire command up to the point you entered
  the incorrect command input.

  To use the <CTRL/H> feature, type an OPR command such as SET with  the
  argument BATCH-STREAM but misspell the word STREAM.

       OPR>SET BATCH-STRAEM 0 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
       ? Does not match switch or keyword:"BATCH-STRAEM"
       <CTRL/H>
           |
           V
       OPR>SET

  Now retype the keyword BATCH-STREAM correctly, but type an  O  instead
  of a 0 (zero) for the same command.

       OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM O NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
       ? First nonspace character is not a digit:
       <CTRL/H>
           |
           V
       OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM

  Now retype the correct stream number of 0 and misspell  the  parameter
  NOOPR-INTERVENTION.  After the error message appears, you complete the
  command correctly.

       OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0 NOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
       ? Does not match switch or keyword
       <CTRL/H>
           |
           V
       OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
       OPR>
       11:32:34        Batch-stream 0  --Set Accepted--

       OPR>

                           ----- Example -----

  You specify the  OPR  command  to  show  the  status  of  printers  on
  cluster-node  GIDNEY,  but  you  mispell GIDNEY as GIDDNEY.  After you
  press <CTRL/H>, you type the correct node name.

       OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDDNEY<RET>


                                   2-13
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


       ? Does not match switch or keyword: "GIDDNEY"
       <CTRL/H>
           |
           V
       OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
       OPR>
       12:15:28                            -- System Device Status --

       Printer Status:

       Local printers
         Alias     Unit      Status
         -----     -----    ----------
         FOO         0      Idle

       DQS printers
         Alias           DQS queue name           Node    Status
         -----       --------------------------  ------   ------
         BAR                            SI$8700    JUNIPR   Idle
         BINN                          SWE$LN03    LATOUR   Idle

       OPR>




  2.4.4  Continuing OPR Command Lines

  While you are using the OPR program, you may find it necessary to type
  a  command line that is longer than the maximum line length allowed by
  your terminal.  You may continue typing the command past  the  end  of
  the  line  and  onto the next line, without pressing RETURN.  OPR will
  accept arguments which are divided between lines.   Note  the  divided
  word, ACCESS-NAME, in this example:

       OPR>DEFINE NODE IBMNOD:: SNA-WORKSTATION GATEWAY IBMNAM ACCESS-N
       AME ACCNAM<RET>

  If you want to avoid divided  words,  you  may  use  the  continuation
  feature.   At  the  end of the first line, type a space, then a hyphen
  (-), and press RETURN.  Then finish the command on the next line.

       OPR>DEFINE NODE IBMNOD:: SNA-WORKSTATION GATEWAY IBMNAM -<RET>
       ACCESS-NAME ACCNAM <RET>

  Note that the OPR> prompt does not appear on the  second  line,  after
  you  press  RETURN the first time.  The space and hyphen indicate that
  you wish to continue typing on the next line.



                                   2-14
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  2.5  OPR MESSAGES

  There are two types of messages that can appear at your OPR terminal:

       1.  ORION-to-OPR messages (Section 2.4.1)

       2.  OPR error messages (Section 2.4.2)



  2.5.1  ORION-To-OPR Messages

  The types of messages from ORION to OPR that can appear  at  your  OPR
  terminal are messages about:

       1.  Errors generated when ORION accepts an OPR command, but  does
           not have the appropriate devices, streams, nodes, or jobs

       2.  Jobs that start processing within a stream or device

       3.  Jobs that end processing within a stream or device

       4.  Actions that you must perform for various  devices,  streams,
           or jobs

       5.  Information you must respond to

       6.  Results from TAKE command files

  Each OPR command that is sent to ORION is time stamped by  ORION  when
  the command is accepted and executed.  The acceptance and execution of
  the command is then returned to the OPR terminal  in  the  form  of  a
  message  with  the  time  stamp  as  the first eight characters of the
  message.  For example, the OPR command:

       OPR>SET PRINTER 0 FORMS-TYPE NARROW<RET>

  returns to your terminal an ORION message in the format:

       hh:mm:ss        Printer 0  --Set Accepted--

  where hh is the hour, mm is the minutes, and ss is  the  seconds  that
  the command was accepted and executed.

  Likewise, when ORION accepts an  OPR  command  but  returns  an  error
  message,  that  message  also contains a time stamp.  For example, the
  OPR command:

       OPR>SHOW MESSAGES<RET>

  displays  the  following  information  message  when  there   are   no
  outstanding messages to respond to:


                                   2-15
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


       hh:mm:ss        --No Outstanding Messages--

  When a particular job starts to process within a batch stream or on  a
  device,  ORION  displays  a message at your OPR terminal to notify you
  that the stream or device is active.  For example:

       hh:mm:ss        Batch-stream 0  --Begin--
                       Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA

       OPR>

  appears on your terminal when a job named TEST begins  to  process  in
  batch  stream  0 for user ZINA.  The hh:mm:ss at the beginning of this
  message is the time that the job started to process  (hours,  minutes,
  seconds).

  Likewise, when a particular job ends its  processing  within  a  batch
  stream  or  on a device, ORION displays a message at your OPR terminal
  to notify you that the stream or device is not active and the job  has
  completed.  For example:

       hh:mm:ss        Batch-stream 0  --End--
                       Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA
       OPR>

  appears on your terminal when a job named TEST  ends  the  process  in
  batch  stream  0 for user ZINA.  The hh:mm:ss at the beginning of this
  message is the time that the job ended the  process  (hours,  minutes,
  seconds).



  2.5.2  OPR Error Messages

  In the course of using  OPR  to  enter  commands,  you  will  probably
  encounter  some  error  messages.  All OPR error messages begin with a
  question mark.  Error messages can  not  be  abbreviated  with  system
  switches  or  parameters as in some system programs.  In addition, the
  question mark does not represent a fatal error in OPR as  it  does  in
  some other system programs.

  When you receive an error message, you can  press  CTRL/H  (to  retype
  your  OPR  command  up  to  the  point where you entered the incorrect
  keyword, switch, or value) and then specify the correct input  to  the
  command.   As  with  all  OPR commands, if you do not know the command
  format or you have forgotten the keywords, switches, or values, type a
  question  mark  and  OPR  lists  the  command  arguments  that you can
  specify.

  Each error message described below and on the following pages explains
  the error message and a possible solution.



                                   2-16
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR


  ERROR:         ?  Ambiguous:

  Reason:        You abbreviated a keyword  or  switch  but  it  is  not
                 unique;  one  or  more  other keywords or switches also
                 have the same abbreviation.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype the command and  include  enough
                 letters   of   the   keyword  or  switch  to  make  the
                 abbreviation unique.


  ERROR:         ?  Does not match switch or keyword:  "argument"

  Reason:        You have specified a  switch  or  keyword  for  an  OPR
                 command  that  does  not  take  the  switch  or keyword
                 specified.  The invalid switch or keyword is  displayed
                 in quotes.

  Recovery:      Type the command again and specify the  correct  switch
                 or keyword.


  ERROR:         ?  File not found "file"

  Reason:        You have specified an OPR command  that  takes  a  file
                 specification  as  a  keyword  or switch value, but the
                 file was not found.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 correct file specification.


  ERROR:         ?   First  nonspace   character   is   not   a   digit:
                 "character"

  Reason:        You have specified a keyword or switch value that  must
                 be numeric, but the first character is an alphabetic or
                 is a special character.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                 numeric  keyword  or  switch  value with any alphabetic
                 character.




                                   2-17
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



  ERROR:         ?  Invalid character in number

  Reason:        You have specified a numeric value to  an  argument  or
                 switch  that  is  less than or greater than the allowed
                 value range.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                 numeric  value  that  is  within the allowable range of
                 values.


  ERROR:         ?  Invalid device terminator:  "device name"

  Reason:        You have specified a device with an  illegal  character
                 in its name or you did not include the colon at the end
                 of the device name.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 device name with the correct characters and include the
                 colon.


  ERROR:         ?  Invalid guide word

  Reason:        You have specified a guide word that does  not  pertain
                 to   the   OPR  command  that  you  specified,  or  you
                 misspelled the guide word, or you used recognition (you
                 pressed  the  ESCape  key)  and  then  pressed <CTRL/W>
                 before you pressed the carriage return.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype the command.  If you  must  have
                 guide  words with the OPR command, use recognition with
                 the ESCape key.


  ERROR:         ?  Invalid node name

  Reason:        You have specified a node name or number  to  a  /NODE:
                 switch  that  has  not been enabled, does not exist, is
                 currently off-line, or has been misspelled.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 correct node name or number to the /NODE:  switch.  You
                 might have to ENABLE the node before  you  reissue  the
                 command.





                                   2-18
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



  ERROR:         ?  Invalid OPR Command Specified "command"

  Reason:        You have specified an invalid OPR command.

  Recovery:      Type a question mark to the OPR prompt to get a list of
                 valid OPR commands.


  ERROR:         ?  Invalid wildcard designator

  Reason:        You have specified a wildcard character (* or %) within
                 a file specification for a keyword or switch value.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype the command and specify the file
                 specification    without   any   wildcard   characters.
                 OPR/ORION will not accept  wildcard  characters  within
                 the file specifications.

  ERROR:         % No help available for "command"

  Reason:        You have specified an invalid OPR command as a  keyword
                 to the HELP command.

  Recovery:      Give the HELP HELP command  to  get  a  list  of  valid
                 keywords (OPR commands) to the HELP command.


  ERROR:         ?  No such filename

  Reason:        You have specified a filename as a  keyword  or  switch
                 value, but the filename does not exist as you specified
                 it.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 correct filename as the keyword or switch value.


  ERROR:         ?  No such file type "file-name"

  Reason:        You have specified a file type as a keyword  or  switch
                 value,  but  the  file  type  does  not  exist  as  you
                 specified it.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 correct file type as the keyword or switch value.








                                   2-19
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



  ERROR:         ?  Not a quoted string - does  not  begin  with  double
                 quote


  Reason:        You have specified a message text, but did not  include
                 it within double quotes ("message text").

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 message text within the required double quotes.


  ERROR:         ?  Not confirmed

  Reason:        You have specified too many keywords or switches to  an
                 OPR  command.  OPR expected a carriage return after one
                 of the keywords or switches specified.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H; OPR will retype the  command  up  to  the
                 point  where a carriage return is expected.  Then press
                 carriage return.


  ERROR:         ?  Null switch or keyword given

  Reason:        You have specified an OPR command  without  giving  the
                 required switch or keyword to the command.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H; OPR will retype the  command  up  to  the
                 point where you omitted the required switch or keyword.
                 If you do not know the required switch or  keyword  for
                 the  command, type a question mark and OPR will display
                 the necessary arguments.


  ERROR:         ?  Number must be positive "negative-number"

  Reason:        You have specified a negative value  for  a  device  or
                 stream number.  OPR will not accept negative numbers.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                 positive integer as a device or stream number.


  ERROR:         ?  Only one file allowed

  Reason:        You  have  specified  the  BACKSPACE  or   FORWARDSPACE
                 command  with  the  /FILE  switch  and  a numeric value
                 greater than 1.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H; OPR will retype the  command  up  to  the
                 point  where  you entered the number of files.  You can
                 then enter 1  or  press  carriage  return.   The  /FILE
                 switch value defaults to 1.


                                   2-20
                        THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR



  ERROR:         ?  Priority not in range "nn"

  Reason:        You  have  specified  a  priority  number  in  the  SET
                 JOB-PRIORITY command that is not in the range from 0 to
                 63.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H  or  retype  the  command  and  specify  a
                 priority number from 0 to 63.


  ERROR:         ?  Too many characters in node name "node-name"

  Reason:        You have specified too many characters in a  node  name
                 specification   to  the  /NODE:   switch.   The  /NODE:
                 switch can only  have  from  one  to  six  alphanumeric
                 characters.

  Recovery:      Press CTRL/H or retype  the  command  and  specify  the
                 correct  node  name  for  the  /NODE:   switch with six
                 characters or less.




                                   2-21






                                   3-1




                                CHAPTER 3
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS


  This chapter describes each of the OPR commands in  detail.   All  OPR
  commands  must end with a carriage return (that is, you must press the
  key labeled RETURN or CR).

  The OPR commands are in alphabetical order.





                                   3-1
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ABORT)


  ABORT - Aborting Jobs



  Function

       The ABORT command terminates a job request that is in progress on
       an input/output device or in a batch stream.


  Format

       OPR>ABORT keyword nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument
                                     READER

       followed by its stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

                                     aliasname
       followed by:                  CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, one or more of the following switches:

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /NODE:node-name::
                                     /PURGE
                                     /REASON:comment

       or one of these switches (BATCH-STREAM only):


                                   3-2
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ABORT)


                                     /ERROR-PROCESSING
                                     /NOERROR-PROCESSING

[TODO]
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch stream that has a
                          job  currently  active  within  it.   A  batch
                          stream is  a  pseudo-terminal  that  interacts
                          with the system to execute a batch job.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device  that
                          has a job currently being output on it.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          that has a job currently being output on it.

       PLOTTER            specifies a particular plotter device that has
                          a job currently being output on it.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

|            nn            specifies the unit number of the line printer.
|                          You must specify this unit number; there is no
|                          default.

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename


                                   3-3
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ABORT)
                                 (ABORT)


                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric   characters,   underscores,  and
                          dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is processed.  The double colon (::) following
                          the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"


                                   3-4
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ABORT)
                                 (ABORT)


                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

       READER             specifies a particular card-reader device that
                          has  a  job  currently  being  read  into  the
                          system.  Jobs read  through  the  card  reader
                          become job requests in the batch input queue.

       nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                          stream to be aborted or the unit number of the
                          input/output   device   that   is    currently
                          processing  a  job.   You  must  specify  this
                          stream/unit number.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          double colon (::) following the node  name  is
                          optional.

       /ERROR-PROCESSING  specifies   the   default   of    the    ABORT
                          BATCH-STREAM  command  if  you  do not specify
                          either  the  /NOERROR-PROCESSING   or   /PURGE
                          switch.     The    /ERROR-PROCESSING    switch
                          specifies  that  if  a  user  provides   error
                          recovery  procedures  in  his  batch  job, the
                          error recovery procedures are not ignored.



                                   3-5
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ABORT)
                                 (ABORT)


       /NOERROR-PROCESSING

                          specifies that, if the user who submitted  the
                          batch  job provided error recovery procedures,
                          these procedures are ignored  when  the  batch
                          job is aborted.

       /PURGE             specifies that the entire job be removed  from
                          the  system.   All output from the job is also
                          aborted.  That is, there  will  be  no  header
                          and/or  trailer  pages  from the line printer.
                          The job is completely flushed from the system.
                          When  you  purge  a  batch job, no log file is
                          printed.

       /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment as to why  the
                          job has been aborted.  This comment appears in
                          the batch log file and at the user's terminal.
                          If  the  comment  is  more  than  one  line in
                          length, you can end  the  first  line  with  a
                          hyphen  and a carriage return and continue the
                          comment  on  the  next  line.   If  you  press
                          carriage  return  immediately after the colon,
                          OPR responds with the instruction:  ENTER TEXT
                          AND  TERMINATE WITH ^Z.  You can then enter as
                          many lines of text as  necessary.   When  your
                          comment(s)  have  been entered, press the CTRL
                          key  and  the  key  labeled  Z  simultaneously
                          (CTRL/Z) and the OPR> prompt reappears.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       When you use the READER keyword, the only switches available  are
       the  /NODE:   and  /REASON:   switches.  This is because a reader
       input job does not become a request until  the  last  card  ($EOJ
       card) has been read.

       The /ERROR-PROCESSING and /NOERROR-PROCESSING switches are  valid
       only with the BATCH-STREAM keyword.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the ABORT command to abort a  batch-stream  job  with
           NOERROR-PROCESSING  because  you  were instructed to do so by
           the user who submitted the job.

               _____ ____________ _ ___________________________ _____
           OPR>ABORT BATCH-STREAM 2 /NOERROR-PROCESSING/REASON: <RET>
           ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z
           __ __________ ___ __________ __ __ __ __ ___________________
           AS OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY USER<P.HURLEY><RET>


                                   3-6
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ABORT)
                                 (ABORT)


           ^Z
            ^
            |
           <CTRL/Z>
           OPR>
           12:31:05        Batch-stream 2  --Aborted--
                           Job TEST09 Req #132 for P.HURLEY
                           AS OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY USER
                           <P.HURLEY> with Noerror-processing
           OPR>
           12:31:17        Batch-stream 2  --End--
                           Job TEST09 Req #132 for P.HURLEY
                           -- Job Aborted by Operator --
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the ABORT command to abort a job currently being read
           through the card reader.

               _____ ______ ______
           OPR>ABORT READER 0<RET>
           OPR>
            9:34:45        Reader 0  --Aborted--
           OPR>































                                   3-7
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ALIGN)
                                 (ALIGN)


  ALIGN - Aligning Printer Paper
  ALIGN - Aligning Printer Paper



  Function
  Function

       The ALIGN command prints a "forms-alignment"  file  on  the  line
       printer so that you can align the paper.

       At various times, you may have  to  align  special  forms  for  a
       particular  line printer job, such as payroll checks or invoices.
       The ALIGN command allows you, at these times, to adjust the forms
       and  the  line printer, if need be, as many times as necessary to
       print the job correctly.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>ALIGN keyword nn (or) LAT /switch (or) argument<RET>

       where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by its alias name

       or followed by its unit number:

                                     nn
|
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

       or                            LAT

       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /PAUSE:nnnn
                                     /REPEAT-COUNT:nnnn
                                     /STOP

       or, optionally, the following argument:

                                     alignment-filespec




                                   3-8
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ALIGN)
                                 (ALIGN)


  Keywords
  Keywords

       PRINTER            specifies the line  printer  (output  device).
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the
|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.

       nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                          that  will  print the forms to be aligned (for
                          example, 0  for  LPT0,  1  for  LPT1,  and  so
                          forth).  You must specify this unit number.

       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

            PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

            SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.



                                   3-9
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ALIGN)
                                 (ALIGN)


            SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.
|
|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
|                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
|                          double colon (::) following the node  name  is
|                          optional.

       /PAUSE:nnnn        specifies the time in seconds (nnnn) that  the
                          line  printer  waits  between  repeats  of the
                          particular print  job.   The  default  of  the
                          /PAUSE:  switch is 10 seconds.

       /REPEAT-COUNT:nnnn

                          specifies the number of  times  to  print  the
                          file   (starting  from  the  beginning).   The
                          default of the /REPEAT-COUNT:  is 25.

       /STOP              specifies that normal printing be resumed  and
                          stops  the  alignment  of  forms  on  the line
                          printer.


  Argument
  Argument

       alignment-filespec

                          specifies a file to be  printed  for  aligning
                          the  forms.   This file is usually supplied by
                          those individuals at your installation who are
                          responsible  for  the  applications  the  file
                          would  be  used   for.    The   default   file
                          specification   is   SYS:formsname.ALP,  where


                                   3-10
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ALIGN)
                                 (ALIGN)


                          formsname is  the  name  of  the  form  to  be
                          aligned,  such as NARROW.  This alignment file
                          (or any supplied by an application individual)
                          has  a  format  of  one printed page of output
                          that can be repeated on the  line  printer  so
                          that you can align the paper.

  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       If you specify the ALIGN command and the alignment file cannot be
       found, the following error message appears:

            hh:mm:ss        Printer n  --Alignment Error--
                       Cannot read ALIGN file 'filespec'

       If you specify the ALIGN command with the /STOP switch while  the
       print request is printing, the following error message appears:

            hh:mm:ss        Printer n  --/STOP Illegal--
                       Alignment not in Progress

       If you specify  the  ALIGN  command  while  an  alignment  is  in
       progress, the following error message appears:

            hh:mm:ss        Printer n  --Alignment already in Progress--


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify line printer 0 in the ALIGN  command  to  align  some
           special forms and specify a repeat-count of 15.

               _____ _______ _ _____________________
           OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 /REPEAT-COUNT:15<RET>
           OPR>
           10:12:07        Printer 0  --Alignment Scheduled--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify line  printer  0  in  the  ALIGN  command  for  forms
           alignment  with the use of the alignment file PAYCHK.ALP.  By
           the default  values  of  the  /REPEAT-COUNT  and  the  /PAUSE
           switches,  the ALIGN command repeats the file 25 times with a
           pause of 10 seconds between repeats.

               _____ _______ _ _______________
           OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 PAYCHK.ALP<RET>
           OPR>
            9:34:12        Printer 0  --Alignment Scheduled--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify line  printer  3  in  the  ALIGN  command  for  forms
           alignment  with  a  pause of 30 seconds between repeats.  The
           forms are aligned after one repeat and you stop the alignment


                                   3-11
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ALIGN)
                                 (ALIGN)


           of forms on line printer 3.

               _____ _______ _ ______________
           OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /PAUSE:30<RET>
           OPR>
           10:34:03        Printer 3  --Alignment Scheduled--
               _____ _______ _ __________
           OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /STOP<RET>
           OPR>
           10:38:29        Printer 3  --Alignment Discontinued--
           OPR>












































                                   3-12
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (BACKSPACE)
                               (BACKSPACE)


  BACKSPACE - Backspacing Files by Page
  BACKSPACE - Backspacing Files by Page



  Function
  Function

       The BACKSPACE  command  reprints  pages  in  the  file  currently
       printing on the line printer.

       At various times, you may have to  backspace  a  particular  file
       that  is currently being printed on the line printer, for example
       when the forms become jammed  in  the  printing  mechanism.   The
       BACKSPACE  command allows you to backspace the print file so that
       the pages of the file that were jammed  or  miscorrectly  printed
       can be repeated.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>BACKSPACE keyword nn (or) LAT /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by its alias name

       or followed by its unit number:

                                     nn

       or                            LAT

       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /COPIES:nnnn
                                     /FILE
                                     /PAGES:nnnn


  Keywords
  Keywords

       PRINTER            specifies the line  printer  (output  device).
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the
|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.



                                   3-13
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (BACKSPACE)
                               (BACKSPACE)


       nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                          that   will   backspace   the  file  currently
                          printing (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,
                          and  so  forth).   You  must specify this unit
                          number; there is no default.

       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

            PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

            SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

            SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric


                                   3-14
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (BACKSPACE)
                               (BACKSPACE)


                          characters in length.




















































                                   3-15
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (BACKSPACE)
                               (BACKSPACE)


  Switches
  Switches

       You must specify one of the following switches:

       /COPIES:nnnn       specifies the number of additional  copies  to
                          be  printed.   The number you specify is added
                          to the number of copies that the  user  queued
                          with  the  PRINT  command.   For example, if a
                          user issues the command:

                               PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25

                          and  you  issue  the  BACKSPACE  command  with
                          /COPIES:10  while  FOO.BAR  is printing on the
                          line  printer,  the  total  number  of  copies
                          printed will be 35.

       /FILE              specifies that one file be backspaced  when  a
                          multifile  PRINT  request  has been given by a
                          user.  For  example,  if  a  user  issues  the
                          command:

                               PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR

                          and you issue the BACKSPACE command with /FILE
                          while   FOO3.BAR   is  printing  on  the  line
                          printer, FOO2.BAR will be printed again.

       /PAGES:nnnn        specifies the number of pages to be backspaced
                          for  the file that is currently being printed.
                          The /PAGES:  switch  is  the  default  of  the
                          BACKSPACE  command.   If  you  do  not specify
                          either the /COPIES:  or the /FILE switch, then
                          you  must  specify  the  /PAGES:  switch.  The
                          number  (nnnn)  you  specify  refers  to   the
                          physical number of pages and not to the number
                          of pages that contains the file on disk.

|       Followed optionally by the switch:
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions


                                   3-16
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (BACKSPACE)
                               (BACKSPACE)


       When you give a BACKSPACE PRINTER command, the system prints  the
       output  in  the  printer  buffer  (which  may  contain on or more
       printed  pages)  before  BACKSPACing  the  number  of  pages  you
       specify.  Therefore, when you use the /PAGES:  switch, you should
       add two or three pages to the total number of pages you  wish  to
       BACKSPACE.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify line printer 0 in the BACKSPACE  command  to  add  an
           additional 15 copies to a print request of 15 copies.

               _________ _______ _ _______________
           OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
           OPR>
           13:43:53        Printer 0  --Backspaced 15 Copies--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify line printer 2 in the BACKSPACE command to  backspace
           one file from the file currently printing.

               _________ _______ _ __________
           OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
           OPR>
           11:34:23        Printer 2  --Backspaced 1 File--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify line printer 1 in the BACKSPACE command to  backspace
           12  pages from the page currently printing because of a paper
           jam.

               _________ _______ _ _____________
           OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
           OPR>
           10:23:50        Printer 1  --Backspaced 12 Pages--
           OPR>



















                                   3-17
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CANCEL)
                                 (CANCEL)


  CANCEL - Canceling Requests
  CANCEL - Canceling Requests



  Function
  Function

       The  CANCEL  command  cancels  any  job  request  that  is  being
       processed or is waiting to be processed.  In addition, the CANCEL
       command can be used to cancel any user's request for  a  tape  or
       structure mount.

       When a user submits a request for a job  to  be  processed  or  a
       request  to  mount  a  tape  or  structure,  the system assigns a
       request number to the request.  To display the  requests  at  any
       time,  give  the  OPR  command SHOW QUEUES.  The requests will be
       displayed with the request numbers and the names of the users who
       submitted the jobs.  You cancel requests by specifying either the
       request number or the user name.  Optionally, you can cancel  all
       requests for a particular device or those of a particular type on
       the specified device.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>CANCEL keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-REQUEST
                                     CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                     MOUNT-REQUEST
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                     PLOTTER-REQUEST
                                     PRINTER-REQUEST

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     request-id-number
                                     user-name
                                     *

       and for MOUNT-REQUEST, the argument:

                                     structure-name:

       and, optionally, the switch:  /REASON:comment

       and, optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::



                                   3-18
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CANCEL)
                                 (CANCEL)


|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-REQUEST      specifies either a  job  in  the  batch  queue
                          waiting to be processed or a batch job that is
                          currently processing in a batch stream.

       CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST

                          specifies either a  job  for  the  card  punch
                          waiting  to  be  processed  or  a  job that is
                          currently being output on the card punch.

       MOUNT-REQUEST      specifies either a mount request  for  a  tape
                          mount   or   a   structure  mount.   With  the
                          MOUNT-REQUEST  keyword,  you  can  specify   a
                          single  mount request-id-number or a structure
                          name,  and  an  optional  /REASON:.   If   you
                          specify  a  structure name, the CANCEL command
                          cancels all requests for that structure.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST

                          specifies either  a  job  for  the  paper-tape
                          punch   waiting  to  be  processed  or  a  job
                          currently  being  output  on  the   paper-tape
                          punch.

       PLOTTER-REQUEST    specifies either a job for the plotter waiting
                          to  be  processed  or  a  job  currently being
                          output on the plotter.

       PRINTER-REQUEST    specifies either a job for  the  line  printer
                          waiting  to  be  processed  or a job currently
                          printing on a line printer.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       request-id-number  cancels a single request as specified  by  the
                          appropriate  keyword  for  a  particular user.
                          The number can be a job that is either waiting
                          to  be processed or is currently processing on
                          a device or in a batch stream.

       user-name          cancels  all  jobs   as   specified   by   the
                          appropriate  keyword  for  a  particular user.


                                   3-19
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CANCEL)
                                 (CANCEL)


                          The user name can be from 1 to 39 alphanumeric
                          characters  (normally the user's surname) that
                          identifies  the   user   and   his   logged-in
                          directory.   Do  not  enclose the user name in
                          angle brackets.  This argument cannot be  used
                          with the MOUNT-REQUEST keyword.

       *                  cancels  all  jobs   as   specified   by   the
                          appropriate  keyword for all requests, waiting
                          and processing, from all users.  This argument
                          cannot be used with the MOUNT-REQUEST keyword.

       structure-name:    specifies a 1- to 6-character  structure  name
                          that  users  have requested you to mount.  The
                          name must end with  a  colon  (:).   When  you
                          cancel  a  MOUNT-REQUEST for a structure name,
                          all requests  for  that  structure  mount  are
                          canceled  providing  that  the requests are in
                          the waiting status.  (Refer to the description
                          of  the  SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS command in
                          this chapter.) If  the  structure  is  in  the
                          dismount status, you must cancel the structure
                          separately, using the  request-id-number  with
                          the CANCEL command.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          double colon (::) following the node  name  is
                          optional.   This  switch can only be used with
                          the * argument.

       /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment as to why  the
                          MOUNT-REQUEST to mount a tape or structure has
                          been canceled.  This comment  appears  in  the
                          batch log file and at the user's terminal.  If
                          the comment is more than one line  in  length,
                          you can end the first line with a hyphen and a
                          carriage return and continue  the  comment  on
                          the  next  line.  If you press carriage return


                                   3-20
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CANCEL)
                                 (CANCEL)


                          immediately after the colon, OPR responds with
                          the  instruction:   ENTER  TEXT  AND TERMINATE
                          WITH ^Z.  You can then enter as many lines  of
                          text  as necessary.  When your comment(s) have
                          been entered, press the CTRL key and  the  key
                          labeled Z simultaneously (CTRL/Z) and the OPR>
                          prompt reappears.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       You cannot cancel any mount request after the tape  or  structure
       has been mounted on the device.  If you need to do this, you must
       ABORT the job and DISMOUNT the tape or structure.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify  the  CANCEL  MOUNT-REQUEST  command  to  cancel  all
           requests  for  the  mounting of structure SNOOPY:.  All mount
           requests for this structure are in the waiting status.

               ______ _____________ _______ _____________
           OPR>CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST SNOOPY: /REASON:<RET>
           [Enter text and terminate with ^Z]
           ______ ____ _________ ___________
           CANNOT FIND STRUCTURE SNOOPY<RET>
           _____ ___ _ __________
           THANK YOU - OPERATIONS^Z
                                  ^
                                  |
                                <CTRL/Z>
           OPR>
           15:32:08        --3 Mount Requests Canceled--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST for all batch requests  from
           user HOVSEPIAN.

               ______ _____________ ______________
           OPR>CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST HOVSEPIAN<RET>
           OPR>
           12:09:34        --2 Jobs Canceled--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the CANCEL  PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST  to  cancel  all
           requests from all users for that device.

               ______ ________________ ______
           OPR>CANCEL PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH *<RET>
           OPR>
           09:34:56        --7 Jobs Canceled--
           OPR>





                                   3-21
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CLOSE)
                                 (CLOSE)


  CLOSE - Closing the Log Buffer File
  CLOSE - Closing the Log Buffer File



  Function
  Function

       The CLOSE command closes the current ORION log  buffer  file  and
       creates a new log buffer file.  The closed log file is written to
       disk so that you can copy or print an up-to-date file.

       The ORION log buffer file records all OPR-to-ORION  commands  and
       transactions performed at the operator's console.  When the CLOSE
       command  is  issued,  these   commands   and   transactions   are
       transferred  to  the ORION-SYSTEM.LOG file and the buffer file is
       cleared.  You can then print the  ORION-SYSTEM.LOG  file  on  the
       line printer to obtain a hard-copy of all the operating processes
       for a given time period.

       You may choose a name other than ORION-SYSTEM.LOG for  the  ORION
       log  buffer  file at GALGEN time.  Please see your System Manager
       in reference to GALGEN.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>CLOSE keyword /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        LOG

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       LOG                specifies the ORION log buffer file  that  was
                          created  with the start-up of ORION.  For this
                          logging  facility  to  occur,  you  must  have
                          previously  given  the ENABLE LOGGING command.
                          The ENABLE LOGGING  command  is  described  in
                          this  chapter.   To stop the logging facility,
                          you must give  the  DISABLE  LOGGING  command.
                          The  DISABLE  LOGGING  command is described in
                          this chapter.

  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within


                                   3-22
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (CLOSE)
                                 (CLOSE)


|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Example
  Example

       1.  Specify the CLOSE command in its full context  to  close  the
           ORION log file and open a new log file automatically.

               _____ ________
           OPR>CLOSE LOG<RET>
           OPR>







































                                   3-23
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (CONTINUE)
                                (CONTINUE)


  CONTINUE - Restarting a Stopped Job
  CONTINUE - Restarting a Stopped Job


  Function
  Function

       The CONTINUE command continues a job request on a device that was
       temporarily stopped with the STOP command.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>CONTINUE keyword nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument
                                     READER

       followed by the stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range of numbers:        n:m

|       and, optionally, one or both of the following switches:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /NODE:node-name::

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|       followed by its alias name

       or followed by its unit number:

                                     nn
|
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

                                     CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::


                                   3-24
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (CONTINUE)
                                (CONTINUE)


       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name












































                                   3-25
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (CONTINUE)
                                (CONTINUE)


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch stream (or  range
                          of batch streams) that was temporarily stopped
                          from processing a batch job.  A  batch  stream
                          is  a  pseudo-terminal that interacts with the
                          system to execute a batch job.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch  device  (or
                          range   of   card-punch   devices)   that  was
                          temporarily   stopped   from   processing    a
                          card-punch job.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          (or  range  of  paper-tape-punch devices) that
                          was  temporarily  stopped  from  processing  a
                          paper-tape-punch job.

       PLOTTER            specifies  a  particular  plotter  device  (or
                          range of plotter devices) that was temporarily
                          stopped from processing a plotter job.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service


                                   3-26
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (CONTINUE)
                                (CONTINUE)


                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is processed.  The double colon (::) following
                          the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"



                                   3-27
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (CONTINUE)
                                (CONTINUE)


                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

       READER             specifies a particular card-reader device  (or
                          range   of   card-reader   devices)  that  was
                          temporarily   stopped   from   processing    a
                          card-reader job.

       nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                          stream  to  be continued or the unit number of
                          the  input/output   device   that   has   been
                          temporarily  stopped.   You  must specify this
                          stream/unit number.

       n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                          can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                          stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                          the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                          low-order number  and  the  m  represents  the
                          high-order number.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::) following the node name is optional.




                                   3-28
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (CONTINUE)
                                (CONTINUE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the CONTINUE command  to  continue  the  card  reader
           after it was stopped to prevent a card-reader jam.

               ________ ______ ______
           OPR>CONTINUE READER 0<RET>
           OPR>
            9:23:19        Reader 0  --Continued--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the CONTINUE command to continue a batch stream  that
           was previously stopped.

               ________ ____________ ______
           OPR>CONTINUE BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>
           OPR>
           12:10:12        Batch-stream 2   --Continued--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the CONTINUE command to continue  all  line  printers
           after they were stopped temporarily.

               ________ _______ ________
           OPR>CONTINUE PRINTER 0:1<RET>
           OPR>
           11:40:23        Printer 0   --Continued--
           OPR>
           11:40:24        Printer 1   --Continued--
           OPR>


























                                   3-29
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DEFINE)
                                 (DEFINE)


  DEFINE - Defining a Node
  DEFINE - Defining a Node



  Function
  Function

       The DEFINE command specifies the name and  characteristics  of  a
       node  that  is  to  perform  IBM communications.  DEFINE sets the
       node's parameters to the  default  parameters  of  the  SET  NODE
       command.  Refer to the SET NODE command.

       The DEFINE command is applicable only if  your  installation  has
       IBM  communications  software.   For  more  information about IBM
                                                          _______    ___
       communications   software,   refer    to    the    TOPS-20    IBM
       _____________________ _______
       Emulation/Termination Manual.

                                                              __________
       For information about SNA workstations, refer to  the  DECnet/SNA
       _______  ______  ___  _____  ______  ___ __________ _____
       TOPS-20  Remote  Job  Entry  User's  and Operator's Guide and the
       __________ _______ __________ _____
       DECnet/SNA Gateway Management Guide.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name[::] keyword /switch arguments<RET>

       where:

       node-name must be:            a valid node name in your  network,
                                     optionally  followed  by two colons
                                     (::).

       keyword, switch and argument format is:

            2780             /                                       \
            3780            /  /SIGNON-REQUIRED    mode  port  line   \
            HASP            \  /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED                    /
            SNA-WORKSTATION  \ ACCESS-NAME name GATEWAY gateway-name /

       keyword is one of:            2780
                                     3780
                                     HASP
                                     SNA-WORKSTATION

       switch (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP) is one of:

                                     /SIGNON-REQUIRED
                                     /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED


       arguments (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP) are all of the following,
       separated by spaces:


                                   3-30
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DEFINE)
                                 (DEFINE)


            mode is one of:          EMULATION
                                     TERMINATION

            port is a valid portnumber:

                                     nn

            line is a valid line number:

                                     n

       arguments (for SNA-WORKSTATION) are all of the following,
       separated by spaces:

                                     ACCESS-NAME name
                                     GATEWAY gateway-name::


  DEFINE NODE parameters are further described below:

       node-name          specifies the node name of the node to perform
                          IBM  communications.   The  double  colon (::)
                          following the node name is optional.


  Keywords
  Keywords

       2780, 3780, HASP, or SNA-WORKSTATION

                          specifies  a  protocol  to  use  (2780,  3780,
                          SNA-WORKSTATION,  or HASP multileaving).  HASP
                          is the default.


  Switches
  Switches (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP):

       /SIGNON-REQUIRED   specifies that the remote station must sign on
                          when  starting  up the node.  For emulation, a
                          signon card must be sent to  the  IBM  system.
                          For   termination,   a  signon  card  must  be
                          verified from the station (node) and the  card
                          must  be  the  first one read.  In addition, a
                          signon file must exist in the <DN60>  area  in
                          the format of <node-name>.SON.









                                   3-31
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DEFINE)
                                 (DEFINE)


       /NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED

                          specifies that the user at the node  does  not
                          need to sign on when starting up the node (see
                          /SIGNON-REQUIRED).      The     default     is
                          /SIGNON-REQUIRED.

  Arguments
  Arguments (for 2780, 3780, AND HASP)

       EMULATION or TERMINATION

                          specifies the mode.  EMULATION specifies  that
                          the  node  is  to  communicate  with  a  host.
                          TERMINATION specifies  that  the  node  is  to
                          communicate    with    a    remote    station.
                          TERMINATION is the default.

       nn                 specifies the port number from the  front  end
                          to the TOPS-20 host.

       n                  specifies the line number from the  front  end
                          to  the  modem  communicating  with the remote
                          site.

                                 CAUTION

          For a KL10, the port number  can  be  either  11  (for
          DTE1),  12  (for DTE2), or 13 (for DTE3).  For a KS10,
          the port number can be either 0 (for KMC/DMC  line  0)
          or  1  (for  KMC/DMC  line  1).  Never use port 0 on a
          KL10.

          For a KL10, the line number must be from 0 to 5; for a
          KS10, the line number must be either 0 or 1.


  Arguments
  Arguments (for SNA-WORKSTATION only):

       ACCESS-NAME name   is the name of a list of  access  information,
                          as  defined  in  the  .CFG  file  for  the SNA
                          gateway.

       GATEWAY gateway-name::

                          is the name  of  the  SNA  gateway  optionally
                          followed by a double colon (::).







                                   3-32
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (DEFINE)
                                 (DEFINE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You use the DEFINE command to define node IBM2.

               ______ ____ ______ ____ _________ __ ______
           OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM2:: HASP EMULATION 11 0<RET>
           OPR>
            9:18:34        -- Define for Node IBM2 Accepted --
           OPR>

       2.  You use the DEFINE command to define a remote station  as  an
           IBM 3780 to communicate from the host.

               ______ ____ ______ ____ ___________ __ ______
           OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM3:: 3780 TERMINATION 12 1<RET>
           OPR>
           15:32:09        -- Define for Node IBM3 Accepted --
           OPR>

       3.  You use the DEFINE command to define a node as an
           SNA-WORKSTATION.
               ______ ____ ______ _______________ _________________
           OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM4:: SNA-WORKSTATION ACCESS-NAME-<RET>
            ___ _______ __________
            RJE GATEWAY TOIBM<RET>
           OPR>
           16:32:09        -- Define for Node IBM4 Accepted --
           OPR>





























                                   3-33
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


  DEFINE - Defining Aliases for Printer Specifications
|  DEFINE - Defining Aliases for Printer Specifications
|
|
|
  Function
|  Function
|
|       The DEFINE ALIAS command  allows  you  to  define,  redefine,  or
|       undefine  an  alias name for printer specifications for DQS, LAT,
|       local, and cluster printers.  Once an  alias  is  defined  for  a
|       printer, that printer can be specified either by its alias or its
|       printer specification.
|
|       The SHOW ALIAS command displays each printer alias name  relative
|       to its printer specification.
|
|       Once you have defined an  alias  name  for  a  printer,  you  can
|       reference  that  printer  by  its  alias  in  the  syntax  of the
|       following commands:
|
|       ABORT PRINTER
|       ALIGN PRINTER
|       BACKSPACE PRINTER
|       CONTINUE PRINTER
|       DEFINE ALIAS
|       FORWARDSPACE PRINTER
|       NEXT PRINTER
|       REQUEUE PRINTER
|       ROUTE PRINTER
|       SET PRINTER
|       SHOW ALIAS
|       SHOW PARAMETERS PRINTER
|       SHOW STATUS PRINTER
|       SHUTDOWN PRINTER
|       START PRINTER
|       STOP PRINTER
|       SUPPRESS PRINTER
|
|
  Format
|  Format
|
|       OPR>DEFINE ALIAS alias-name keyword nn argument /switch<RET>
|
|       where:
|
|       alias-name                    is  a  unique  name   up   to   six
|                                     alphanumeric    characters    long,
|                                     including    the     non-alphabetic
|                                     characters:  '$', '.', or '_'.  The
|                                     first character of  an  alias  name
|                                     must be a non-numeric character and
|                                     cannot begin with a  'C',  'D',  or


                                   3-34
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|                                     'L'.
|
|       and, optionally, one or both of the following switches:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|                                     /NODE:node-name::
|
|       where keyword is one of the following:
|
|                                     CLUSTER nn
|                                             n:m
|       followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|
|       or                            DQS queuename
|       followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|
|       or                            LAT
|
|       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
|                                     SERVER "name"
|
|       or followed by:               PORT "name"
|                                     SERVER "name"
|
|       followed by the unit number:
|
|                                     nn
|
|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|
  Keywords
|  Keywords
|
|       CLUSTER nn         specifies a printer on a remote node within  a
|                          TOPS-20  cluster.   A  TOPS-20  cluster  is  a
|                          loosely coupled configuration of  between  two
|                          and  four  TOPS-20 processors.  Each processor
|                          in the configuration is identified by  a  node
|                          name.    For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,  and
|                          LOUIE::  can be three nodes within  a  cluster
|                          of TOPS-20 processors.
|
|                 NODE node-name::
|
|                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
|                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
|                          following the node name is not needed.
|
|                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::


                                   3-35
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
|                          be the local node or an alias.
|
|       DQS queuename      specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
|                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
|                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
|                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
|                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
|                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
|                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
|                          and dollar signs.
|
|                 NODE node-name::
|
|                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
|                          is processed.  The double colon (::) following
|                          the node name is not needed.
|
|                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
|                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
|                          alias.
|
|       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
|                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
|                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
|                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
|                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
|                          between your system, running LAT software, and
|                          the resource printer terminal.
|
|                          You     cannot     use      the      following
|                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:
|
|                                    SERVICE name only
|                                    SERVER name only
|                                    PORT name only
|                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
|                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names
|
|                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
|                          about LAT communications.
|
|                 PORT "name"
|
|                          specifies the communication path  between  the
|                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
|                          access point that the node represents  to  the
|                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
|                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,


                                   3-36
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|                          and dollar signs.
|
|                 SERVICE "name"
|
|                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
|                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
|                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
|                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
|                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
|                          signs.
|
|                 SERVER "name"
|
|                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
|                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
|                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
|                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
|                          characters in length.
|
|
  Switches
|  Switches
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.
|
|
  Examples
|  Examples
|
|       1.  Use the DEFINE ALIAS command to define an alias to a  printer
|           specification.
|
               ______ _____ ___ _______ _ ____ _____________
|           OPR>DEFINE ALIAS FOO CLUSTER 1 NODE GIDNEY::<RET>
|           OPR>
|            9:18:34        -- Alias FOO Defined --
|           OPR>
|
|           This command assigns the alias FOO to the CLUSTER  printer  1
|           for node GIDNEY.
|
|       2.  Use the DEFINE ALIAS command to redefine  the  alias  FOO  to
|           alias BAR.
|
               ______ _____ ___ ________
|           OPR>DEFINE ALIAS BAR FOO<RET>
|           OPR>
|           15:32:09        -- Alias FOO Defined --


                                   3-37
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (DEFINE ALIAS)
|                              (DEFINE ALIAS)


|           OPR>
|
|           This command changes the alias name from FOO to BAR.
|
|       3.  Use the DEFINE ALIAS command to undefine the alias BAR.
|
               ______ _____ ________
|           OPR>DEFINE ALIAS BAR<RET>
|           OPR>
|           16:32:09        -- Alias BAR Undefined --
|           OPR>
|










































                                   3-38
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


  DISABLE - Stopping System Process Features
  DISABLE - Stopping System Process Features



  Function
  Function

       The DISABLE  command  allows  you  to  turn  off  (or  stop)  the
       following features:

       1.  Automatic Volume Recognition feature (AVR) for magnetic  tape
           mounts.

       2.  Class  scheduling  for  various  job  processings   and   the
           accounting of CPU time assigned to different job classes.

       3.  File retrieval requests for off-line files.

       4.  The ORION logging facility for recording  OPR/ORION  commands
           and transactions.

       5.  The output display of various groupings of messages that were
           enabled with the ENABLE command.

       6.  Queue  requests  so  that  users  can  request  jobs  to   be
           processed.

       7.  Limit the output display for unprivileged users at  a  remote
           node.

       8.  Printing of log files on specific local printer(s).

       9.  DECnet connection attempts by NEBULA to remote NEBULAs in the
           TOPS-20 cluster.

      10.  Reporting by NEBULA of DECnet connection failures  to  remote
           NEBULAs in the cluster.

      11.  SEMI-OPR  commands  for  accessing  information  and  limited
           control of some output devices.
|
|      12.  The sending of ORION messages to one or more remote nodes  in
|           a TOPS-20 cluster.
|
|      13.  Unprivileged users from seeing all queued  print  jobs  on  a
|           remote node in the TOPS-20 cluster.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>DISABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>



                                   3-39
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


       where keyword can be one of the following:

                  AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION
|                  BROADCAST-MESSAGES
                  CLASS-SCHEDULER
                  DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS
                  FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAITS
                  LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS
                  LOGGING
                  OUTPUT-DISPLAY
                  PRINT-LOGFILES n
                  QUEUE-REQUESTS
                  REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES
                  SEMI-OPR
                  UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

       followed by one of these arguments:  (AVR only)

                                       TAPE-DRIVES
                                       tape-drive-name:

       or followed by one of these arguments:  (OUTPUT-DISPLAY only)

                                       ALL-MESSAGES
                                       BATCH-MESSAGES
                                       BUGCHK-MESSAGES
                                       BUGINF-MESSAGES
                                       CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                       CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
                                       DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
                                       DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
                                       FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
                                       LCP-MESSAGES
                                       MOUNT-MESSAGES
                                       NCP-MESSAGES
                                       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                       PLOTTER-MESSAGES
                                       PRINTER-MESSAGES
                                       READER-MESSAGES
                                       SYSTEM-MESSAGES
                                       USER-MESSAGES

       and, optionally, one or more of these switches:   (OUTPUT-DISPLAY
       keyword   only,   not   for   BUGCHK-,   BUGINF-,   DECNET-,   or
       SYSTEM-MESSAGES arguments)

                                       /INFORMATION-MESSAGES
                                       /JOB-MESSAGES
                                       /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

|       and optionally  the  following  keyword  for  the  OUTPUT-DISPLAY


                                   3-40
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


|       keyword:
|
|                                       NODE

       or for DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS and
       REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES, the optional switch:

                                        /NODE:node-name::

|       or the optional switch (except for OUTPUT-DISPLAY):
|
|                                        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

  Keywords
  Keywords

       AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION

                          specifies that  this  AVR  system  feature  be
                          disabled.   AVR  allows  you  to mount labeled
                          tapes without the need to IDENTIFY  the  tapes
                          to  the  system  with  a keyin.  When this AVR
                          feature is disabled, you  must  IDENTIFY  each
                          labeled  tape you mount.  Unlabeled tapes must
                          always be identified to the  system  with  the
                          IDENTIFY  command.   (Refer to the description
                          of the IDENTIFY command.)

|       BROADCAST-MESSAGES
|
|                          specifies to disable broadcast messages, which
|                          allows  ORION  messages generated on the local
|                          node to be sent to one or more  remote  nodes.
|                          It  also  allows  selective  sending  of these
|                          messages.

       CLASS-SCHEDULER    specifies a system program  be  disabled  that
                          allocates  portions  (or  percentages)  of the
                          central processor  unit  (CPU)  to  individual
                          groups  of  users.   These  groups  are called
                          classes and are set up by your System  Manager
                          in  the n-CONFIG.CMD file at system generation
                          time.  When the CLASS-SCHEDULER  is  disabled,
                          all  jobs  entered  into the system receive an
                          equal amount of CPU time; allocation is  on  a
                          first-come-first-served basis.

       DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS

                          specifies to disable DECnet  connections  from
                          being  made by NEBULA to remote systems within
                          the TOPS-20 cluster or to a particular  remote


                                   3-41
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


                          system.

       FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAIT

                          specifies  that  when  a  user  or  batch  job
                          requests  a  file  that  is off-line due to an
                          archival or a migration, the job does not wait
                          until  the request has been satisfied.  (Refer
                          to  the  TOPS-20  Operator's   Guide   for   a
                          discussion  of  archived  and migrated files.)
                          Instead, the user receives  an  error  message
                          indicating  that  the file cannot be retrieved
                          and the batch job ends in an error  (if  error
                          recovery has not been specified in the control
                          file).  If error recovery has  been  specified
                          in  the  control  file,  the  job continues to
                          process.

       LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS

                          specifies  to  return  from  enabled  printers
                          (ENABLE  PRINT-LOGFILES n), thus disabling the
                          printing of batch log files and spooled  files
                          on   specific  local  printers.   (See  ENABLE
                          LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS.)

       LOGGING            specifies   that   the   centralized   logging
                          facility  of  ORION be disabled (this facility
                          logs  all   messages   passing   through   the
                          operating  system and stores these messages in
                          a log file buffer).   When  this  facility  is
                          disabled,  there  are  no  records kept of the
                          messages and interactions  between  ORION  and
                          the   system.   However,  the  CTY  shows  all
                          messages and  interactions  if  you  have  not
                          DISABLEd the OUTPUT-DISPLAY of ALL-MESSAGES at
                          the CTY.

       OUTPUT-DISPLAY     specifies  that  the  display   of   specified
                          message groupings on your console be disabled.
                          The  groupings  are  specified  as  the  valid
                          arguments and switches to this keyword.

|            NODE          allows you to selectively choose  which  ORION
|                          messages   from  the  indicated  node  in  the
|                          cluster  are   displayed   on   the   operator
|                          terminal.   You  can specify the local node or
|                          an asterisk (*).  The asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       PRINT-LOGFILES n   specifies to stop an enabled local printer (n)


                                   3-42
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


                          from  printing  batch  log  files  and spooled
                          files.  (See ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES.)

       QUEUE-REQUESTS     specifies that  all  users  be  disabled  from
                          making any queue request.  When queue requests
                          are disabled, no user can submit  a  batch  or
                          reader  job,  a  card-punch, paper-tape-punch,
                          plotter, or a printer request to  the  system.
                          If  the  user  attempts to submit a job of any
                          kind, the message  "?Operator  Has  Restricted
                          Queue  Entry  Commands"  appears at the user's
                          terminal.

       REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES

                          specifies  to  discontinue  reporting   DECnet
                          connection  failures  to  remote  systems or a
                          specific remote system in the cluster.

       SEMI-OPR           specifies to disallow users with SEMI-OPERATOR
                          privilege  to  have limited control of certain
                          output  devices   and   to   access   operator
                          information.   The  OPR commands permitted and
                          their limitations are defined in Chapter 2.

       UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

                          specifies that an unprivileged user  may  only
                          view  his  own print requests on a remote node
                          in the cluster as a result of that user giving
                          an   @INFORMATION   OUTPUT  /DESTINATION-NODE:
                          command.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       The following  arguments  are  valid  for  the  AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-
       RECOGNITION keyword:

       TAPE-DRIVES        specifies that all tape drives on  the  system
                          be disabled from using AVR.

       tape-drive-name:   specifies the tape drive name that is disabled
                          from  using  AVR.  The colon must be included.
                          The name is in the format of MTAn:, where n is
                          the tape drive number.

       The  following  arguments  are  valid  with  the   OUTPUT-DISPLAY
       keyword.   Each  argument  suppresses  the  printing of a type of
       message on your OPR terminal.



                                   3-43
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


       Message Type       Cause

       ALL-MESSAGES       all the  types  of  messages  defined  by  the
                          following arguments

       BATCH-MESSAGES     users requesting BATCH processing

       BUGCHK-MESSAGES    BUGCHKs encountered by the system

       BUGINF-MESSAGES    BUGINFs encountered by the system

       CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                          users requesting card punch output

       CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES

                          card reader  file  processing  or  batch  jobs
                          submitted with the /READER switch

       DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES

                          DECnet events generated by NMLT20

       DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES

                          failure of an attempt to establish a  link  to
                          another node

       FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES

                          users requesting retrieval of files that  have
                          been archived or migrated to tape

       LCP-MESSAGES       LAT events noted by LCP

       MOUNT-MESSAGES     users requesting tape and structure mounts and
                          dismounts

       NCP-MESSAGES       users starting and shutting down network nodes
                          (valid  only  if  your installation has DECnet
                          software)

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                          users requesting paper-tape-punch output

       PLOTTER-MESSAGES   users requesting plotter output

       PRINTER-MESSAGES   users requesting line printer output



                                   3-44
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


       READER-MESSAGES    users  requesting  card  reader  input   (card
                          reader jobs become batch requests)

       SYSTEM-MESSAGES    various  system  messages  such  as:   job   0
                          crashes,   swapping  space,  SPT  space,  disk
                          space, and parity error conditions encountered
                          by the system

       USER-MESSAGES      users  making  requests  to  you  through  the
                          PLEASE program


  Switches
  Switches

       You  can  specify  the  following  switches  with  any   of   the
       OUTPUT-DISPLAY  arguments  except  BUGCHK-, BUGINF-, DECNET-, and
       SYSTEM-MESSAGES.  If you do not specify  one  of  these  switches
       with  any  OUTPUT-DISPLAY  argument,  all  three  are  assumed by
       default.

       /INFORMATION-MESSAGES

                          prohibits the printing of  messages  that  are
                          informational,  such as errors due to problems
                          in an application program.  Note that  one-way
                          PLEASE  messages  from  users  are  considered
                          information messages, since no  response  from
                          you is necessary.

       /JOB-MESSAGES      prohibits the printing of messages that notify
                          you  when  a  device  or  stream  has begun to
                          process a job request and when the job request
                          has ended its processing.

       /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

                          prohibits the printing of messages that notify
                          you   of   some  action  to  be  performed  as
                          requested by a user or a processing job.  Also
                          included  are  messages that require action to
                          be taken, but are not  job  or  WTOR  related.
                          All  operator-action messages must be answered
                          with the RESPOND command.

|                          NODE prohibits an  operator  from  selectively
|                          filtering  which  WTOs  and  WTORs from remote
|                          nodes are displayed on the operator terminal.

       You   can    specify    the    following    switch    with    the
       DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS     and     REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES
       keywords:


                                   3-45
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

|       You can specify the following switch with all keywords except the
|       OUTPUT-DISPLAY keyword:
|














































                                   3-46
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISABLE)
                                (DISABLE)


|            /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You have scheduled a system shutdown in two  hours  and  your
           queues have approximately two hours' worth of jobs left to be
           processed.  You disable queue requests so that the queues can
           be emptied before the system shutdown.

               _______ ___________________
           OPR>DISABLE QUEUE-REQUESTS<RET>
           OPR>
           16:34:03        --System Queue's Entry Processing Disabled--
           OPR>

       2.  You have started OPR and want  to  display  only  information
           messages.   By  default when OPR is started, all messages are
           displayed.  Therefore, you must disable all  messages  except
           information messages.

           @ENABLE<RET>
           $OPR<RET>
               _______ ____________ ________________________________
           OPR>DISABLE ALL-MESSAGES /JOB-MESSAGES/USER-MESSAGES<RET>
           OPR>
            8:45:18        Output display for OPR modified --
           OPR>

       3.  You DISABLE AVR on tape drive MTA2:   before  you  mount  and
           ready a scratch tape to be initialized.

               _______ ____________________________ __________
           OPR>DISABLE AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>
           OPR>














                                   3-47
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISMOUNT)
                                (DISMOUNT)


  DISMOUNT - Dismounting a Structure or Tape-drive
  DISMOUNT - Dismounting a Structure or Tape-drive



  Function
  Function

       The DISMOUNT command  allows  you  to  dismount  (and  remove)  a
       structure  currently  mounted  on a disk drive or a magnetic tape
       currently mounted on a tape drive.

       You can dismount a structure without removing the structure  from
       the  disk drive.  The structure is then dismounted from the local
       system and users on the system are prevented  from  mounting  the
       structure from the EXEC.

       You can also dismount a structure and remove the  structure  from
       the  disk  drive.   When  the  DISMOUNT  WITH  REMOVAL command is
       issued, the structure is queued for removal.  If other  local  or
       remote  users  have  mounted the structure, a message asks you if
       you want to proceed.  If you answer NO, the request is  canceled.
       If  you answer YES, the structure is dismounted from every system
       in the cluster, and you are asked to remove it.

       When you issue the DISMOUNT command for a tape  drive,  the  tape
       rewinds  itself completely from the take-up wheel, providing that
       no user is currently using the tape.  If a user is using the tape
       on  the  specified  tape  drive,  OPR  will  reject  the DISMOUNT
       command.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>DISMOUNT keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be:               STRUCTURE
                                           TAPE-DRIVE

       followed by the argument:           structure-name:

       or the argument:                    tape-drive-name:

       optionally followed by one of       NO-REMOVAL
       these arguments: (STRUCTURE only)   REMOVAL

|       optionally followed by the
|       switch:  /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name







                                   3-48
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISMOUNT)
                                (DISMOUNT)


  Keywords
  Keywords

       STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure  currently  mounted
                          on a disk drive.

       TAPE-DRIVE         specifies a tape drive  that  has  a  magnetic
                          tape mounted and ready on it.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       structure-name:    specifies the logical name of the structure to
                          dismount   and  remove.   The  colon  must  be
                          included with the  structure  name  specified.
                          An  example  of  a  logical name is DSKC:  for
                          Disk C.

       REMOVAL            specifies that the system giving the  DISMOUNT
                          command  is  to  have exclusive control of the
                          structure.  The system checks for use  of  the
                          structure  by  users  on another system within
                          the  cluster.   If  users  on  another  system
                          within the cluster have mounted the structure,
                          a message asks you whether or not  to  proceed
                          with   the   dismount.   If  the  response  is
                          PROCEED, then the structure  is  automatically
                          dismounted  with NO REMOVAL from all the other
                          systems  within  the  cluster,  and  then  the
                          structure  is  dismounted  for  removal on the
                          local system.

                          If the structure is  not  in  use  by  another
                          system,  the  structure  is dismounted and you
                          are asked to remove it.

                          On  a  non-cluster  system,  REMOVAL  is   the
                          default to the STRUCTURE keyword.

       NO-REMOVAL         dismounts the structure without  checking  for
                          use  of  the structure by users on another CFS
                          system and prints a message telling you not to
                          physically remove the structure.

                          On a CFS system, NO-REMOVAL is  the  STRUCTURE
                          keyword default.

       tape-drive-name:   specifies the logical name of the  tape  drive
                          which   currently  has  the  desired  tape  to
                          dismount on it.  The colon  must  be  included
                          with  the tape drive name.  The name is in the
                          format of MTAn:, where n  is  the  tape  drive


                                   3-49
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISMOUNT)
                                (DISMOUNT)


                          number.


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       If there are other users who have mounted the structure  and  you
       really  wish  to remove the structure, it is recommended that you
       send a message to all users of the system before you respond with
       YES,  to  allow  all  users  to  complete  their  tasks  on  that
       structure.

       A structure can be  DISMOUNTed  only  if  set  ACKNOWLEDGED;  you
       cannot DISMOUNT a structure that is set IGNORED.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the DISMOUNT with REMOVAL  command  to  dismount  the
           structure DEMO:  from all systems within the cluster.

               ________ _________ _____ ____________
           OPR>DISMOUNT STRUCTURE DEMO: REMOVAL<RET>
           OPR>
           10:14:41  <1>    -- DISMOUNT QUERY --
                           Structure DEMO: (Alias DEMO:) is in use by
                           RONCO::, GIDNEY::, THEP::
                           and can't be removed from the cluster
                           unless it's dismounted with NO-REMOVAL
                           from the systems.
                           Respond with PROCEED to dismount
                           the structure from the above systems or
                           Respond with ABORT to terminate
                           the dismount request

               _______ _ ____________
           OPR>RESPOND 1 PROCEED<RET>
           OPR>
           10:15:00         -- REMOTE DISMOUNT STATUS --
                           Structure DEMO: dismounted from RONCO::,
                            GIDNEY::, THEP::



                                   3-50
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (DISMOUNT)
                                (DISMOUNT)


           OPR>
           10:15:01         -- STRUCTURE DISMOUNTED --
                           Structure DEMO dismounted

           10:15:01         -- DISMOUNT STRUCTURE --
           Remove DEMO: (alias DEMO:)
           User OPERATOR, Job 66, Terminal 233

           DISK DRIVE INFORMATION                   DISK PACK INFO...
                 Chan-Cont   Disk   Mount   Mount                Usage
            Type   Drive    Status  Status  Count   Name         Options
            ---- --------- -------- ------- -----   ------------ -------
            RA81 7,03,12   Avail    Free            DEMO   (1/1)
           Structure cannot be mounted again unless MOUNTed via OPR
            or until removed

           OPR>

       2.  Specify the DISMOUNT command  to  dismount  the  tape  volume
           currently mounted on tape drive MTA0:.

               ________ __________ __________
           OPR>DISMOUNT TAPE-DRIVE MTA0:<RET>
           OPR>
           16:45:01          -- MTA0:  Unloaded --
           OPR>




























                                   3-51
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


  ENABLE - Allowing System Process Features
  ENABLE - Allowing System Process Features


  Function
  Function

       The ENABLE command allows you to turn on (or start) the following
       features:

       1.  Automatic Volume Recognition feature (AVR) for magnetic  tape
           mounts.

       2.  Class  scheduling  for  various  job  processings   and   the
           accounting of CPU time assigned to different job classes.

       3.  File retrieval requests for off-line files.

       4.  The ORION logging facility for recording  OPR/ORION  commands
           and transactions.

       5.  The output display of various groupings of messages that were
           enabled with the ENABLE command.

       6.  Queue  requests  so  that  users  can  request  jobs  to   be
           processed.

       7.  Limit the output display for unprivileged users at  a  remote
           node.

       8.  Printing of log files on specific local printer(s).

       9.  DECnet connection attempts by NEBULA to remote NEBULAs in the
           TOPS-20 cluster.

      10.  Reporting by NEBULA of DECnet connection failures  to  remote
           NEBULAs in the cluster.

      11.  SEMI-OPR  commands  for  accessing  information  and  limited
           control of some output devices.
|
|      12.  The sending of ORION messages to one or more remote nodes  in
|           a TOPS-20 cluster.
|
|      13.  Unprivileged users from seeing all queued  print  jobs  on  a
|           remote node in the TOPS-20 cluster.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>ENABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:


                                   3-52
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


                  AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION
|                  BROADCAST-MESSAGES
                  CLASS-SCHEDULER
                  DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS
                  FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAITS
                  LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS
                  LOGGING
                  OUTPUT-DISPLAY
                  PRINT-LOGFILES n
                  QUEUE-REQUESTS
                  REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES
                  SEMI-OPR
                  UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

       followed by one of these arguments (AVR only):

                                       TAPE-DRIVES
                                       tape-drive-name:

       or followed by one or more of these switches:
       (CLASS-SCHEDULER only)

                                       /CLASS-ASSIGNMENTS:ACCOUNT
                                                          POLICY-PROGRAM

                                       /WINDFALL:ALLOCATED
                                                 WITHHELD

       or followed by one of these arguments: (OUTPUT-DISPLAY only)

                                       ALL-MESSAGES
                                       BATCH-MESSAGES
                                       BUGCHK-MESSAGES
                                       BUGINF-MESSAGES
                                       CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                       CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
                                       DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
                                       DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
                                       FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
                                       LCP-MESSAGES
                                       MOUNT-MESSAGES
                                       NCP-MESSAGES
                                       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
                                       PLOTTER-MESSAGES
                                       PRINTER-MESSAGES
                                       READER-MESSAGES
                                       SYSTEM-MESSAGES
                                       USER-MESSAGES

       and, optionally, one or more of these switches:   (OUTPUT-DISPLAY
       keyword   only,   not   for   BUGCHK-,   BUGINF-,   DECNET-,   or


                                   3-53
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


       SYSTEM-MESSAGES arguments)

                                       /INFORMATION-MESSAGES
                                       /JOB-MESSAGES
                                       /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

|       and optionally  the  following  keyword  for  the  OUTPUT-DISPLAY
|       keyword:
|
|                                       NODE

       or for DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS and
       REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES, the optional switch:

                                        /NODE:node-name::

|       or the optional switch (except for OUTPUT-DISPLAY):
|
|                                        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION

                          specifies that  this  AVR  system  feature  be
                          enabled.   AVR  allows  you  to  mount labeled
                          tapes without the need to identify  each  tape
                          to   the   system   with  a  keyin.   However,
                          unlabeled tapes must always be  identified  to
                          the  system with the IDENTIFY command.  (Refer
                          to the description of the IDENTIFY command.)

|       BROADCAST-MESSAGES
|
|                          specifies to enable broadcast messages.   This
|                          allows  ORION  messages generated on the local
|                          node to be sent to one or more  remote  nodes.
|                          It  also  allows  selective  sending  of these
|                          messages.  For example, if the local  node  is
|                          generating an excessive amount of BUGCHKS, you
|                          may want to send all messages except BUGCHKs.

       CLASS-SCHEDULER    specifies a system  program  be  enabled  that
                          allocates  portions  (or  percentages)  of the
                          central processor  unit  (CPU)  to  individual
                          groups  of  users.   These  groups  are called
                          classes and are set up by your System  Manager
                          in  the n-CONFIG.CMD file at system generation
                          time.  When the  CLASS-SCHEDULER  is  enabled,
                          all  jobs entered into the system are executed


                                   3-54
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


                          according to their class.  You should  consult
                          your  System  Manager  before  you  ENABLE  or
                          DISABLE the  CLASS-SCHEDULER  as  this  action
                          affects the performance of your system.

       DECNET-CONNECTION-ATTEMPTS

                          specifies to enable NEBULA to  attempt  DECnet
                          connections  to  remote NEBULAs in the TOPS-20
                          cluster.  The remote systems must  be  running
                          cluster  GALAXY in order for the connection to
                          be successful.

       FILE-RETRIEVAL-WAIT

                          specifies  that  when  a  user  or  batch  job
                          requests  a  file  that  is off-line due to an
                          archival or a migration, the job  waits  until
                          the  request has been satisfied, provided that
                          the user has given  the  TOPS-20  command  SET
                                                                 _______
                          RETRIEVAL-WAIT.    (Refer   to   the   TOPS-20
                          __________ _____
                          Operator's Guide for a discussion of  archived
                                                                 _
                          and   migrated  files,  and  to  the  ^TOPS-20
                          Commands Reference Manual for a description of
                          the  SET  RETRIEVAL-WAIT  command.)  Once  the
                          request has been satisfied, the job (batch  or
                          timesharing) continues to process.

       LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS

                          specifies to direct the printing of batch  log
                          files  and  spooled  files  to  specific local
                          printers.  Normally, printing of spooled files
                          (batch  or  otherwise)  is  scheduled  for the
                          first   available   local    printer.     With
                          LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS enabled, you can
                          specify  the  printer  with  the  OPR  command
                          ENABLE  PRINT-LOGFILES  n.   In this way, only
                          the local printer(s) specified print batch log
                          or spooled files.  To check if this keyword is
                          enabled, use the OPR  command  SHOW  PARAMETER
                          PRINTER.

                          If LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS  is  directed
                          to  specific  printers  (ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES
                          n), and you  issue  the  OPR  command  DISABLE
                          LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS,   the   ENABLEd
                          printer(s) are remembered by OPR.   Therefore,
                          if  LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS  is  ENABLEd
                          later during system operation, you do not have
                          to re-issue ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES command(s).


                                   3-55
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


       LOGGING            specifies   that   the   centralized   logging
                          facility  of  ORION  be enabled (this facility
                          logs  all   messages   passing   through   the
                          operating  system and stores these messages in
                          a log file buffer).   When  this  facility  is
                          enabled,   there   are  records  kept  of  the
                          messages and interactions  between  ORION  and
                          the system.

       OUTPUT-DISPLAY     specifies  that  the  display   of   specified
                          message  groupings on your console be enabled.
                          The  groupings  are  specified  as  the  valid
                          arguments and switches to this keyword.

|            NODE          allows you to selectively choose  which  ORION
|                          messages   from  the  indicated  node  in  the
|                          cluster  are   displayed   on   the   operator
|                          terminal.   You  can specify the local node or
|                          an asterisk (*).  The asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       PRINT-LOGFILES n   specifies the local printer "n" to print batch
                          log  files and spooled files.  The OPR command
                          ENABLE   LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS    must
                          precede        this        command.         If
                          LOGFILES-TO-SPECIFIC-PRINTERS   is    reverted
                          (DISABLEd)  and  then  ENABLEd at a later time
                          during system  operation,  OPR  remembers  the
                          printer  as  ENABLEd,  thus you do not have to
                          re-issue the ENABLE PRINT-LOGFILES command.

       QUEUE-REQUESTS     specifies that all users be  enabled  to  make
                          any  queue  request.   When queue requests are
                          enabled, a user can submit a batch  or  reader
                          job,  a card-punch, paper-tape-punch, plotter,
                          or a printer request to the system.

       REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES

                          specifies that  NEBULA  is  to  report  DECnet
                          connection  attempt failures to remote NEBULAs
                          in the cluster on your terminal.

       SEMI-OPR           specifies to allow  users  with  SEMI-OPERATOR
                          privilege  to  have limited control of certain
                          output  devices   and   to   access   operator
                          information.   The  OPR commands permitted and
                          their limitations are defined in Chapter 2.

       UNPRIVILEGED-USER-ENTIRE-REMOTE-OUTPUT-DISPLAY

                          specifies that an unprivileged user  may  view
                          all  print  requests  on  a remote node in the
                                   3-56
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


                          cluster as a result of  that  user  giving  an
                          @INFORMATION     OUTPUT     /DESTINATION-NODE:
                          command.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       The following arguments can be used  with  the  AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-
       RECOGNITION keyword:

       TAPE-DRIVES        specifies that all tape drives on  the  system
                          be enabled with AVR.

       tape-drive-name:   specifies the tape-drive name that is  enabled
                          with  AVR.   The  colon must be included.  The
                          name is in the format of MTAn:, where n is the
                          tape-drive number.

       The  following  arguments  are  valid  with  the   OUTPUT-DISPLAY
       keyword.   Each argument allows a type of message to be displayed
       on your OPR terminal.

       Message Type       Cause

       ALL-MESSAGES       all the  types  of  messages  defined  by  the
                          following arguments

       BATCH-MESSAGES     users requesting BATCH processing

       BUGCHK-MESSAGES    BUGCHKs generated by the system

       BUGINF-MESSAGES    BUGINFs generated by the system

       CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                          users requesting card punch output

       CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES

                          card reader  file  processing  or  batch  jobs
                          submitted with the /READER switch

       DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES

                          DECnet events generated by NMLT20

       DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES

                          failure of an attempt to establish a  link  to
                          another node

       FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES

                                   3-57
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


                          users requesting retrieval of files that  have
                          been archived or migrated to tape

       LCP-MESSAGES       LAT events noted by LCP

       MOUNT-MESSAGES     users requesting tape and structure mounts and
                          dismounts

       NCP-MESSAGES       users starting and shutting down network nodes
                          (valid  only  if  your installation has DECnet
                          software)

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES

                          users requesting paper-tape-punch output

       PLOTTER-MESSAGES   users requesting plotter output

       PRINTER-MESSAGES   users requesting line printer output

       READER-MESSAGES    users  requesting  card  reader  input   (Card
                          reader jobs become batch requests.)

       SYSTEM MESSAGES    various  system  messages  such  as:   job   0
                          crashes,   swapping  space,  SPT  space,  disk
                          space, and parity error conditions encountered
                          by the system

       USER-MESSAGES      users  making  requests  to  you  through  the
                          PLEASE program


  Switches
  Switches

       The  following  switches  can  be  used  as  arguments   of   the
       CLASS-SCHEDULER keyword:

       /CLASS-ASSIGNMENTS:

                          specifies that users of the system  have  been
                          divided into classes and have been allocated a
                          certain amount of CPU time.  The two arguments
                          available  with  this  switch are ACCOUNTS and
                          POLICY-PROGRAM.

          ACCOUNTS        specifies that class assignments are  assigned
                          by  the  accounts  set  up in the n-CONFIG.CMD
                          file and the ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN file.

          POLICY-PROGRAM  specifies that your System Manager  or  System
                          Programmer  has  initiated  the Access Control


                                   3-58
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


                          Job to assign a user to a  class  upon  login.
                          The  Access  Control  Job  is  a  user written
                          program that provides the accounting functions
                          for your installation.

       /WINDFALL:         specifies what happens  with  the  unused  CPU
                          time.   You  can  specify  either ALLOCATED or
                          WITHHELD.

          ALLOCATED       specifies that  excess  CPU  time  is  awarded
                          proportionately  to  the active classes (users
                          currently requesting CPU time).

          WITHHELD        specifies that excess  CPU  time  is  withheld
                          from all users and becomes idle time.

       You can specify the following switches  with  all  OUTPUT-DISPLAY
       arguments  except  BUGCHK-, BUGINF-, DECNET-, or SYSTEM-MESSAGES.
       If  you  do  not  specify  one  of   these   switches   with   an
       OUTPUT-DISPLAY argument, all three are assumed by default.

       /INFORMATION-MESSAGES

                          specifies that messages be displayed that  are
                          informational,  such  as errors that occur due
                          to  an  application  problem.   Also,  one-way
                          PLEASE  messages  from  users  are  considered
                          information messages, since no  response  from
                          you is necessary.

       /JOB-MESSAGES      specifies  that  messages  be  displayed  that
                          notify  you  when a device or stream has begun
                          to process a job  request  and  when  the  job
                          request has ended its processing.

       /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES

                          specifies  that  messages  be  displayed  that
                          notify  you  of some action to be performed as
                          requested by a user or a processing job.  Also
                          included  are  messages that require action to
                          be taken, but are not  job  or  WTOR  related.
                          All  operator action messages must be answered
                          with the RESPOND command.

       You can specify the following switch with the  DECNET-CONNECTION-
       ATTEMPTS and REPORT-CONNECTION-FAILURES keywords:

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.


                                   3-59
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENABLE)
                                 (ENABLE)


|       You can specify the following switch with all keywords except the
|       OUTPUT-DISPLAY keyword:
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You have previously disabled queue requests  to  allow  those
           requests  in  the  queues  to  be  processed  before  a shift
           turnover.  You can now enable queue requests.

               ______ ___________________
           OPR>ENABLE QUEUE-REQUESTS<RET>
           OPR>
           16:34:03        --System Queue's Entry Processing Enabled--
           OPR>

       2.  You have started OPR on a  terminal  to  display  only  mount
           messages.   By  default when OPR is started, all messages are
           displayed.  Therefore, you must disable all messages and then
           enable mount messages.

               _______ ______________ _________________
           OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES<RET>
           OPR>
            8:45:18        -- Output display for OPR modified --
               ______ ______________ ___________________
           OPR>ENABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY MOUNT-MESSAGES<RET>
           OPR>
            8:45:47        -- Output display for OPR modified --
           OPR>

       3.  You ENABLE AVR on tape drive MTA2:  after you  have  disabled
           AVR and initialized some scratch tapes.

               ______ ____________________________ __________
           OPR>ENABLE AUTOMATIC-VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>
           OPR>











                                   3-60
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENTER)
                                 (ENTER)


  ENTER - Entering Another Command Level
  ENTER - Entering Another Command Level


  Function
  Function

       The ENTER command exits OPR and enters another command interface,
       such as:

        o  LCP     the LAT Control Program

        o  NCP     the Network Control Program

       to perform control  and  monitor  functions  appropriate  to  the
       selected command interface.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>ENTER keyword<RET>

       where keyword is one of the following:  LCP
                                               NCP

  Keywords
  Keywords

       LCP  specifies that you exit OPR and enter LCP (the  LAT  Control
            Program)  to  control and monitor LAT (Local Area Transport)
            activity at a TOPS-20 node.

            When you enter LCP, your  prompt  becomes  the  LCP  prompt,
            LCP>.   You  can  use the ESCAPE key and command recognition
            for LCP commands as for OPR commands.

            LCP commands and  functions  are  described  in  a  separate
            chapter of this manual.

       NCP  specifies that you exit  OPR  and  enter  NCP  (the  Network
            Control Program for DECnet.  This keyword is applicable only
            if your installation has DECnet software.

            When you specify the ENTER command  to  enter  DECnet,  your
            prompt  becomes  the  DECnet  prompt, NCP>.  Once you are in
            NCP, you can use the  ESCAPE  key  and  recognition  on  NCP
            commands as you can for OPR commands.

            NCP  commands   and   functions   are   described   in   the
            ________________ ______ _________ _____
            DECnet-20/PSI-20 System Manager's Guide.


  Use the ENTER command when you need to give many commands at the other
  (non-OPR) command level.  If you need to give only a few commands, you


                                   3-61
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ENTER)
                                 (ENTER)


  can give them from OPR without entering the new command level.  To  do
  this,  type  the  command-level  keyword (and a space) followed by the
  command to the other interface, as:

           ___ ____ ____________________
       OPR>LCP SHOW CHARACTERISTICS<RET>
















































                                   3-62
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (EXIT)
                                  (EXIT)


  EXIT - Leaving OPR Level
  EXIT - Leaving OPR Level


  Function
  Function

       The EXIT command exits OPR command level and returns  to  TOPS-20
       command level.

       You can return to OPR command level  with  the  TOPS-20  CONTINUE
       command,  providing  that  you do not alter memory.  Refer to the
       _______ ______ _____        _______ ________ _________ ______
       TOPS-20 User's Guide or the TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual for
       additional information about the CONTINUE command.

       The EXIT command has no keywords, arguments, or switches.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>EXIT<RET>


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       Because OPR takes time to respond  to  some  commands,  the  EXIT
       command may prevent you from seeing output from previously issued
       commands.  However, the processing of the previous commands  will
       not be interrupted when you EXIT from OPR.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the EXIT command to leave OPR and return  to  TOPS-20
           command level.

               _________
           OPR>EXIT<RET>

           $

       2.  After completing your task with commands that  do  not  alter
           memory,  you  now give the TOPS-20 command CONTINUE to return
           to OPR.

            _____________
           $CONTINUE<RET>

           OPR>








                                   3-63
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (FORWARDSPACE)
                              (FORWARDSPACE)


  FORWARDSPACE - Forward Spacing into Pages
  FORWARDSPACE - Forward Spacing into Pages


  Function
  Function

       The FORWARDSPACE command  spaces  the  print  file  on  the  line
       printer in a forward direction, so that you can skip the printing
       of a job, file, or page(s).  The FORWARDSPACE command allows  you
       to  forwardspace  the  print  file so that you can save paper and
       print only what is needed as output.

       At various times, you may have to forwardspace a particular  file
       that  is currently being printed on the line printer, for example
       when a user requires only a portion of some printed output.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>FORWARDSPACE keyword nn (or) LAT /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by its alias name
|
|       or followed by its unit number:
|
|                                     nn
|
|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /NODE:nodename::

       or                            LAT

       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE: cluster-node-name
                                     /COPIES:nnnn
                                     /FILE
                                     /PAGES:nnnn


  Keywords
  Keywords

       PRINTER            specifies the line  printer  (output  device).
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the


                                   3-64
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (FORWARDSPACE)
                              (FORWARDSPACE)


|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.

       nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                          that  can  forwardspace  the  forms  currently
                          printing (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,
                          and  so  forth).   You  must specify this unit
                          number.

       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

            PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

            SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

            SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource


                                   3-65
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (FORWARDSPACE)
                              (FORWARDSPACE)


                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.


  Switches
  Switches

       You must specify one of the following switches:

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /COPIES:nnnn       specifies the number of copies to  be  skipped
                          from  printing.   The  number  you  specify is
                          subtracted from the  number  that  was  queued
                          with  the  PRINT  command.   For example, if a
                          user issued the command

                          PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25

                          and you issue the  FORWARDSPACE  command  with
                          /COPIES:10  while  FOO.BAR  is printing on the
                          line  printer,  the  total  number  of  copies
                          printed will be 15.

       /FILE              specifies that you forward space one file when
                          a  multifile PRINT request has been given by a
                          user.  For  example,  if  a  user  issues  the
                          command

                          PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR

                          and you issue the  FORWARDSPACE  command  with
                          /FILE  while  FOO1.BAR is printing on the line
                          printer, FOO2.BAR starts printing on the  line
                          printer.   The remaining pages of FOO1.BAR are
                          skipped.
|
|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
|                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
|                          node name is optional.

       /PAGES:nnnn        specifies  the   number   of   pages   to   be
                          forwardspaced  for  the file that is currently


                                   3-66
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (FORWARDSPACE)
                              (FORWARDSPACE)


                          being printed.  If you do not  specify  either
                          the  /COPIES:   or  the /FILE switch, then you
                          must specify the /PAGES:  switch.  The  number
                          (nnnn)  you  specify  refers  to  the physical
                          number of pages and not to the number of pages
                          that contains the file on disk.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       When you give the FORWARDSPACE PRINTER command, the system prints
       the  output  in the printer buffer (which may contain one or more
       printed pages) before FORWARDSPACing  the  number  of  pages  you
       specify.   Therefore,  when  you  use  the  /PAGES:nn switch, you
       should subtract two or three pages from the total number of pages
       you wish to FORWARDSPACE.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify line printer 0 for the FORWARDSPACE command  to  skip
           15 copies of a print request of 25 copies.

               ____________ _______ _ _______________
           OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
           12:34:34        Printer 0  --Forward Spaced 15 Copies--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify line printer  2  with  the  FORWARDSPACE  command  to
           forwardspace one file from the file currently printing.

               ____________ _______ _ __________
           OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
           13:21:09        Printer 2  --Forward Spaced 1 File--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the FORWARDSPACE command to forwardspace twelve pages
           from the page currently printing on line printer 1 because of
           a user request.

               ____________ _______ _ _____________
           OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
           10:20:30        Printer 1  --Forward Spaced 12 Pages--
           OPR>












                                   3-67
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (HELP)
                                  (HELP)


  HELP - Getting Help on OPR Commands
  HELP - Getting Help on OPR Commands


  Function
  Function

       The HELP command displays information about an OPR command.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>HELP command<RET>

       where command can be any available OPR command


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       If you specify an invalid OPR command as a keyword with the  HELP
       command, OPR responds with:

       %No help available for "command"

       You can then press CTRL/H or retype the HELP command and  specify
       a correct OPR command as a keyword with HELP.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the HELP command itself  to  get  help  on  the  HELP
           command.

               ____ _________
           OPR>HELP HELP<RET>
                            -- Help for HELP command --
           The HELP command allows you to display the function, format,
           arguments, and
           switches of any OPR command.

           The format is:

           HELP keyword

           where keyword can be any of the following OPR commands:

           ABORT       ALIGN      BACKSPACE       CANCEL      CLOSE
           CONTINUE    DEFINE     DISABLE         DISMOUNT    ENABLE
           ENTER       EXIT       FORWARDSPACE    HELP        HOLD
           IDENTIFY    MODIFY     MOUNT           NEXT        PUSH
           RELEASE     REPORT     REQUEUE         RESPOND     ROUTE
           SEND        SET        SHOW            SHUTDOWN    START
           STOP        SUPPRESS   SWITCH          TAKE        UNDEFINE
           WAIT


                                   3-68
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (HELP)
                                  (HELP)


             or one of the following:
            LCP   NCP

           OPR>

       2.  Specify the HELP command with TAKE as its keyword.

               ____ _________
           OPR>HELP TAKE<RET>
                            -- Help for TAKE command --
           The TAKE command allows you to execute a series of OPR
           commands from a specified command file.

           The format is:

           TAKE filespec

           where filespec is the name of the command file,

           followed by one of these optional switches:

                     /DISPLAY
                     /NODISPLAY

           OPR>





























                                   3-69
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (HOLD)
                                  (HOLD)


  HOLD - Holding Job Requests in the Queue
  HOLD - Holding Job Requests in the Queue


  Function
  Function

       The HOLD command  keeps  job  requests  in  a  queue  from  being
       processed.

       The jobs that are held with the HOLD command can  be  rescheduled
       with  the  RELEASE  command.   Refer  to  the  description of the
       RELEASE command in this chapter.

       To examine any jobs waiting in a queue to be processed, give  the
       SHOW QUEUES command.  Refer to the description of the SHOW QUEUES
       command in this chapter.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>HOLD keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-JOBS
                                     CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
                                     PLOTTER-JOBS
                                     PRINTER-JOBS

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     request-id-number
                                     user-name
                                     *

       and optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::

|       or optionally the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-JOBS         specifies one or more jobs in the batch  input
                          queue waiting to be processed.

       CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies one or more jobs in  the  card-punch
                          output queue waiting to be processed.


                                   3-70
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (HOLD)
                                  (HOLD)


       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                          specifies   one   or   more   jobs   in    the
                          paper-tape-punch  output  queue  waiting to be
                          processed.

       PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies one or  more  jobs  in  the  plotter
                          output queue waiting to be processed.

       PRINTER-JOBS       specifies one or more jobs in the line printer
                          output queue waiting to be processed.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       request-id-number  specifies  that  a  single  job  be  held   as
                          specified  by  the  appropriate keyword, for a
                          particular user.

       user-name          specifies that all jobs be held  as  specified
                          by  the  appropriate  keyword for a particular
                          user.  The user name  can  be  from  1  to  39
                          alphanumeric  characters  (normally the user's
                          surname) that  identifies  the  user  and  his
                          logged-in  directory.   You  do  not  need  to
                          enclose the user name in angle brackets.

       *                  specifies that all jobs be held  as  specified
                          by   the  appropriate  keyword  for  all  jobs
                          waiting to be processed, from all users.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                          This switch  can  only  be  used  with  the  *
                          argument.




                                   3-71
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (HOLD)
                                  (HOLD)


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       The HOLD command is effective only for the jobs currently waiting
       to  be  processed.  Any jobs submitted after the HOLD command was
       issued are not held.

       You cannot hold any job that is currently processing in  a  batch
       stream  or on an output device.  If you need to stop the job from
       processing, give the STOP command.  Refer to the  description  of
       the STOP command in this chapter.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the OPR command to HOLD  a  line  printer  job  whose
           request-id-number  is  127.   This  particular  job  will not
           become rescheduled again until you issue  a  RELEASE  command
           for this job.

               ____ ____________ ________
           OPR>HOLD PRINTER-JOBS 127<RET>
           10:54:07          --1 Job Held--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the OPR command to HOLD all card-punch jobs.

               ____ _______________ ______
           OPR>HOLD CARD-PUNCH-JOBS *<RET>
           11:34:35          --10 Jobs Held--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the OPR command to  HOLD  all  batch  jobs  for  user
           HOVSEPIAN.

               ____ __________ ______________
           OPR>HOLD BATCH-JOBS HOVSEPIAN<RET>
           12:20:32          --15 Jobs Held--
           OPR>


















                                   3-72
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (IDENTIFY)
                                (IDENTIFY)


  IDENTIFY - Identifying Tape Mounts
  IDENTIFY - Identifying Tape Mounts


  Function
  Function

       The IDENTIFY command services tape mount requests by enabling you
       to:

        o  Satisfy a user's mount request for an unlabeled tape.

        o  Satisfy a user's request for a labeled tape that  is  mounted
           on a drive that has AVR disabled.

        o  Pre-place and identify an unlabeled tape.

       When a user issues a mount request for  an  unlabeled  tape,  you
       must physically locate, mount, and ready the requested tape on an
       available tape drive and then 'IDENTIFY' the  tape-mount  request
       to the tape drive.

       When more than one user issues a  mount  request  for  a  scratch
       tape,  the  IDENTIFY SCRATCH command applies to the first request
       received.  If you need to service a request other than the first,
       use the IDENTIFY REQUEST-ID command.

       If you have AVR enabled and your installation uses labeled tapes,
       you  do not need to give the IDENTIFY command after you mount and
       ready a tape on a tape drive.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>IDENTIFY keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be the tape-drive name:

                                     MTAn:

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     REQUEST-ID nn
                                     SCRATCH
                                     VOLUME-ID volid

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name






                                   3-73
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (IDENTIFY)
                                (IDENTIFY)


  Keyword
  Keyword

       MTAn:              specifies the physical  tape  drive  unit  (n)
                          where  you  mounted and readied the tape.  You
                          must specify this colon at the end of the unit
                          number.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       REQUEST-ID nn      specifies that you are attempting to  use  the
                          tape    on    drive    MTAn:     to    satisfy
                          tape-mount-request number nn.

       SCRATCH            specifies that a user  has  requested  that  a
                          scratch  tape  be  mounted.   The tape must be
                          unlabeled, or the label must have expired.

       VOLUME-ID volid    specifies the volume identifier (volid) of the
                          tape  volume  you  have  mounted  on  the tape
                          drive.  The volid can consist of from 1  to  6
                          alphanumeric   characters.    If   the   volid
                          contains      nonalphanumeric       characters
                          (characters  other  than  A  through  Z  and 0
                          through 9), the  volid  must  be  enclosed  in
                          double quotes.

                          In  addition,  this  argument  allows  you  to
                          pre-place  an  unlabeled  tape  or  an expired
                          labeled tape on a drive with AVR disabled (see
                          Example 4 below).

  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  A user requests that you mount  an  unlabeled  scratch  tape.
           After  the  tape-mount request appears, you mount and ready a
           write enabled, scratch tape and then identify the tape  as  a
           scratch tape.



                                   3-74
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (IDENTIFY)
                                (IDENTIFY)


           OPR>
           14:34:20          --Tape Mount Request # 43--
                           Mount scratch tape, WRITE-ENABLED
                           User R.ACE, Job 27, Terminal 9
           OPR>
           14:36:12          --MTA2: Unlabeled tape mounted--
               ________ _____ ____________
           OPR>IDENTIFY MTA2: SCRATCH<RET>
           OPR>
           14:36:15          --MTA2: Given To Request 43--
                           scratch tape now in use by
                           User R.ACE, Job 27, Terminal 9
           OPR>

       2.  A user requests that you mount a labeled tape.  However,  you
           have  AVR  disabled and you must identify the labeled tape to
           the system.

           OPR>
           13:29:04          --Tape Mount Request # 87--
                           Mount ANSI volume 100555, READ-ONLY
                           User HOVSEPIAN, Job 19, Terminal 9
           OPR>
           13:32:14          --MTA0: tape mounted--
               ________ _____ _________ ___________
           OPR>IDENTIFY MTA0: VOLUME-ID 100555<RET>
           OPR>
           13:32:18          --MTA0: Given To Request 87--
                           Volume 100555 now in use by
                           User HOVSEPIAN, Job 19, Terminal 9
           OPR>

       3.  A user has requested an unlabeled tape to be mounted.   After
           you  mount and ready the requested tape, you use the IDENTIFY
           command to associate the tape mount request-id with the  tape
           drive.

           OPR>
           16:30:00          --Tape Mount Request # 127--
                           Mount Unlabeled volume DUMP01, WRITE-ENABLED
                           User SARTINI, Job 43, Terminal 7
                           Volumes in set DUMPER: DUMP01,DUMP02
           OPR>
           16:33:45          --MTA1: Unlabeled tape mounted--
               ________ _____ __________ ________
           OPR>IDENTIFY MTA1: REQUEST-ID 127<RET>
           OPR>
           16:33:49          --MTA1: Given To Request 127--
                           Volume DUMP01 now in use by
                           User SARTINI, Job 43, Terminal 7
           OPR>

       4.  You load an unlabeled tape on tape drive MTA1:  and pre-place
           it for a future user request.


                                   3-75
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (IDENTIFY)
                                (IDENTIFY)


           17:22:10          --MTA1: Unlabeled tape mounted--
               ________ _____ _________ ___________
           OPR>IDENTIFY MTA1: VOLUME-ID NOVA01<RET>
           OPR>

           At some time in the future, a user will issue a mount request
           for  tape  NOVA01.  The system will automatically satisfy the
           request with the tape NOVA01 on tape drive MTA1:.














































                                   3-76
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (MODIFY)
                                 (MODIFY)


  MODIFY - Modifying the Priority of Requests
  MODIFY - Modifying the Priority of Requests


  Function
  Function

       The MODIFY command changes the priority of a job request  waiting
       in  a queue for processing.  The higher the priority number is in
       the MODIFY  command,  the  greater  the  importance  of  the  job
       request.

       When any job request is submitted for processing by a  user,  its
       priority  number  defaults to a value that is set at GALGEN time.
       The user who requests the job can set the priority value with the
       /PRIORITY:   switch.   However, the MODIFY command permits you to
       change the priority value for any job request.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>MODIFY keyword argument /switch PRIORITY nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-REQUEST
                                     CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST
                                     PLOTTER-REQUEST
                                     PRINTER-REQUEST

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     request-id-number
                                     user-name
                                     *

       and optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::


       followed by the argument:     PRIORITY nn

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-REQUEST      specifies  one  or  more  batch  job  requests
                          waiting   in  the  batch  input  queue  to  be
                          processed.

                                   3-77
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (MODIFY)
                                 (MODIFY)


       CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST specifies one or more card-punch job  requests
                          waiting in the card-punch

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST

                          specifies one  or  more  paper-tape-punch  job
                          requests   waiting   in  the  paper-tape-punch
                          output queue to be processed.

       PLOTTER-REQUEST    specifies one or  more  plotter  job  requests
                          waiting  in  the  plotter  output  queue to be
                          processed.

       PRINTER-REQUEST    specifies  one  or  more  line   printer   job
                          requests  waiting  in  the line printer output
                          queue to be processed.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                          This switch  can  only  be  used  with  the  *
                          argument.

  Arguments
  Arguments

       request-id-number  specifies  that  a  single  request   from   a
                          particular  user  be  modified as specified by
                          the appropriate keyword.

       user-name          specifies that all requests from a  particular
                          user   be   modified   as   specified  by  the
                          appropriate keyword.

       *                  specifies that all requests from all users  be
                          modified   as  specified  by  the  appropriate
                          keyword.

       PRIORITY nn        specifies the priority number  (nn)  that  the
                          request(s)  will be set to.  The number can be
                          in the range from 1 to  63.   The  higher  the
                                   3-78
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (MODIFY)
                                 (MODIFY)


                          number  is,  the greater the importance of the
                          request.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       You cannot MODIFY the priority of a job request once it has begun
       to process in a batch stream or on an output device.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Modify a printer request so that its priority will be greater
           than  the next request to be printed.  Thus, if print request
           13 was the next print request and you modify print request 15
           to be 50, print request 15 prints before print request 13.

               ______ _______________ __ ________ _______
           OPR>MODIFY PRINTER-REQUEST 15 PRIORITY 50<RET>
           OPR>
           13:54:19        --1 Job Modified--
           OPR>

       2.  Modify all card-punch requests for user CARLSON so that these
           requests  will  output  on  the  card  punch before any other
           card-punch requests.

               ______ __________________ _______ ________ _______
           OPR>MODIFY CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST CARLSON PRIORITY 63<RET>
           OPR>
           16:13:20        --8 Jobs Modified--
           OPR>























                                   3-79
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (MOUNT)
                                 (MOUNT)


  MOUNT - Mounting Structures
  MOUNT - Mounting Structures



  Function
  Function

       The MOUNT command mounts a structure and allows users  to  access
       it.  Give the MOUNT command after physically mounting a structure
       or after a physically mounted structure has been  DISMOUNTed  but
       not  removed  from the disk drive.  The MOUNT command also allows
       you  to  assign  the  structure  an  alias  name  when  two  file
       structures have the same name.

       Unlike the EXEC MOUNT command, the OPR  MOUNT  command  does  not
       place  a  mount  request  in the mount queue or identify you as a
       user of the structure.  If the structure is physically mounted in
       the  drive,  the  MOUNT  command is executed immediately.  If the
       structure is not mounted  in  the  drive,  you  receive  a  MOUNT
       request.   The  MOUNT command is then executed automatically when
       the structure is physically mounted.

       The structure is MOUNTed only when it is physically mounted in  a
       disk drive and has AVAILABLE and ACKNOWLEDGED attributes.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>MOUNT keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        STRUCTURE

       followed by the argument:     alias:

       optionally followed by the switches:

                                     /STRUCTURE-ID:structure-name:
                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure that is on  a  disk
                          drive and has been DISMOUNTed.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       alias:             specifies the name to be used  in  referencing
                          the mounted structure.  The alias must be 1 to
                          6 alphanumeric characters in  length  followed
                          by a colon.


                                   3-80
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (MOUNT)
                                 (MOUNT)


                                  _______  ______  _________  _____
                          See the TOPS-20  System  Manager's  Guide  for
                          more information on alias names.


  Switches
  Switches

       /STRUCTURE-ID:structure-name:

                          specifies the physical name of the  structure.
                          Specify  this switch when the alias is not the
                          same as  the  physical  structure  name.   The
                          structure name must be followed by a colon.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
                          nodes within the cluster.

                                   NOTE

          If a structure was previously dismounted on behalf  of
          a  remote  system  within  the  cluster, by way of the
          DISMOUNT STRUCTURE name:  REMOVAL command,  only  that
          remote   system   can   successfully   use  the  MOUNT
          /CLUSTER-NODE:  command to remount  the  structure  on
          the  remote  system.   Once  this is accomplished, all
          other  systems  within  the  cluster   can   use   the
          /CLUSTER-NODE:    switch   to   remotely  remount  the
          structure.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Give the MOUNT command  to  mount  the  DISMOUNTed  structure
           WORK:

               _____ _________ __________
           OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE WORK:<RET>

           OPR>
           11:32:15      -- Mount request by operator completed --
                       Structure WORK: mounted as alias WORK

           OPR>

       2.  Give the MOUNT command to mount structure  SHARE:   with  the
           alias MISC:



                                   3-81
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (MOUNT)
                                 (MOUNT)


               _____ _________ _____ ________________________
           OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE MISC: /STRUCTURE-ID:SHARE<RET>
           OPR>
           11:32:15      -- Mount request by operator completed --
                       Structure SHARE: mounted as alias MISC

















































                                   3-82
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (NEXT)
                                  (NEXT)


  NEXT - Specifying the Next Request to Run
  NEXT - Specifying the Next Request to Run



  Function
  Function

       The NEXT command specifies the request that will be serviced next
       by  the  specified  device.   After  you  issue this command, the
       request that you specified will start immediately.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>NEXT keyword nn /switch REQUEST-ID mm /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument

       followed by the stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       optionally followed by the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

       or                            CLUSTER nn
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and the word:                 REQUEST-ID

       followed by the request identification number:



                                   3-83
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (NEXT)
                                  (NEXT)


                                     mm
|
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name



  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies the batch stream in  which  the  job
                          will run.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies the card punch that will  punch  the
                          job.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies the paper tape punch that will punch
                          the job.

       PLOTTER            specifies the plotter that will plot the job.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer on a remote node within  a
                          TOPS-20  cluster.   A  TOPS-20  cluster  is  a
                          loosely coupled configuration of  between  two
                          and  four  TOPS-20 processors.  Each processor
                          in the configuration is identified by  a  node
                          name.    For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,  and
                          LOUIE::  can be three nodes within  a  cluster
                          of TOPS-20 processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user


                                   3-84
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (NEXT)
                                  (NEXT)


                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is


                                   3-85
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (NEXT)
                                  (NEXT)


                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::) following the node name is optional.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       The NEXT command ignores  most  attributes  of  a  request.   For
       example,  if  a print request has the attribute /UNIT:0, the NEXT
       command can print the request on a different printer.

       You should attempt to honor request attributes when possible.


  Example
  Example

       A user has requested that his job be printed as soon as possible.
       Use  the  NEXT command to queue job HURRY to be printed after the
       current job is finished.

           ____ _______ _ __________ ________
       OPR>NEXT PRINTER 0 REQUEST-ID 107<RET>
       OPR>
       15:39:51       Printer 0 -- NEXT request #107 scheduled --
       OPR>
       15:40:20       Printer 0 -- End --


                                   3-86
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (NEXT)
                                  (NEXT)


                      Job D60SPD Req # 105 for PERKINS
       OPR>
       15:40:32       Printer 0 -- Begin --
                      Job HURRY Req #107 for OPERATOR
       OPR>
















































                                   3-87
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (PUSH)
                                  (PUSH)


  PUSH - Pushing Out of OPR Command Level
  PUSH - Pushing Out of OPR Command Level



  Function
  Function

       The PUSH command leaves  OPR  command  level  and  enters  a  new
       operating  system (EXEC) command level.  You can then perform any
       software task or run any utility.  To return to OPR, type the POP
                                   _______ ________ _________ ______
       command.   (Refer  to  the  TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual for
       further information on the POP command.)

                                     NOTE

               Do not run OPR at the  new  EXEC  command  level.
               Return to OPR by using the TOPS-20 POP command.

       You can use the PUSH command to create a lower copy of an EXEC of
       your  choice.   Normally,  PUSH  creates  the EXEC defined by the
       system logical  name,  DEFAULT-EXEC:.   Use  the  TOPS-20  DEFINE
       command  to  define the job-wide logical name DEFAULT-EXEC:, with
       the filespec for the EXEC you want to use each time you PUSH.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>PUSH<RET>


  Restriction
  Restriction

       When you have used the PUSH command, you cannot logout.   If  you
       attempt to do so, the following error message will appear:

       ?LOG capability required
        Not logged off

       To logout, you must POP to OPR, EXIT from OPR, and then LOGOUT.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You give the PUSH command to enter operating  system  command
           level and mount a tape for the DUMPER program.

               _________
           OPR>PUSH<RET>

            TOPS-20 Command processor 4(554)
            _____ ____ _______ _________________________________________
           @MOUNT TAPE DUMPER: /LABEL-TYPE:UNLABELED/SCRATCH/NOWAIT<RET>
           13:45:00          --Tape Mount Request # 60--
                           Mount Unlabeled scratch tape, WRITE-ENABLED


                                   3-88
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (PUSH)
                                  (PUSH)


                           User OPERATOR, Job 6, Terminal 1

                         .
                         .
                         .
            ___________
           @DUMPER<RET>
           DUMPER>
                         .
                         .
                         .

       2.  After completing the DUMPER tasks, you can dismount the  tape
           and type POP to return to OPR command level.

                  _________
           DUMPER>EXIT<RET>
            ________
           $POP<RET>
           OPR>




































                                   3-89
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (RELEASE)
                                (RELEASE)


  RELEASE - Releasing Job Requests Held in the Queue
  RELEASE - Releasing Job Requests Held in the Queue



  Function
  Function

       The RELEASE command releases job requests that were held with the
       HOLD  command.  When you RELEASE any previously held job request,
       the job is rescheduled for processing.  Refer to the  description
       of the HOLD command in this chapter.

       To examine any jobs waiting in the queue to be processed  or  any
       jobs  being  held,  give  the  SHOW  QUEUES command with the /ALL
       switch.  Refer to the description of the SHOW QUEUES  command  in
       this chapter.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>RELEASE keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-JOBS
                                     CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
                                     PLOTTER-JOBS
                                     PRINTER-JOBS

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     request-id-number
                                     user-name
                                     *

       and optionally for the * argument, followed by the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name:

|       or optionally the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-JOBS         specifies one or more jobs held in  the  batch
                          input queue.

       CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies  one  or  more  jobs  held  in   the
                          card-punch output queue.


                                   3-90
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (RELEASE)
                                (RELEASE)


       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                          specifies  one  or  more  jobs  held  in   the
                          paper-tape-punch output queue.

       PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies one or more jobs held in the plotter
                          output queue.

       PRINTER-JOBS       specifies one or more jobs held  in  the  line
                          printer output queue.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       request-id-number  specifies that a single job for  a  particular
                          user   be   released   as   specified  by  the
                          appropriate keyword.

       user-name          specifies that all jobs held for a  particular
                          user   be   released   as   specified  by  the
                          appropriate keyword.  The  user  name  can  be
                          from 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters (normally
                          the user's surname) that identifies  the  user
                          and  his logged-in directory.  You do not need
                          to enclose the user name in angle brackets.

       *                  specifies that all jobs held for all users  be
                          released   as  specified  by  the  appropriate
                          keyword.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                          This switch  can  only  be  used  with  the  *
                          argument.





                                   3-91
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (RELEASE)
                                (RELEASE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the RELEASE command to release a line printer request
           for user C.MULLEN.

               _______ ____________ _____________
           OPR>RELEASE PRINTER-JOBS C.MULLEN<RET>
           OPR>
           14:23:45          --1 Job Released--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the RELEASE command to  release  all  card-punch  job
           requests held in the queue.

               _______ _______________ ______
           OPR>RELEASE CARD-PUNCH-JOBS *<RET>
           OPR>
           15:23:01          --10 Jobs Released--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the RELEASE command to release batch job request 117.

               _______ __________ ________
           OPR>RELEASE BATCH-JOBS 117<RET>
           OPR>
           17:18:20          --1 Job Released--
           OPR>





























                                   3-92
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REPORT)
                                 (REPORT)


  REPORT - Reporting Comments to SYSERR
  REPORT - Reporting Comments to SYSERR



  Function
  Function

       The REPORT command enters various comments  or  error  conditions
       into the system error file ERROR.SYS.  To list these entries, you
                                                  _______________  _____
       can run the SPEAR program.  (Refer to the  TOPS-10/TOPS-20  SPEAR
       ______
       Manual for more information.)


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>REPORT user-name device: /switch text<RET>

       where user-name is the name of the user making the report

       followed by the subject of the report (device:)

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|            /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       followed by a single- or multiple-line message (text)



  Keywords
  Keywords

       user-name          identifies the user making the report, or  the
                          user  that  the  report  refers  to.  Only the
                          first six characters  of  the  user  name  are
                          entered into the file ERROR.SYS.

       device             specifies one of the system  devices  that  is
                          the subject of the report.

       text               after specifying the device, you can  enter  a
                          single-  or multiple-line response and confirm
                          with a carriage return,  or  you  can  confirm
                          with  carriage  return  immediately  after the
                          user name or device.  OPR responds with  Enter
                          text and terminate with ^Z.  You then enter as
                          many lines of text for a response as you need.
                          When you press CTRL/Z, the OPR> prompt returns
                          and your report is logged into  the  ERROR.SYS
                          file.





                                   3-93
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (REPORT)
                                 (REPORT)


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.
  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the REPORT command for a previous cancellation  of  a
           job being read into the system through the card reader.

               ______ _______ _______ ___ ____ ____ ___________
           OPR>REPORT SARTINI CDR260: TOO MANY PICK CHECKS<RET>
           OPR>
           12:19:00        --Entry made in ERROR.SYS--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the REPORT command to describe  a  possible  hardware
           problem that seems serious.

               ______ __________________
           OPR>REPORT LEAD-OPERATOR<RET>
           Enter text and terminate with ^Z
           _____ ___ ____ _ ____ _____ __ _________ __________
           THERE WAS JUST A HEAD CRASH ON STRUCTURE MISC:<RET>
           ___ _____ ____ __ ________
           ALL FILES WILL BE RESTORED^Z
                                      ^
                                      |
                                   <CTRL/Z>
           OPR>
           15:18:01        --Entry made in ERROR.SYS--
           OPR>




















                                   3-94
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (REQUEUE)
                                (REQUEUE)


  REQUEUE - Rescheduling Job Requests
  REQUEUE - Rescheduling Job Requests



  Function
  Function

       The REQUEUE command stops a job request that is in  progress  and
       puts  it back in the queue in the HOLD state.  You can reschedule
       the request with the RELEASE command.

  Format
  Format

|       OPR>REQUEUE keyword nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument

       followed by the stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

                                     /NODE:node-name::
                                     /REASON:comment

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

                                     CLUSTER nn
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       or one of the following arguments (not valid for BATCH-STREAM):





                                   3-95
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (REQUEUE)
                                (REQUEUE)


                                     BEGINNING-OF COPY
                                                  FILE
                                                  JOB
                                     CURRENT-POSITION

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch stream that has a
                          job currently active within it.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device  that
                          has a job currently being output on it.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          that has a job currently being output on it.

       PLOTTER            specifies a particular plotter device that has
                          a job currently being output on it.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer on a remote node within  a
                          TOPS-20  cluster.   A  TOPS-20  cluster  is  a
                          loosely coupled configuration of  between  two
                          and  four  TOPS-20 processors.  Each processor
                          in the configuration is identified by  a  node
                          name.    For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,  and
                          LOUIE::  can be three nodes within  a  cluster
                          of TOPS-20 processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename



                                   3-96
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (REQUEUE)
                                (REQUEUE)


                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"


                                   3-97
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (REQUEUE)
                                (REQUEUE)


                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::) following the node name is optional.

       /REASON:comment    allows you to include a comment as to why  the
                          job  has  been  requeued.   This  comment will
                          appear in the batch log file and at the user's
                          terminal.   If  the  comment  is more than one
                          line long, you can end the first line  with  a
                          hyphen  and a carriage return and continue the
                          comment on the next line.  If you press RETURN
                          immediately after the colon, OPR responds with
                          the instruction:   ENTER  TEXT  AND  TERMINATE
                          WITH  ^Z.  You can then enter as many lines of
                          text as necessary.  When you  finish  entering
                          the  text,  type  a CTRL/Z and the OPR> prompt
                          reappears.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       BEGINNING-OF       specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                          beginning  of  the  COPY,  FILE, or JOB.  This


                                   3-98
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (REQUEUE)
                                (REQUEUE)


                          argument is  valid  when  you  requeue  a  job
                          currently  processing on a device, such as the
                          line printer.  This argument is  invalid  with
                          the BATCH-STREAM keyword.

            COPY          specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                          beginning of the current copy being processed.
                          (Refer  to  the  BACKSPACE  and   FORWARDSPACE
                          commands.)

            FILE          specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                          beginning of the current file being processed.
                          (Refer  to  the  BACKSPACE  and   FORWARDSPACE
                          commands.)

            JOB           specifies  the   requeuing   starts   at   the
                          beginning  of the current job being processed.
                          With JOB, the entire job is requeued.

       CURRENT-POSITION   specifies the current position  (line  number)
                          of  the  job on unit number nn at the time you
                          issue the REQUEUE command.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       The REQUEUE PRINTER  command  immediately  stops  sending  a  job
       request  to  the printer.  However, the printer finishes printing
       the data already in its buffer.  Therefore,  when  you  give  the
       REQUEUE  PRINTER command, the printer may continue to print a few
       more pages of a job request before it  stops  or  prints  another
       request.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the REQUEUE command to hold and cancel a job in batch
           stream 5.

               _______ ____________ _ _____
           OPR>REQUEUE BATCH-STREAM 5 <RET>
           OPR>
           10:23:56        Batch Stream 5  --Requeued--
                           Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN
           OPR>
           10:23:57        Batch Stream 5  --End--
                           Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN
                           -- Job Requeued by Operator --
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the REQUEUE command to hold and  cancel  the  current
           processing job on the card punch.


                                   3-99
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (REQUEUE)
                                (REQUEUE)


               _______ __________ _ ____________ ___ _____________
           OPR>REQUEUE CARD-PUNCH 0 BEGINNING-OF JOB /REASON:<RET>
           Enter text and terminate with ^Z
           ___ ________ _______ __ ____ _____ _________
           JOB REQUEUED BECAUSE OF CARD PUNCH JAM.<RET>
           _____ _______ ____________
           FIELD SERVICE CALLED.<RET>
           _______________
           OPERATOR-JONES.^Z
                           ^
                           |
                        <CTRL/Z>
           OPR>
           16:09:43        Card-punch 0  --Requeued--
                           Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN
           OPR>
           16:09:44        Card-punch 0  --End--
                           Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN
                           -- Job Requeued by Operator --
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the REQUEUE command to hold and  cancel  the  current
           processing  job  on  the  line printer, unit number 0, at the
           current position.

               _______ _______ _ _____________________
           OPR>REQUEUE PRINTER 0 CURRENT-POSITION<RET>
           OPR>
           12:34:09        Printer 0  --Requeued--
                           Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY
           OPR>
           12:34:10        Printer 0  --End--
                           Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY
                           -- Job Requeued by Operator --
           OPR>























                                  3-100
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (RESPOND)
                                (RESPOND)


  RESPOND - Responding to Messages
  RESPOND - Responding to Messages



  Function
  Function

       The RESPOND command to replies to any message  sent  to  you  via
       WTOR  (Write  To  Operator  with  Response) from a user or from a
       software task.

       When a user or software task sends you a message that requires  a
       response,  OPR  assigns the message a number so that you can keep
       track of all messages sent to operations.  With the  use  of  the
       SHOW  MESSAGES command, you can find out at any time if there are
       any outstanding messages.

       There are no keywords or switches for the  RESPOND  command,  but
       you  must  specify the message number.  Also, you may be required
       to include a message; therefore you may specify a message in  the
       RESPOND command.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>RESPOND nnn /switch text<RET>

       where nnn is the outstanding message number

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|            /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       and text is a single- or multiple-line response



  Keywords
  Keywords

       nnn                specifies the message number of a message that
                          was  sent  to  you via WTOR (Write To Operator
                          with Response).

       text               specifies a single- or multiple-line response,
                          which  you  terminate  with a carriage return.
                          If you press carriage return immediately after
                          the  message  number,  OPR responds with ENTER
                          TEXT AND TERMINATE  WITH  ^Z.   You  can  then
                          enter as many lines of text as needed.  To end
                          the text input,  press  CTRL/Z  and  the  OPR>
                          prompt returns.



                                  3-101
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (RESPOND)
                                (RESPOND)


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the RESPOND command to reply to  message  number  23,
           which was a Page Limit Exceeded message for printer 1.

           12:30:00  <23>  Printer 1  --Page Limit Exceeded--
                           Job OPRC Req #147 for REILLY
                           Type 'Respond <Number> CANCEL' to Cancel the
                           Job
                           Type 'Respond <Number> IGNORE' to Ignore the
                           Error
               _______ __ ___________
           OPR>RESPOND 23 IGNORE<RET>
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the RESPOND command to reply to  message  number  67,
           which  was  a request to remove a structure (TOPS-20 DISMOUNT
           command).

           13:57:01  <67>    --DISMOUNT QUERY--
                           Removal of structure PERF20: (Alias PERF20:)
                           requested.
                           Other jobs are currently using it. Should
                           removal request be processed (YES or NO)?
                           User KONEN, Job 26, Line 115
               _______ __ _______
           OPR>RESPOND 67 NO<RET>
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the RESPOND command to reply to  message  number  12,
           which   was  a  user's  inquiry  to  whether  timesharing  is
           available after 18:00.

            9:32:54  <12>     --Message from Timesharing User--
                            JOB 31 PTAYLOR at Terminal 121
                            WILL TIMESHARING BE AVAILABLE AFTER 18:00
               _______ _______
           OPR>RESPOND 12<RET>
           ___________ __ _________ _____ _____ _______
           TIMESHARING IS AVAILABLE UNTIL 23:00 TONIGHT^Z
                                                        ^
                                                        |
                                                     <CTRL/Z>


                                  3-102
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (RESPOND)
                                (RESPOND)


           OPR>




















































                                  3-103
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


  ROUTE - Routing Output Between Nodes
  ROUTE - Routing Output Between Nodes



  Function
  Function

       The ROUTE command changes the destination of output requests,  so
       that  the  output  intended for a specific unit (the source unit)
       will automatically be output on  another  unit  (the  destination
       unit).  The source and destination units may be on the same node,
       or they may be on different nodes.

       This function is useful when a unit malfunctions and  the  output
       from that device is immediately necessary.

       If you are an operator at a central site, you  can  route  output
       from  one  unit  to  another,  on  the  same  or  any other node.
       However, output cannot be processed on another host  system.   If
       output is routed to another host node, the request(s) will remain
       in  the  queue  indefinitely,  because  the  request  cannot   be
       processed.   If  you  are  an  operator at a remote node, you can
       route requests from one unit to another on your node.

       All device routing is entered into the system route table,  which
       can be examined using the OPR command SHOW ROUTE-TABLE, described
       in this chapter.  The  ROUTE  command  also  allows  you  to  end
       routing  and  delete  the  entry  from the system route table, by
       omitting the information pertaining to  the  destination  unit(s)
       and node.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>ROUTE keyword source-argument destination-argument<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     ALL-DEVICES
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER

       followed by one of these source arguments:

                                     unit-number
                                     ALL-UNITS

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname


                                  3-104
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


                                     CLUSTER nn
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       optionally followed by the switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /NODE:node-name::

       ALL-DEVICES is followed by one of these source arguments:

                                     node-name::
                                     ALL-NODES

       followed by one of these destination arguments:

                                     unit-number
                                     ALL-UNITS

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:
|
|                                     aliasname

                                     CLUSTER nn
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       optionally followed by the switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /NODE:node-name::

       ALL-DEVICES is followed by this destination argument:

                                     node-name::


                                  3-105
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


       The source-information is  always  required.   It  specifies  the
       source unit and node from which routing is to occur.

       The  destination-information  is  optional,  and  specifies   the
       destination  unit  and node to which routing is to occur.  If you
       omit the destination-information, any  existing  entries  in  the
       system  route table that refer to the source will be deleted, and
       the appropriate routing will be ended.

       Because the format and  arguments  used  with  the  ROUTE  depend
       largely on the keyword you use, it is highly recommended that you
       use the recognition feature (<ESC>) until  you  feel  comfortable
       with the command format.


  Keywords
  Keywords

       ALL-DEVICES        specifies all device output (card punch, paper
                          tape punch, plotter, and printer) at the node.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies card-punch output.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies paper-tape-punch output.

       PLOTTER            specifies plotter output.

|       PRINTER            specifies printer  output.   You  can  use  an
|                          alias  name  defined  with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command to reference a  printer  specification
|                          in this command.


  Arguments
  Arguments (for ALL-DEVICES)

          source-information

                          specifies the node(s) from which the output is
                          to  be  routed.   The  source-information  for
                          ALL-DEVICES is  specified  by  the  node  name
                          followed   by   two   colons   (for   example:
                          KL2102::) or by the keyword ALL-NODES.

          destination-information

                          specifies the node(s) to which the output will
                          be     routed.      For    ALL-DEVICES,    the
                          destination-information is  specified  by  the
                          node   name,   followed  by  two  colons  (for
                          example:  KL2102::).




                                  3-106
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


  Arguments
  Arguments (for keywords CARD-PUNCH, PAPER-TAPE PUNCH, and PLOTTER)

          source information

                          specifies the unit and  node  from  which  the
                          output  will  be  routed.   The unit number is
                          specified as either n (for a specific unit) or
                          ALL-UNITS,  to  designate  that all output for
                          the appropriate device is to be routed.   Note
                          that  if  you  specify a unit number, only the
                          requests made for that specific unit (with the
                          /UNIT  switch)  will  be  routed.  The node is
                          specified   by   the    switch    /NODE:name::
                          (described  below).   If  you  omit  the  node
                          specification,  the  node  to  which  you  are
                          connected is assumed.

          destination-information

                          specifies the  unit  and  node  to  which  the
                          output  will be routed.  The unit is specified
                          by n, the unit number, or ALL-UNITS.  The node
                          is specified by the switch /NODE:name::, which
                          is described below.  If  you  omit  the  /NODE
                          switch, the node to which you are connected is
                          assumed.


  Arguments
  Arguments (for the PRINTER keyword)

|          aliasname       specifies  an  alias  name  defined  with  the
|                          DEFINE  ALIAS  command  to reference a printer
|                          specification.

          CLUSTER nn      specifies  a  printer  on  a  node  within   a
                          cluster.   A  cluster  is  a  configuration of
                          processors     with      similar      internal
                          characteristics.    Each   processor   in  the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

               NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot


                                  3-107
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


                          be the local node or an alias.

          DQS queuename   specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

               NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

          LAT             specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

               PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.


                                  3-108
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


               SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

               SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.


  Switches
  Switches


|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                           specifies the particular cluster node  within
|                           the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request is
|                           processed.  The "cluster-node-name" qualifier
|                           can be any node name within the cluster or an
|                           asterisk (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                           nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::   specifies  the  node(s)  from  and  to  which
                           output    is    to   be   routed.    In   the
                           source-information,  /NODE   designates   the
                           source node.  In the destination-information,
                           /NODE designates the destination  node.   The
                           double  colon (::) following the node name is
                           optional.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       You cannot route output from ALL-UNITS to a specific unit number.
       If you type this command, the following error occurs:

           _____ _______ __________________ ______
       OPR>ROUTE PRINTER ALL-UNITS/KL2102:: 0<RET>
       OPR>
       15:15:36        --Cannot Route a Generic Unit--
       OPR>

       This error is produced to prevent output from being processed  on
       a unit that does not have certain necessary characteristics.  For


                                  3-109
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


       example, if printer 0 does not have lowercase capability, and  if
       the  requests  being  routed  require  a  printer  with lowercase
       capability, then the requests cannot be processed on printer 0.


















































                                  3-110
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (ROUTE)
                                 (ROUTE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  To route the output that is destined for printer  unit  0  to
           printer unit 1, on the same node, use the following command:

               _____ _______ _ ______
           OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0 1<RET>
           OPR>
           15:33:12 --Printer 0 [KL2102] Routed to Printer 1 [KL2102]--
           OPR>

       2.  To end the routing for printer 0 and to delete the entry from
           the routing table, use the following command:

               _____ _______ ______
           OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0<RET>
           OPR>
           15:40:10        --Routing for Printer 0 [KL2102] Deleted--
           OPR>

       3.  To route all the output that is going to node DN200  to  node
           KL2102, use the following command:

               _____ ___________ ________ _____________
           OPR>ROUTE ALL-DEVICES GIDNEY:: KL2102::<RET>
           OPR>
           15:43:08        --Node DN200 Routed to KL2102--
           OPR>




























                                  3-111
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SEND)
                                  (SEND)


  SEND - Sending Messages
  SEND - Sending Messages



  Function
  Function

       The SEND command sends single- or  multiple-line  messages  to  a
       specific destination as defined by the keyword.  The SEND command
       allows you to  specify  a  one-line  message  terminated  with  a
       carriage  return  or  a  multiple-line  message terminated with a
       CTRL/Z.

       If you specify SEND ALL,  you  can  only  specify  a  single-line
       message terminated by a carriage return.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SEND keyword nn /switch message<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     ALL
                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     JOB
                                     OPERATOR
                                     TERMINAL

       followed by a stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       and optionally, for the BATCH-STREAM and OPERATOR keywords:

                                     /NODE:node-name::
                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       followed by a single- or multiple-line message


  Keywords
  Keywords

       ALL                specifies  that  a  message  be  sent  to  all
                          terminals   in  the  entire  system.   If  you
                          specify   the    ALL    keyword    with    the
                          /CLUSTER-NODE:  switch, all terminals for that
                          node receive the  text.   You  can  give  only
                          single-line messages when you specify ALL.

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies  that  a  message  be  sent   to   a
                          particular batch job, or over an IBM emulation


                                  3-112
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SEND)
                                  (SEND)


                          node to a remote IBM host.  The stream  number
                          must be supplied with this keyword.

       JOB                specifies  that  a  message  be  sent   to   a
                          particular  job  that  is currently processing
                          under timesharing or within the batch  system.
                          The  job  number  must  be  supplied with this
                          keyword.

       OPERATOR           specifies that a message be  sent  to  another
                          operator  at  another  node  with  the  /NODE:
                          switch.  If you  do  not  specify  the  /NODE:
                          switch,  the  message is sent to all operators
                          at all nodes.

       TERMINAL           specifies  that  a  message  be  sent   to   a
                          particular  logged-in  terminal.  The terminal
                          number must be supplied for this keyword.


  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::)  following  the  node  name  is optional.
                          This  switch  cannot  be  used  with  the  ALL
                          keyword.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
                          the  system cluster that your message is sent.
                          The "cluster-node-name" qualifier can  be  any
                          node  name  within  the cluster or an asterisk
                          (*).  The asterisk specifies all nodes  within
                          the  cluster.   (This switch is valid only for
                          the ALL keyword.)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SEND command to notify all users that timesharing
           ends in 30 minutes.

               ____ ___ ___________ ____ __ __ ____________
           OPR>SEND ALL TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES<RET>
           OPR>
           14:57:05        --SEND Command Completed--
           OPR>




                                  3-113
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SEND)
                                  (SEND)


       2.  Specify the SEND command to notify all operators that  a  new
           stand-alone schedule has been posted.

               ____ ________ ___ ___________ ________ __ ___________
           OPR>SEND OPERATOR NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED<RET>
           OPR>
           12:05:35
           From Operator Terminal 1: NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED
           OPR>
           12:05:39        --SEND Command Completed--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the SEND command to notify job 32  to  stop  queueing
           print  requests due to a problem with the line printer at the
           central site.

               ____ ___ __ __ ___ ___________
           OPR>SEND JOB 32 DO NOT QUEUE-<RET>
            ___ _____ ____ _____ _____________
            ANY PRINT JOBS UNTIL NOTIFIED<RET>
           OPR>
           10:39:05        --SEND Command Completed--
           OPR>

































                                  3-114
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SET)
                                  (SET)


  SET - Setting Parameters for System Devices
  SET - Setting Parameters for System Devices



  Function
  Function

       The SET command sets various system parameters for  the  system's
       devices and features.

       In addition, the SET command can be issued  before  a  particular
       device  (queue) or stream has been started or becomes active.  In
       particular, the SET command is very useful within the  PTYCON.ATO
       file  for system start-up and it can be used during normal system
       operation as well.

       Because the  SET  command  is  complex  with  multiple  keywords,
       arguments, switches, and numeric values, each SET keyword command
       is described in the same format as individual OPR commands.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SET keyword<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     DISK-DRIVE
                                     JOB
                                     NODE
                                     ONLINE
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PORT
                                     PRINTER
                                     SCHEDULER
                                     STRUCTURE
                                     TAPE-DRIVE

       followed by one or  keywords,  arguments,  switches,  and  values
       described in the SET command subsections.











                                  3-115
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SET BATCH-STREAM)
                            (SET BATCH-STREAM)


  SET BATCH-STREAM - Setting Batch Stream Parameters
  SET BATCH-STREAM - Setting Batch Stream Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET  BATCH-STREAM  command  sets  the  characteristics  of  a
       particular  stream  or a range of streams.  These characteristics
       remain in effect until you reissue the SET BATCH-STREAM command.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

       where nn must be the stream number

       or a range:                   n:m

       and, optionally, the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     ATTRIBUTE BATCON
                                               SITGO
                                     NOOPR-INTERVENTION
                                     OPR-INTERVENTION
                                     PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                     n:m
                                     TIME-LIMITS nn
                                                 n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Arguments
  Arguments

       nn                 specifies a batch-stream number.   The  number
                          is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                          your  installation   uses   additional   batch
                          streams.

       n:m                specifies a range of batch streams.

       ATTRIBUTE          specifies whether the  batch  stream  operates
                          with the BATCON or with the SITGO program.



                                  3-116
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SET BATCH-STREAM)
                            (SET BATCH-STREAM)


            BATCON        specifies that the batch stream use the BATCON
                          controller.   This is the system default batch
                          controller.

            SITGO         specifies the  SITGO  batch  processor,  which
                          consists   of  a  fast  FORTRAN  compiler  for
                          compiling FORTRAN programs in a batch stream.

       NOOPR-INTERVENTION specifies that a user cannot make any requests
                          in  the  batch job that require you to perform
                          an action of some kind or require you to  send
                          a    message.     If    a    batch   job   has
                          NOOPR-INTERVENTION set, any messages it  sends
                          are  ignored  and you are not asked to perform
                          any  action.   If  the  batch   job   requests
                          mountable  devices,  and  if the job must wait
                          until the device  is  mounted,  the  job  will
                          receive an error.

       OPR-INTERVENTION   specifies that the user can pass  messages  to
                          you  and  that  you  are  available to perform
                          actions that a user or batch job requests.

       PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies  the  priority  limits  of  a  batch
                          stream  or  a  range  of  batch streams at the
                          central site or at a node.  The numeric  value
                          associated  with this argument means that only
                          batch  jobs  submitted  by  users   with   the
                          /PRIORITY:   switch  specifying the number (or
                          range)  you  set  for  the  batch  stream  can
                          execute in that stream.  The numeric value for
                          the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be from 1  to
                          63.   The  higher  the  number, the higher the
                          priority.

       TIME-LIMITS nn     specifies the maximum execution time limit for
                          a  given  batch  stream  or  a  range of batch
                          streams.  When a  batch  job  enters  a  batch
                          stream,  it receives a default execution time,
                          such as five minutes.  If the job exceeds this
                          time  limit  and if the user who submitted the
                          batch job set up his control  file  to  handle
                          time limits, the batch system gives the job an
                          additional 10% of the allocated time.  If  the
                          job  exceeds  this  additional 10%, the job is
                          canceled.  The TIME-LIMITS argument allows you
                          to specify that batch jobs that are set to run
                          a certain length  of  time  will  run  in  the
                          specified batch-stream number (or range).  The
                          numeric value for the TIME-LIMITS argument can
                          be from 0 to 99999, representing minutes.


                                  3-117
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SET BATCH-STREAM)
                            (SET BATCH-STREAM)


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  request  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::) following the node name is optional.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set stream  number  3
           to have a priority limit of 63.

               ___ ____________ _ _______________ _______
           OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 3 PRIORITY-LIMITS 63<RET>
           OPR>
           13:20:54        Batch-stream 3  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set streams 0 through
           2 for no operator intervention.

               ___ ____________ ___ _______________________
           OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0:2 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
           OPR>
           16:11:17        Batch-stream 0  --Set Accepted--
           16:11:21        Batch-stream 1  --Set Accepted--
           16:11:24        Batch-stream 2  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>

















                                  3-118
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)


  SET CARD-PUNCH - Setting Card Punch Parameters
  SET CARD-PUNCH - Setting Card Punch Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET CARD-PUNCH  command  specifies  what  kind  of  jobs  are
       scheduled  on  this  device.   You  can set the form type, output
       limits (card limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken
       when  a  job  exceeds  the  output  limit that you specify.  This
       command allows you to change  the  parameters  that  are  set  at
       GALGEN  time.   You can specify a specific unit number or a range
       of unit numbers.

       The card-punch device handles standard 12-row 80-column cards.

       The defaults for the card punch are set by your System Manager at
       software-installation   time   through   the  generation  of  the
       <SYSTEM>SPFORM.INI file.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

       where nn must be a unit number

       or a range:                   n:m

       and, optionally, the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     DESTINATION quoted string
                                     FORMS-TYPE name
                                     LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                     OUTPUT-LIMITS cards
                                     PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                     n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Arguments
  Arguments

       nn                 specifies  a  card-punch  unit  number.    The
                          number  is  usually  from  0  to 5, but can be


                                  3-119
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)


                          larger if your installation has acquired  more
                          card-punch devices.

       n:m                specifies a range of card-punch unit numbers.


       DESTINATION node"user password account"::device:[directory]

                          specifies the destination to receive IBM  card
                          punch  output.  This is valid only if node has
                          been defined as an  SNA-WORKSTATION  with  the
                                                              __________
                          DEFINE   NODE  command.   See  the  DECnet/SNA
                          _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________
                          TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's
                          _____
                          Guide for more information.

       FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name of the type  of  card-punch
                          forms.   Your  installation can have different
                          names for different types of card-punch forms.
                          By  setting the FORMS-TYPE, you are specifying
                          the type of forms in the card punch.

       LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                          specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                          if a card-punch job that is currently punching
                          on the unit number you specify exceeds the set
                          limit  of  output.   The  limit  is set by the
                          OUTPUT-LIMITS  argument.   There   are   three
                          possible    words    associated    with    the
                          LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

            ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                          card-punch  job  exceeds  the  card  limit  on
                          output.  You then have the option to  continue
                          or abort the card-punch job.

            CANCEL        specifies   that   the   card-punch   job   is
                          automatically canceled when the limit has been
                          exceeded.

            IGNORE        specifies that the  card-punch  job  continues
                          automatically  and the set output (card) limit
                          is ignored.

       OUTPUT-LIMITS cards

                          specifies the maximum card limit  for  punched
                          output.   This  argument  can  also  specify a
                          range of card limits.  The card  limit  refers
                          to   the  number  of  output  cards  that  are
                          punched.  This command restricts the  size  of


                                  3-120
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)


                          jobs  that  is  sent  to  the  card  punch you
                          specify.

       PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                          importance) of a card punch or a range of card
                          punches at the central site or at a node.  The
                          numeric  value  associated  with this argument
                          means that only card-punch jobs  submitted  by
                          users  with  the /PRIORITY:  switch specifying
                          the number (or range) you  set  for  the  card
                          punch  can  execute  on  that card punch.  The
                          numeric value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument
                          can  be  from  1 to 63.  The higher the number
                          is, the higher the priority is.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  or  an SNA workstation.  The default
                          is your  own  node.   The  double  colon  (::)
                          following the node name is optional.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set the forms  type  to
           5081s for all card-punch devices at your installation.

               ___ __________ ___ __________ _________
           OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 FORMS-TYPE 5081<RET>
           OPR>
           10:13:17        Card-Punch 0  --Set Accepted--

           10:13:20        Card-Punch 1  --Set Accepted--

           10:13:23        Card-Punch 2  --Set Accepted--

           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set all card-punch jobs
           for a maximum output limit of 200 cards per job.



                                  3-121
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)
                             (SET CARD-PUNCH)


               ___ __________ ___ ____________ ________
           OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 OUTPUT-LIMIT 200<RET>
           OPR>
           10:30:16        Card-Punch 0  --Set Accepted--

           10:30:19        Card-Punch 1  --Set Accepted--

           10:30:22        Card-Punch 2  --Set Accepted--

           OPR>












































                                  3-122
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET DISK-DRIVE)
                             (SET DISK-DRIVE)


  SET DISK-DRIVE - Setting Disk-Drive Parameters
  SET DISK-DRIVE - Setting Disk-Drive Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET DISK-DRIVE command sets the availability  characteristics
       of a particular disk drive device.  With the use of this command,
       you can allow or disallow users  from  mounting  and  dismounting
       structures  on  the disk drive.  You must specify the channel and
       drive numbers, and either the AVAILABLE or UNAVAILABLE argument.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SET DISK-DRIVE CHANNEL nn argument DRIVE nn argument<RET>

       where nn must be the channel number

       optionally followed by the argument:

                                     CONTROLLER nn

       followed by the drive unit number

       and either of the following arguments:

                                     AVAILABLE
                                     UNAVAILABLE

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       CHANNEL nn         specifies the channel number that connects the
                          disk  drive  with the central processing unit.
                          The SHOW STATUS  DISK-DRIVE  command  displays
                          the available channels on your system.

       DRIVE nn           specifies the physical unit number of the disk
                          drive.   The  SHOW  STATUS  DISK-DRIVE command
                          displays the drive numbers that are associated
                          with the channels on your system.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       CONTROLLER nn      specifies  the  number  of  the   disk   drive


                                  3-123
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET DISK-DRIVE)
                             (SET DISK-DRIVE)


                          controller.    The   SHOW   STATUS  DISK-DRIVE
                          command displays the controller  numbers  that
                          are  associated  with  the disk drives on your
                          system.

       AVAILABLE          specifies that users can now MOUNT  structures
                          on  this particular disk drive.  This argument
                          cancels  the   effect   of   the   UNAVAILABLE
                          argument.    The  PTYCON.ATO  file  determines
                          whether  each  of  the  disk  drives  at  your
                          installation  are  available or unavailable at
                          system start-up.

       UNAVAILABLE        specifies that users cannot  MOUNT  structures
                          on  this particular disk drive.  This argument
                          cancels the effect of the AVAILABLE  argument.
                          If  a  user  is currently using a structure on
                          this  disk  drive,  the  disk  drive   becomes
                          unavailable after the user completes his work.
                          If the system  crashes  or  is  shutdown,  the
                          command  SET  DISK-DRIVE  CHANNEL  nn DRIVE nn
                          UNAVAILABLE remains in effect after the system
                          is in operation again.

                          When you specify the UNAVAILABLE argument, you
                          can  enter a single- or multiple-line response
                          and confirm with a carriage return, or you can
                          confirm  with  a  carriage  return immediately
                          after  the  UNAVAILABLE   argument   and   OPR
                          responds  with  ENTER  TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH
                          ^Z.  You then enter as many lines of text  for
                          a  response  as  you  need.   When  you  press
                          CTRL/Z,  the  OPR>  prompt  returns  and  your
                          report is logged into the ERROR.SYS file.


  Switch
  Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.







                                  3-124
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET DISK-DRIVE)
                             (SET DISK-DRIVE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET DISK-DRIVE command to set drive 2 on  channel
           2  to  be unavailable.  Any users currently using this device
           are allowed to finish their work before  the  device  becomes
           unavailable  to them.  Any users requesting a structure mount
           on this device receives a message  notifying  them  that  the
           structure is unavailable.

               ___ __________ _______ _ _____ _ ________________
           OPR>SET DISK-DRIVE CHANNEL 2 DRIVE 2 UNAVAILABLE<RET>
           Enter Text and Terminate with ^Z
           _____ ____ __ ________
           DRIVE MUST BE ADJUSTED^Z
                                  ^
                                  |
                               <CTRL/Z>
           OPR>
           10:23:56          --Disk Drive Set Unavailable--
                   Chan 2 Drive 2 set unavailable for mounting by MOUNTR
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET DISK-DRIVE command to make any  structure  on
           disk drive 2 on channel 2 available for mounts and dismounts.

               ___ __________ _______ _ _____ _ ______________
           OPR>SET DISK-DRIVE CHANNEL 2 DRIVE 2 AVAILABLE<RET>
           OPR>
           12:02:24          --Disk Drive Set Available--
                   Chan 2 Drive 2 set available for mounting by MOUNTR
           OPR>

























                                  3-125
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET JOB)
                                (SET JOB)


  SET JOB - Setting Characteristics for Jobs
  SET JOB - Setting Characteristics for Jobs



  Function
  Function

       The SET JOB command sets the characteristics for a particular job
       number.   You  can set the job for operator intervention allowed,
       no operator intervention allowed, or you can change the scheduler
       class of the job.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET JOB nn argument /switch<RET>

       where nn must be the job number

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     NOOPR-INTERVENTION
                                     OPR-INTERVENTION
                                     SCHEDULER-CLASS n

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Arguments
  Arguments

       nn                 specifies  a  job  number  currently  in   the
                          system.   The  numeric  value can be from 0 to
                          99999.

       NOOPR-INTERVENTION specifies that a user cannot make any requests
                          in  the  job  that  require  you to perform an
                          action of some kind and/or produce  a  message
                          to  be  answered  by  you.   If  the job has a
                          NOOPR-INTERVENTION setting, the  messages  are
                          ignored;  you  are  not  asked  to perform any
                          action.

       OPR-INTERVENTION   specifies that  a  user  associated  with  the
                          specified  job number can pass messages to you
                          and you can perform the requested actions.

       SCHEDULER-CLASS n  specifies the scheduler class for the  job  be
                          changed.   This  keyword can be used only when
                          POLICY-PROGRAM     is     controlling     your
                          class-scheduling.    Refer   to   your  System


                                  3-126
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET JOB)
                                (SET JOB)


                          Manager  about  a  POLICY-PROGRAM   accounting
                          system before you issue this command.


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       If you attempt to set the SCHEDULER-CLASS for  a  particular  job
       without  the  POLICY-PROGRAM  initiated at your installation, you
       will receive the following error message:

       hh:mm:ss        --Set Job Scheduler Error: Cannot change class--


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET JOB command to  allow  operator  intervention
           for job number 100.

               ___ ___ ___ _____________________
           OPR>SET JOB 100 OPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
           OPR>
           15:55:15        Job 100  --Modified--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify  the  SET  JOB  command   to   not   allow   operator
           intervention for job number 50.

               ___ ___ __ _______________________
           OPR>SET JOB 50 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
           OPR>
           16:43:34        Job 50  --Modified--
           OPR>











                                  3-127
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET NODE)
                                (SET NODE)


  SET NODE - Setting Node Parameters
  SET NODE - Setting Node Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET NODE command is applicable only if your installation  has
       IBM communications software.

       The   SET   NODE   command    sets    the    modem-related    and
       data-transfer-related  parameters  for  DN60  nodes, and sets the
       characteristics for SNA workstations.

       Before you set the parameters for a node,  you  must  define  the
       node  name, type, and mode with the DEFINE command.  Refer to the
       DEFINE command in this chapter.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SET NODE keyword arguments <RET>

       where keyword is:             node-name::

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     BYTES-PER-MESSAGE b
                                     CLEAR-SEND-DELAY d
                                     RECORDS-PER-MESSAGE r
                                     TIMEOUT-CATEGORY PRIMARY
                                                      SECONDARY
                                     TRANSPARENCY ON
                                                  OFF

       or for SNA workstations, one of these arguments:

                                     APPLICATION name
                                     CHARACTER-SET filespec
                                     CIRCUIT circuit-id
                                     DATA string
                                     LOGON-MODE name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       node-name::        specifies the node name of the remote  station
                          for IBM communications.  The double colon (::)
                          following the node name is optional.





                                  3-128
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET NODE)
                                (SET NODE)


  Arguments
  Arguments

       BYTES-PER-MESSAGE b

                          specifies the number of bytes, b, per  message
                          that  the  front  end uses to communicate with
                          the remote site.  There is  no  limit  to  the
                          number of bytes you can supply.

       CLEAR-SEND-DELAY d

                          specifies a clear-to-send delay, where d =  0,
                          1, 3, 9, or 13 milliseconds.  The default is 3
                          milliseconds.

       RECORDS-PER-MESSAGE r

                          specifies the number of records  per  message,
                          where r can equal:

                          0 for unlimited number of records (the default
                            for 3780)

                          2 for a unit with no multirecord feature

                          7 for  a  unit  like  an  IBM  2780  with  the
                            multirecord feature (the default for 2780)

       TIMEOUT-CATEGORY PRIMARY
                        SECONDARY

                          specifies the timeout category used by the BSC
                          protocol  to  determine how connecting systems
                          bid for use of the line.  Two systems  bidding
                          for  the use of a line must not be in the same
                          timeout category,  since  this  condition  can
                          result  in  simultaneous bids for a line and a
                          "deadly embrace".  To prevent this, one system
                          is  placed in the PRIMARY (p) category and the
                          other in the SECONDARY (s) category.

                          The timeout category for the HASP  spooler  is
                          always  SECONDARY  so  when  the  TOPS-20 host
                          connects to a HASP system, it must  be  placed
                          in  the PRIMARY timeout category.  The timeout
                          category for IBM 2780s and  3780s  is  usually
                          hardwired as PRIMARY, so when the TOPS-20 host
                          connects  to  stations  like  these,  it  must
                          usually  be  placed  in  the SECONDARY timeout
                          category.  The timeout category  for  the  ASP
                          spooler  may  be PRIMARY.  The default timeout


                                  3-129
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET NODE)
                                (SET NODE)


                          category is PRIMARY.

       TRANSPARENCY ON    specifies  a  transmission  mode   where   the
                    OFF   specifies  a  transmission  mode   where   the
                          recognition  of  most  control  characters  is
                          suppressed (TRANSPARENCY  ON  argument).   The
                          argument  can  only  be  specified  when using
                          HASP.  The default TRANSPARENCY is OFF.


  Arguments
  Arguments (for SNA workstations)

                                                              __________
  For more information about SNA workstations, refer to  the  DECnet/SNA
  _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________ _____
  TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's Guide.


       APPLICATION name         Specifies   the   name    of    the
                                application  in  the  IBM  host  to
                                which the workstation connects.

       CHARACTER-SET filespec   Specifies the name of the file that
                                contains      the      ASCII/EBCDIC
                                translation  table  used   by   the
                                workstation.

       CIRCUIT circuit-id        Specifies the name of the  circuit
                                that  the Gateway uses to reach the
                                IBM host.

       DATA string              Supplies     additional      log-on
                                information  required  by  the  job
                                entry subsystem in the IBM host.

       LOGON-MODE name          Specifies a name that the IBM  host
                                uses     to    obtain    predefined
                                characteristics  for  the   session
                                being established.


  These arguments for the SET NODE command correspond to parameters  set
  by  the IBM host's system manager.  The SET NODE command gives you the
  option of changing or adding to information associated with the access
  name  you  specified  in  the  DEFINE  command.  If you specify a null
  argument for any parameter, the parameter is automatically cleared and
  reset to the information specified in the access name.

  To use the APPLICATION parameter, you must know the name  of  the  IBM
  application  to  which  you  want to connect.  Contact your IBM system
  manager for this information.




                                  3-130
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SET NODE)
                                (SET NODE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You specify the SET NODE command to change  the  TRANSPARENCY
           from the OFF default to ON for node IBM2::.

               ___ ____ ______ ____________ _______
           OPR>SET NODE IBM2:: TRANSPARENCY ON<RET>
           OPR>
           16:32:43        -- Set for Node IBM2 Accepted --
           OPR>

       2.  You specify the SET NODE command  to  set  the  clear-to-send
           delay of 3 milliseconds for node IBM1::.

               ___ ____ ______ ________________ ______
           OPR>SET NODE IBM1:: CLEAR-SEND-DELAY 3<RET>
           OPR>
           17:23:45        -- Set for Node IBM1 Accepted --
           OPR>




































                                  3-131
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET ONLINE)
                               (SET ONLINE)


  SET ONLINE - Setting a Device On-Line
  SET ONLINE - Setting a Device On-Line


  Function
  Function

       The SET ONLINE command sets the devices listed below on-line when
       the  device  has  been  newly  installed at your operations site.
       This command is valid only  if  your  site  has  a  DX20  channel
       controller installed and on-line.

       The devices that are interfaced through the DX20 are:

       1.  TX01 - tape controller

       2.  TX03 - channel selector

       3.  TX05 - tape drive selector

       4.  TU70 - tape drive

       5.  TU71 - tape drive

       6.  TU72 - tape drive

       In addition, this command is helpful when Field Service takes one
       of  these devices off-line for repair and then returns the device
       back to you for your control.

       The SET ONLINE command's arguments  are  channel  number,  device
       unit  number, and controller number, separated by commas.  If the
       device has no controller number, type -1.

                                     NOTE

               This  command  currently  accepts  an   alternate
               channel   number,   device   unit   number,   and
               controller number separated by commas.   However,
               these  alternate  arguments  are  not used by the
               system and are provided for future use.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET ONLINE ch,unit,cntrlr /switch<RET>

       where ch is the channel number

       unit is the device unit number

       cntrlr is the controller number



                                  3-132
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SET ONLINE)
                               (SET ONLINE)


|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                 /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|
  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       Once the monitor has been reloaded, you do not need  to  SET  the
       device  ONLINE  again.  The device is automatically recognized by
       the monitor as being on-line.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You set the hardware device TX05 on-line after  it  has  been
           installed  during  timesharing  with an address of channel 1,
           unit 1, controller 1.

               ___ ______ __________
           OPR>SET ONLINE 1,1,1<RET>
           OPR>
            8:32:13        --Set Online Accepted--
           OPR>

       2.  You set the hardware device TU70 on-line after Field  Service
           repaired the tape unit.

               ___ ______ __________
           OPR>SET ONLINE 1,2,1<RET>
           OPR>
           14:43:09        --Set Online Accepted--
           OPR>











                                  3-133
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)
                          (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)


  SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH - Setting Paper-Tape-Punch Parameters
  SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH - Setting Paper-Tape-Punch Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command specifies what kind of jobs will
       be  scheduled on this device.  You can set the forms type, output
       limits (fold limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken
       when  a  job  exceeds  the  output  limit that you specify.  This
       command allows you change the parameters that are set  at  GALGEN
       time.   You can specify a specific unit number or a range of unit
       numbers.

       The defaults for the paper-tape punch  are  set  by  your  System
       Manager  at  software-installation time through the generation of
       the  <SYSTEM>SPFORM.INI  file.   These  defaults   are   normally
       referred to as NORMAL in most installations.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

       where nn must be a unit number

       or a range:                   n:m

       and, optionally, the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     FORMS-TYPE name
                                     LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                     OUTPUT-LIMITS folds
                                     PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                     n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Arguments
  Arguments

       nn                 specifies a paper-tape-punch unit number.  The
                          number  is  usually  from  0  to 5, but can be
                          larger if your installation has acquired  more
                          paper-tape-punch devices.


                                  3-134
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)
                          (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)


       n:m                specifies a range of paper-tape punches.

       FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name of the type  of  paper-tape
                          forms.   Typically  in some installations, the
                          normal paper-tape form is  referred  to  as  a
                          1-inch  wide  fan-fold, and can be abbreviated
                          as 1WFF or NORMAL.  Your installation can have
                          different  form  names  for different types of
                          paper-tape.  By setting  the  FORMS-TYPE,  you
                          are  specifying  the  type  of  forms  in  the
                          paper-tape punch.

       LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                          specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                          if a paper-tape job that is currently punching
                          on the unit number you specify exceeds the set
                          limit  of  output.   The limit is set with the
                          OUTPUT-LIMITS  argument.   There   are   three
                          possible    words    associated    with    the
                          LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

            ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                          paper-tape  job  exceeds  the  fold  limit  on
                          output.  You then have the option to  continue
                          or abort the paper-tape job.

            CANCEL        specifies   that   the   paper-tape   job   is
                          automatically canceled when the limit has been
                          exceeded.

            IGNORE        specifies that the  paper-tape  job  continues
                          automatically  and  the  specified output fold
                          limit will be ignored.

       OUTPUT-LIMITS folds

                          specifies the maximum fold limit  for  punched
                          paper-tape  output.   This  argument  can also
                          specify a range  of  fold  limits.   The  fold
                          limit  refers  to  the  number of output folds
                          that are punched.  This command restricts  the
                          size  of  jobs that are sent to the paper-tape
                          punch you specify.

       PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                       n:m

                          specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                          importance)  of  a paper-tape punch or a range
                          of paper-tape punches at the central  site  or


                                  3-135
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                          (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)
                          (SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH)


                          at  a node.  The numeric value associated with
                          this argument means that only paper-tape  jobs
                          submitted by users with the /PRIORITY:  switch
                          specifying the number (or range) you  set  for
                          the  paper-tape  punch  can  execute  on  that
                          paper-tape punch.  The numeric value  for  the
                          PRIORITY-LIMITS  argument can be from 1 to 63.
                          The higher  the  number  is,  the  higher  the
                          priority is.


  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::) following the node name is optional.

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  commmand is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command to set  the  default
           form  type  to  1WFF  for  a  paper-tape-punch device at your
           installation.

               ___ ________________ _ __________ _________
           OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0 FORMS-TYPE 1WFF<RET>
           OPR>
           12:45:09        Papertape 0  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command  form,  to  set  all
           paper-tape-punch  jobs for a maximum output limit of 25 folds
           per job.

               ___ ________________ ___ ____________ _______
           OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0:1 OUTPUT-LIMIT 25<RET>
           OPR>
           13:45:07        Papertape 0  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>






                                  3-136
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PLOTTER)
                              (SET PLOTTER)


  SET PLOTTER - Setting Plotter Parameters
  SET PLOTTER - Setting Plotter Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET PLOTTER command specifies what kind of jobs are scheduled
       on  this device.  You can set the forms type, output limits (step
       limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken when  a  job
       exceeds  the  output limit that you specify.  This command allows
       you change the parameters that are set at GALGEN time.   You  can
       specify a specific unit number or a range of unit numbers.

       The   plotter   device   draws   (or   plots)   ink   plots    of
       computer-generated data.  Its movement in producing the output is
       measured in "steps".  The steps refer to the speed per second  of
       the  plotter  and the distance (or size) that the pencils move on
       the output paper.  The paper for the plotter is either drum  feed
       or bed feed.

       The defaults for the plotter are set by your  System  Manager  at
       software-installation   time   through   the  generation  of  the
       <SYSTEM>SPFORM.INI file.   At  some  installations,  the  default
       settings for the plotter are referred to as NORMAL.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET PLOTTER nn /switch argument /switch<RET>

       where nn must be a unit number

       or a range:                   n:m

       and, optionally the switch:

                                     /NODE:node-name::

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     FORMS-TYPE name
                                     LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                     OUTPUT-LIMITS steps
                                     PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                     n:m

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name




                                  3-137
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PLOTTER)
                              (SET PLOTTER)


  Arguments
  Arguments

       nn                 specifies a plotter unit number.   The  number
                          is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                          your installation has more plotter devices.

       n:m                specifies a range of plotter unit numbers.

       FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name  of  the  type  of  plotter
                          forms.   Typically,  the  normal plotter paper
                          form is referred to as roll feed or bed  feed.
                          This can be referred to as type ROLL, DRUM, or
                          BED.  Your  installation  can  have  different
                          form names for different plotter types.

       LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                          specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                          if a plotter job that is currently plotting on
                          the unit number you specify  exceeds  the  set
                          limit  of  output.   The limit is set with the
                          OUTPUT-LIMITS  argument.   There   are   three
                          possible    words    associated    with    the
                          LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

            ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                          plotter  job exceeds the step limit on output.
                          You then have the option to continue or  abort
                          the plotter job.

            CANCEL        specifies   that   the    plotter    job    is
                          automatically canceled when the limit has been
                          exceeded.

            IGNORE        specifies  that  the  plotter  job   continues
                          automatically  and the specified output (step)
                          limit will be ignored.

       OUTPUT-LIMIT steps

                          specifies the  number  of  plotter  steps  per
                          second.  A step is the horizontal and vertical
                          movement of the pen within  the  grid  on  the
                          paper.   This  is  referred to as the size (or
                          distance).  The number you specify  represents
                          nnK   steps   (K   =   1000).    For  example,
                          OUTPUT-LIMIT 3 is equal to 3000.






                                  3-138
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PLOTTER)
                              (SET PLOTTER)


       PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                       n:m

                          specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                          importance)   of  a  plotter  or  a  range  of
                          plotters at the central site  or  at  a  node.
                          The   numeric   value   associated  with  this
                          argument  means   that   only   plotter   jobs
                          submitted by users with the /PRIORITY:  switch
                          specifying the number (or range) you  set  for
                          the  plotter can execute on that plotter.  The
                          numeric value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument
                          can  be  from  1 to 63.  The higher the number
                          is, the higher the priority is.

  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host node, a remote
                          station,  a  VMS  node,  or a LAT server.  The
                          default is your own node.   The  double  colon
                          (::) following the node name is optional.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET PLOTTER command to change the forms  type  of
           the plotter.

               ___ _______ _ __________ _________
           OPR>SET PLOTTER 1 FORMS-TYPE ROLL<RET>
           OPR>
            9:34:12        Plotter 1  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET PLOTTER command to change the output limit.

               ___ _______ _ ____________ ______
           OPR>SET PLOTTER 0 OUTPUT-LIMIT 8<RET>
           OPR>
           10:11:12        Plotter 0  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>





                                  3-139
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT CI)
                              (SET PORT CI)


  SET PORT CI - Controlling the CI port
  SET PORT CI - Controlling the CI port



  Function
  Function

       The SET PORT CI command allows or disallows using the CI20  port.
       You can use this command only if your system has a CI20.

       Set the CI port UNAVAILABLE to run diagnostics on the CI hardware
       or  to remove a TOPS-20 system from a CFS cluster.  Never set the
       CI port UNAVAILABLE without approval from  your  system  manager.
               _______ ______ _________ _____
       See the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide for more information.

       Setting the CI port UNAVAILABLE  helps  you  perform  an  orderly
       TOPS-20 shutdown in a CFS configuration.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET PORT keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        CI

       and argument is one of the following:

                                     AVAILABLE
                                     UNAVAILABLE

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       CI                 specifies the CI port.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       AVAILABLE          specifies that TOPS-20 start  using  the  CI20
                          again.  When you give this command, the system
                          asks you whether there is another TOPS-20 node
                          in   the   cluster.    If  yes,  you  will  be
                          instructed  to  reboot  the  system.   If  you
                          answer  no  and  the  system discovers another
                          TOPS-20 system on the CI, one of  the  systems
                          will BUGHLT.

                          This  argument  cancels  the  effect  of   the


                                  3-140
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT CI)
                              (SET PORT CI)


                          UNAVAILABLE  argument.   Once  this command is
                          given and the CI20 microcode  is  successfully
                          loaded, the CI port remains AVAILABLE until it
                          is set UNAVAILABLE.

                          AVAILABLE is the default.

       UNAVAILABLE        specifies that TOPS-20 should stop  using  the
                          CI.

                          When you SET PORT CI UNAVAILABLE,  the  system
                          lists the structures that will be affected and
                          asks you to respond  with  ABORT,  PROCEED  or
                          FORCE.   You must be sure that all multiaccess
                          structures are  dismounted  properly,  or  the
                          users  will  be  "hung."  Notify  the users to
                          dismount the affected structures.

                          The SET PORT CI UNAVAILABLE command remains in
                          effect until you use the SET PORT CI AVAILABLE
                          command, even if the system crashes or is shut
                          down and rebooted.

                          If a massbus disk drive is dualported, it  may
                          be  necessary  to  switch  to  single  port so
                          access  to  the  drive  can  continue  on  one
                          system.

                          After giving the users time  to  dismount  the
                          structure, use the RESPOND command with one of
                          the following options:

            ABORT         cancels  the  command  without  changing   the
                          status of the CI or any structures.

            PROCEED       begins  the  procedure  to  set  the  CI  port
                          unavailable.

            FORCE         dismounts all structures and sets the CI  port
                          unavailable.  (Use caution with this response;
                          structures are dismounted whether or not users
                          are accessing the structure.)

       If a massbus drive is dualported, the system informs you  with  a
       message.  Respond by manually setting the port switch to a single
       system.  Then type the PROCEED response.







                                  3-141
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT CI)
                              (SET PORT CI)


  Switch
  Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Set the CI UNAVAILABLE to stop using the CI20.

               ___ ____ __ ___________ _____
           OPR>SET PORT CI UNAVAILABLE <RET>
           OPR>
           12:14:48  <1>     -- Port Unavailable Procedure Notice --
           Setting CI Port 7 UNAVAILABLE

           The following structure(s) need to be dismounted or removed.

           DISK DRIVE INFORMATION DISK PACK INFO...

                 Chan-Cont   Disk    Mount    Mount              Usage
            Type   Drive    Status   Status   Count Name         Options
           ----- ----------------    ------   ----- ------------ -------
           *RP06 0,  ,2     Avail    Mounted  1     AP02   (1/1)
            RA81 7,07,5     Avail    Mounted  1     EXODUS (1/1)
            RA60 7,07,254   Avail    Mounted  1     DRV354 (1/1)
            RA81 7,07,18    Avail    Mounted  0     DRV18  (1/1)
                 NOTE: Channel 7 indicates CI channel
                 (*) indicates dual ported disk drives

           Type 'RESPOND <number> option' where 'option' is one  of  the
           following:

                ABORT           To cancel Port Unavailable Procedure.
                PROCEED         To  follow   normal   port   unavailable
                                procedure   verifying   each   structure
                                change.
                FORCE           To proceed with no further notification.
                                Use this option with extreme caution.

               _______ _ _______ _____
           OPR>RESPOND 1 PROCEED <RET>
           OPR>
           12:15:33     -- Port Unavailable Procedure Notice --
                       Structure CHIP set exclusive due to
                        port unavailable operation
                                       .


                                  3-142
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT CI)
                              (SET PORT CI)


                                       .
                                       .
           12:21:24     -- Port Unavailable Operation Completed --
                       Port Set Unavailable
           OPR>

       2.  Set the CI AVAILABLE to allow use  of  the  CI20  (single  CI
           system).

               ___ ____ __ _________ _____
           OPR>SET PORT CI AVAILABLE <RET>
           OPR>
           17:40:31  <16>    -- Port Available Procedure Notice --
                  Is there another TOPS-20 system
                   currently running on the CI?
                  'RESPOND <number> Yes or No'

               _______ __ __ _____
           OPR>RESPOND 16 NO <RET>
           OPR>
           17:40:42      -- Port Available Operation Completed --
                  The following disk structures have been
                  returned to available:
                  Structure DISK1 set shared due to
                  port available operation
                  Channel 7 Controller 1 Drive 1 set available
                  Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 8 set available
                  Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 9 set available
                  Channel 7 Controller 8 Drive 254 set available
                  Port set available

       3.  Set the CI AVAILABLE to allow use of the  CI20  (multiple  CI
           system).

               ___ ____ __ _________ _____
           OPR>SET PORT CI AVAILABLE <RET>
           OPR>
           17:42:33  <18>    -- Port Available Procedure Notice --
                  Is there another TOPS-20 system
                  currently running on the CI?
                  'RESPOND <number> Yes or No'

               _______ __ ___ _____
           OPR>RESPOND 18 YES <RET>
           OPR>

           17:42:46    -- Port Available Procedure Notice --
                  CI port will not be in use until system is reloaded


           17:42:46    -- Port Available Operation Completed --
                  The following disk structures have been
                  returned to available:
                  Structure DISK1 set shared due to
                  port available operation


                                  3-143
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT CI)
                              (SET PORT CI)


                  Channel 7 Controller 1 Drive 1 set available
                  Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 8 set available
                  Channel 7 Controller 7 Drive 9 set available
                  Channel 7 Controller 8 Drive 254 set available
                  Port not found but status set to available
















































                                  3-144
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT NI)
                              (SET PORT NI)


  SET PORT NI - Controlling the NI Port
  SET PORT NI - Controlling the NI Port



  Function
  Function

       You can use the SET PORT NI command only if your installation has
       an Ethernet interface.

       The SET PORT NI command allows or disallows using the NI port.

       Set the  NI  port  UNAVAILABLE  to  run  diagnostics  on  the  NI
       hardware.   Do  not  set the NI port UNAVAILABLE without approval
                                         _______ ______ _________  _____
       from the system manager.  See the TOPS-20 System Manager's  Guide
       for more information.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET PORT keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        NI

       and argument is one of the following:

                                     AVAILABLE
                                     UNAVAILABLE

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       NI                 specifies the NI port.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       AVAILABLE          specifies that users are allowed to access the
                          Ethernet interface.  This argument cancels the
                          effect of the UNAVAILABLE argument.

                          AVAILABLE is the default setting.

       UNAVAILABLE        specifies  that  users   cannot   access   the
                          Ethernet  interface.   This  includes  DECnet,
                          LAT, and the NI% JSYS.




                                  3-145
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PORT NI)
                              (SET PORT NI)


  Switch
  Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.











































                                  3-146
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PRINTER)
                              (SET PRINTER)


  SET PRINTER - Setting Line Printer Parameters
  SET PRINTER - Setting Line Printer Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET PRINTER command specifies what kind of jobs are scheduled
       on  this  device.   You  can  set  the  forms  type, page limits,
       priority limits, and the action to be taken when  a  job  exceeds
       the  output  limit  that you specify.  This command allows you to
       change the parameters that are  set  at  GALGEN  time.   You  can
       specify  a  specific  unit number or a range of unit numbers.  In
       addition, you can  specify  ranges  for  the  page  and  priority
       limits.

|       You can use an alias name defined with the DEFINE  ALIAS  command
|       to reference a printer specification in this command.

       The defaults for the line printers at your installation  are  set
       by  your System Manager at software-installation time through the
       generation of the  <SYSTEM>n-CONFIG.CMD  file  (where  n  is  the
       TOPS-20  software  generation  number) and the <SYSTEM>LPFORM.INI
       file.  These defaults are usually referred to as NORMAL  in  most
       installations.

       The printer is also commonly referred to as the line printer.

       There are two basic types of line printers, those that  print  in
       uppercase  characters  only  (64  character print drum) and those
       that  print  in  both  uppercase  and  lowercase  characters  (96
       character print drum).


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET PRINTER nn arguments /switch<RET>
|
|       followed by the alias name

       or followed by the unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range of numbers:        n:m

       or optionally, one of these arguments:

                                     CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::



                                  3-147
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PRINTER)
                              (SET PRINTER)


       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
                                     or followed by: PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     DESTINATION quoted string
                                     FORMS-TYPE name
                                     LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
                                     PAGE-LIMITS pages
                                     PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                                                     n:m

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Arguments
  Arguments

|       aliasname          specifies  an  alias  name  defined  with  the
|                          DEFINE  ALIAS  command  to reference a printer
|                          specification.
|
       nn                 specifies a printer unit number.   The  number
                          is  usually  from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
                          your installation has  acquired  more  printer
                          devices.

       n:m                specifies a range of printer unit numbers.

       CLUSTER nn         specifies a printer, or range of printers, on
               n:m        a node within  a  cluster.   A  cluster  is  a
                          configuration   of   processors  with  similar
                          internal characteristics.  Each  processor  in
                          the  configuration  is  identified  by  a node
                          name.   For  example,  HUEY::,  DEWEY::,   and
                          LOUIE::   can  be three nodes within a cluster
                          of TOPS-20 processors.

       DQS queuename      specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a


                                  3-148
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PRINTER)
                              (SET PRINTER)


                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

            PORT "name"   specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

          SERVICE "name"  specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

            SERVER "name" specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

       NODE node-name::   specifies that the printer and  reader  device
                          for  a  node  within  the  system's network be
                          started.  The double colon (::) following  the
                          node  name  is  optional.  Before you start an
                          IBM node, you must define the node and set the
                          parameters  for the node.  Refer to the DEFINE


                                  3-149
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PRINTER)
                              (SET PRINTER)


                          and SET NODE commands in this chapter.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS node-name and cannot be an
                          alias.

       DESTINATION node"user password account"::device:[directory]

                          specifies  the  destination  to  receive   IBM
                          printer  output.   This  is valid only if node
                          has been defined as  an  SNA-WORKSTATION  with
                                                              __________
                          the  DEFINE  NODE command.  See the DECnet/SNA
                          _______ ______ ___ _____ ______ ___ __________
                          TOPS-20 Remote Job Entry User's and Operator's
                          _____
                          Guide  for  more information.  The DESTINATION
                          argument is valid only with the  specification
                          of unit number "nn" or a range of unit numbers
                          "n:m".

       FORMS-TYPE name    specifies the name  of  the  type  of  printer
                          forms.   Typically,  the normal paper form for
                          the printer is referred to  as  1-ply-wide  or
                          1-ply-narrow.   These can be abbreviated as 1W
                          or 1N, or can be given some other name by your
                          System  Manager.   Your  installation can have
                          different names for different  types  of  line
                          printer forms.  By setting the FORMS-TYPE, you
                          are specifying the type of forms in  the  line
                          printer.   The  FORMS-TYPE  argument  is valid
                          with the unit  number  argument  and  the  LAT
                          (PORT   or   SERVICE)  arguments.   FORMS-TYPE
                          cannot be used if the CLUSTER or DQS arguments
                          are specified.

       LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word

                          specifies what action, if any, should be taken
                          if a printer job that is currently printing on
                          the  unit  number  you  specify  exceeds   the
                          specified  limit  of output.  The limit is set
                          with  the  PAGE-LIMITS  argument.   There  are
                          three   possible  words  associated  with  the
                          LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument.  They are:

            ASK           specifies that you are asked what to do if the
                          printer  job exceeds the page limit on output.
                          You then have the option to continue or  abort
                          the printer job.


                                  3-150
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PRINTER)
                              (SET PRINTER)


            CANCEL        specifies that the print job is  automatically
                          canceled when the limit has been exceeded.

            IGNORE        specifies  that  the   print   job   continues
                          automatically  and  the  specified output page
                          limit is ignored.

       PAGE-LIMITS pages  specifies the maximum page limit  for  printed
                          output.   This  argument  can  also  specify a
                          range of page limits.  The page  limit  refers
                          to   the  number  of  output  pages  that  are
                          printed.  This command restricts the  size  of
                          jobs that are sent to the printer you specify.

       PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
                       n:m

                          specifies   the   priority   limits   (numeric
                          importance)  of  a  line printer or a range of
                          line printers at the  central  site  or  at  a
                          node.   The numeric value associated with this
                          argument  means   that   only   printer   jobs
                          submitted by users with the /PRIORITY:  switch
                          specifying the number (or range) you  set  for
                          the  line printer can execute on that printer.
                          The  numeric  value  for  the  PRIORITY-LIMITS
                          argument  can be from 1 to 63.  The higher the
                          number is, the higher the priority is.


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET PRINTER command to set the default  printer's
           forms  type  to  1-ply-wide  for  all  line  printers at your
           installation.  NORMAL has  been  previously  defined  in  the
           LPFORM.INI file as 1-ply-wide paper.

               ___ _______ ___ __________ ___________
           OPR>SET PRINTER 0:2 FORMS-TYPE NORMAL<RET>

           OPR>


                                  3-151
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SET PRINTER)
                              (SET PRINTER)


           13:10:10        Printer 0  --Set Accepted--

           13:10:11        Printer 1  --Set Accepted--

           13:10:12        Printer 2  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify   the   SET    PRINTER    command    to    set    the
           LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION  to IGNORE.  This means that all queued
           printer jobs that exceed their output page limit continue  to
           print and are not aborted.  In addition, there is no required
           operator action to take except  loading  paper  in  the  line
           printer.

               ___ _______ ___ _____________________ ___________
           OPR>SET PRINTER 0:1 LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION IGNORE<RET>
           OPR>
           15:43:17        Printer 0  --Set Accepted--

           15:43:18        Printer 1  --Set Accepted--
           OPR>

































                                  3-152
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET SCHEDULER)
                             (SET SCHEDULER)


  SET SCHEDULER - Setting System Performance
  SET SCHEDULER - Setting System Performance



  Function
  Function

       The SET SCHEDULER  command  changes  the  scheduling  scheme  (or
       allocation  of  system  resources) for batch jobs and timesharing
       jobs.

       Normally, if your installation is making use of the TOPS-20 class
       scheduling  of  jobs,  the  scheduling  classes are set up in the
       n-CONFIG.CMD file at system startup.  The SET  SCHEDULER  command
       allows  you  to  change these classes during timesharing, such as
       when first shift ends and second shift begins.

       You should refer to your  System  Manager  about  job  scheduling
       before you use this command with any of its available arguments.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET SCHEDULER argument /switch<RET>

       where argument can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-CLASS BACKGROUND
                                                 NONE
                                                 scheduler-class

                                     BIAS-CONTROL nn

                                     CLASS n nn

|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Arguments
  Arguments

       BATCH-CLASS        specifies that the class be  changed  for  all
                          batch   jobs  submitted  to  your  system  for
                          processing.   With  this  argument   you   can
                          specify BACKGROUND, NONE, or a scheduler-class
                          number.  To  check  the  current  batch  class
                          setting, give the SHOW SCHEDULER command.

            BACKGROUND    specifies that batch  jobs  for  a  particular
                          class  be  processed  in your system using the
                          CPU time that has not been  allocated  to  any


                                  3-153
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET SCHEDULER)
                             (SET SCHEDULER)


                          other class.

|                          If you are not using the class scheduler,  the
|                          BACKGROUND  argument  causes batch jobs to run
|                          in the lowest priority queue.

            NONE          specifies that batch  jobs  entered  into  the
                          system  be processed whenever CPU time becomes
                          available and is not assigned to a  particular
                          class  that has been allocated a percentage of
                          CPU time.

            scheduler-class

                          specifies that batch jobs be  processed  in  a
                          particular   class   number   that   has  been
                          allocated a certain percentage of CPU time.

       BIAS-CONTROL nn    specifies  that  the  allocation   of   system
                          resources   between   compute-bound  jobs  and
                          interactive jobs be changed.  The  "nn"  is  a
                          integer from 1 to 20 that determines which job
                          grouping  receives   the   higher   or   lower
                          priority.   To  allocate  a higher priority to
                          compute-bound jobs, set the integer in the  11
                          to   20   range  with  20  being  the  highest
                          priority.  To allocate a  higher  priority  to
                          interactive  jobs, set the integer in the 1 to
                          10 range with 1 being  the  highest  priority.
                          The  default  is set by your System Manager at
                          system  installation  time.   To   check   the
                          current  setting of the bias control, give the
                          SHOW SCHEDULER command.

       CLASS n nn         specifies the percentage of  CPU  time  for  a
                          particular   job   class   be   changed.   The
                          percentage (nn) cannot exceed a 100% total for
                          all  classes  in the system.  The class number
                          (n) can be from 0 to 7.  To check the  current
                          settings  of  the classes in your system, give
                          the SHOW SCHEDULER command.

  Switch
  Switch

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all


                                  3-154
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET SCHEDULER)
                             (SET SCHEDULER)


|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You change the batch class and percentage at the end of first
           shift  to  allow  for  more CPU time for production jobs that
           process in the batch mode.

               ___ _________ ___________ ______
           OPR>SET SCHEDULER BATCH-CLASS 1<RET>
           OPR>
           15:31:09        --Scheduler Setting Modified--
               ___ _________ _____ _ _______
           OPR>SET SCHEDULER CLASS 1 60<RET>
           OPR>
           15:31:45        --Scheduler Setting Modified--
           OPR>

       2.  You  set  the  scheduler  bias-control   to   15   to   allow
           compute-bound  (production)  jobs  a  greater  allocation  of
           system resources than interactive jobs.

               ___ _________ ____________ _______
           OPR>SET SCHEDULER BIAS-CONTROL 15<RET>
           OPR>
           16:30:09        --Scheduler Bias set to 15--
           OPR>




























                                  3-155
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET STRUCTURE)
                             (SET STRUCTURE)


  SET STRUCTURE - Setting Structure Parameters
  SET STRUCTURE - Setting Structure Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET STRUCTURE command enters a new structure or  changes  the
       parameters of an existing structure.

       The SET STRUCTURE command enters the parameters  of  a  structure
       into  the  system's structure data base.  The structure data base
       contains a catalog of all the system's mountable  structures  and
       their   parameters.    Whenever   a  structure  is  mounted,  the
       parameters  in  the  structure  data  base  take  effect.   These
       parameters do not change if the system crashes or is shut down.

       You can display the contents of the structure data base with  the
       SHOW STATUS STRUCTURE command.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SET STRUCTURE keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword is the structure's name:

                                     structure-name:

       and argument must be one of the following:

                                     ACKNOWLEDGED
                                     AVAILABLE
                                     DOMESTIC
                                     DUMPABLE
                                     EXCLUSIVE
                                     FOREIGN
                                     IGNORED
                                     NODUMPABLE
                                     REGULATED
                                     SHARED
                                     UNAVAILABLE
                                     UNREGULATED
|
|       optionally followed by the switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       structure-name:    specifies the alias for  the  structure.   The


                                  3-156
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET STRUCTURE)
                             (SET STRUCTURE)


                          alias  is  the  mounted  structure-name.   The
                          structure-name must be from 1 to 6  characters
                          in  length  and  must  include the colon.  The
                          alias is normally the  same  as  the  physical
                          identification  unless  a  privileged user has
                          specified a different alias.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       ACKNOWLEDGED       specifies that  structure  attributes  can  be
                          changed  only  with the SET STRUCTURE command.
                          If a structure attribute is  changed  by  some
                          other means, the Mountable D.

                          The opposite state of ACKNOWLEDGED is IGNORED.
                          When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                          structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                          ACKNOWLEDGED.

       AVAILABLE          specifies that the structure is  available  so
                          that users can MOUNT the structure.

                          The   opposite   state   of    AVAILABLE    is
                          UNAVAILABLE.   When a new structure is entered
                          into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                          state is AVAILABLE.

       DOMESTIC           specifies that the structure with its alias is
                          to  be DOMESTIC.  A user can ACCESS or CONNECT
                          to  his  directory  on  a  DOMESTIC  structure
                          without giving a password.

                          The opposite state  of  DOMESTIC  is  FOREIGN.
                          When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                          structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                          FOREIGN.

       DUMPABLE           specifies  to  allow  continuable  dumps  when
                          Dump-On-BUGCHK   is  enabled.   Dump-On-BUGCHK
                          (DOB) allows the system to take a  dump  at  a
                          time  specified by the System Manager, without
                          discontinuing system process  time.   This  is
                          referred  to  as  a  "continuable"  dump.  The
                          structure must be up  and  spinning,  but  the
                          structure  need not be MOUNTed.  The structure
                          must have a valid <SYSTEM>DUMP.EXE  file.   If
                          this  file  does  not exist or is invalid, the
                          structure is ignored when a  continuable  dump
                          occurs.



                                  3-157
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET STRUCTURE)
                             (SET STRUCTURE)


                          This SET command makes the structure  dumpable
                          regardless  of  any  system  reloads,  because
                          GALAXY  saves  the  dumpable  status  of   the
                          structure.

       EXCLUSIVE          specifies  that  the  structure   in   a   CFS
                          configuration  is  available  only to users on
                          the system that set the structure EXCLUSIVE.

                          The opposite state  of  EXCLUSIVE  is  SHARED.
                          When  a  new structure is mounted, its default
                          state is SHARED.  A structure set EXCLUSIVE on
                          one  CFS  system  should be set UNAVAILABLE on
                          all other systems in the CFS configuration.

       FOREIGN            specifies the structure with the alias  to  be
                          FOREIGN.   A  user must always give a password
                          to ACCESS or  CONNECT  to  a  directory  on  a
                          FOREIGN structure.

                          The opposite state  of  FOREIGN  is  DOMESTIC.
                          When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                          structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                          FOREIGN.   The  primary  public  structure  is
                          always  DOMESTIC.   An  attempt  to  set  this
                          structure FOREIGN is ignored by the system.

       IGNORED            specifies that the structure is not under  the
                          control  of  the  Mountable  Device Allocator.
                          Only privileged  users  can  change  structure
                          attributes  and  mount the structure, and only
                          by using direct monitor calls.

                          While the structure is in  an  IGNORED  state,
                          SET STRUCTURE commands are accepted but do not
                          take  effect  until  the  structure   is   set
                          ACKNOWLEDGED.   Also,  a  structure  cannot be
                          DISMOUNTED  through   the   mountable   device
                          allocator unless it is set ACKNOWLEDGED.

                          If the structure has already been MOUNTed by a
                          user  when the structure is set IGNORED, users
                          can continue to MOUNT the structure.   If  the
                          structure  is  not  MOUNTed  when  it  is  set
                          IGNORED, users cannot MOUNT the structure.

                          The opposite state of IGNORED is ACKNOWLEDGED.
                          When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                          structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                          ACKNOWLEDGED.



                                  3-158
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET STRUCTURE)
                             (SET STRUCTURE)


       NONDUMPABLE        specifies to disallow continuable  dumps  when
                          Dump-On-BUGCHK   is  enabled.   Refer  to  the
                          DUMPABLE argument for a  description  of  this
                          feature.

       REGULATED          specifies that the  structure  has  accounting
                          and that prior incrementing of the mount count
                          is required to use the structure.

                          The   opposite   state   of    REGULATED    is
                          UNREGULATED.   When a new structure is entered
                          into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                          state   is   REGULATED.   The  primary  public
                          structure is always UNREGULATED.   An  attempt
                          to  set this structure REGULATED is ignored by
                          the system.

       SHARED             specifies  that  the  structure   in   a   CFS
                          configuration  is  available  to  users on any
                          system.

                          The opposite state  of  SHARED  is  EXCLUSIVE.
                          When  a  new  structure  is  entered  into the
                          structure data  base,  its  default  state  is
                          SHARED.

       UNAVAILABLE        specifies  that  the   structure   cannot   be
                          mounted,  but allows those users who currently
                          have the structure  mounted  to  finish  their
                          work on it.

                          The   opposite   state   of   UNAVAILABLE   is
                          AVAILABLE.   When  a  new structure is entered
                          into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                          state is AVAILABLE.

       UNREGULATED        specifies that the  structure  does  not  have
                          accounting  and that prior incrementing of the
                          mount  count  is  not  required  to  use  this
                          structure.

                          The   opposite   state   of   UNREGULATED   is
                          REGULATED.   When  a  new structure is entered
                          into the  structure  data  base,  its  default
                          state is REGULATED.








                                  3-159
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET STRUCTURE)
                             (SET STRUCTURE)


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SET STRUCTURE command to set structure DSKA1:  as
           unavailable for any MOUNT requests from users.

               ___ _________ ______ ________________
           OPR>SET STRUCTURE DSKA1: UNAVAILABLE<RET>
           OPR>
           15:27:03          -- Set Structure Command --
                           Structure DSKA1: set UNAVAILABLE
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET STRUCTURE command to  prevent  the  structure
           TEST:  from being mounted by OPR/ORION.

               ___ _________ _____ ____________
           OPR>SET STRUCTURE TEST: IGNORED<RET>
           OPR>
           10:45:40          -- Set Structure Command --
                           Structure is currently set IGNORED.
                           Attributes will be applied when
                           structure is set to ACKNOWLEDGED.
                           Structure PACK: set IGNORED
           OPR>

           Later, to allow the structure to be mounted by OPR/ORION:

               ___ _________ _____ _________________
           OPR>SET STRUCTURE TEST: ACKNOWLEDGED<RET>
           OPR>
           15:26:43          --Set Structure Command --
                           Structure TEST: set ACKNOWLEDGED
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the SET STRUCTURE command to set structure MOON:   as
           FOREIGN.

               ___ _________ _____ ____________
           OPR>SET STRUCTURE MOON: FOREIGN<RET>
           OPR>
           15:35:42          -- Set Structure Command --
                           Structure MOON: set FOREIGN
           OPR>


                                  3-160
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


  SET TAPE-DRIVE - Setting Tape-Drive Parameters
  SET TAPE-DRIVE - Setting Tape-Drive Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The SET TAPE-DRIVE command sets the availability  characteristics
       of a particular tape-drive device.  With the use of this command,
       you can allow or disallow  users  from  requesting  tapes  to  be
       mounted  on  the  tape  drives.   In addition, you can initialize
       tapes with the SET TAPE-DRIVE  command.   You  must  specify  the
       logical  tape-drive  name,  and  either  the  keyword  AVAILABLE,
       INITIALIZE, or UNAVAILABLE.

  Format
  Format

       OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn: argument /switch<RET>

       where MTAn: is the logical tape-drive name

       followed by one of these arguments:

                                     AVAILABLE
                                     INITIALIZE
                                     UNAVAILABLE

       the INITIALIZE keyword has the following switches:

|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                     /COUNT:nn
                                     /DENSITY:nn
                                     /INCREMENT:nn
                                     /LABEL-TYPE:type
                                     /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION:YES
                                                          NO
                                     /OWNER:name
                                     /PROTECTION:nnnnnn
                                     /TAPE-DISPOSITION:condition
                                     /VOLUME-ID:volid


  Keyword
  Keyword

       MTAn:              specifies the  logical  tape-drive  name;  the
                          colon  must be included.  The tape-drive name:
                          is in the format of  MTAn:,  where  n  is  the
                          tape-drive  number.   An  example of a logical
                          tape-drive name is MTA0:   for  Magnetic  Tape
                          Drive 0.




                                  3-161
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


  Arguments
  Arguments

       AVAILABLE          specifies that this particular tape drive  can
                          be  used  to satisfy user tape mount requests.
                          This  argument  cancels  the  effect  of   the
                          UNAVAILABLE  argument.   Once  this command is
                          given, the tape drive remains AVAILABLE  until
                          it is set UNAVAILABLE.

       INITIALIZE         specifies that the tape drive  is  unavailable
                          for  user mount requests and that the drive is
                          being used by  you  to  initialize  tapes.   A
                          labeled  tape  is initialized when you write a
                          volume identification at the beginning of  the
                          tape.   An  unlabeled tape is initialized when
                          you write a record of 80  null  characters  at
                          the beginning of the tape.  When the specified
                          number of tapes  have  been  INITIALIZEd,  the
                          tape drive automatically becomes available for
                          user mount requests.  You specify  the  number
                          of  tapes  to  be initialized with the /COUNT:
                          switch.

       UNAVAILABLE        specifies  that  this  particular  tape  drive
                          cannot  be  used  to  satisfy  user tape mount
                          requests.  This argument cancels the effect of
                          the   AVAILABLE  argument.   If  the  user  is
                          currently using a tape on this tape drive, the
                          tape  drive becomes unavailable after the user
                          completes his work.  If the system crashes  or
                          is  shutdown, the command SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn:
                          UNAVAILABLE remains in effect after the system
                          is in operation again.

                                               NOTE

                              Drives that are set UNAVAILABLE can be
                              ASSIGNed  by  user  jobs.   This could
                              pose a security problem, as  no  label
                              processing    or    verification    is
                              performed by the system when  using  a
                              tape on an UNAVAILABLE drive.

                          When you specify UNAVAILABLE, you can enter  a
                          single-  or multiple-line reason and terminate
                          with a carriage return, or you  can  terminate
                          immediately  with  a carriage return after the
                          UNAVAILABLE  keyword  and  OPR  responds  with
                          ENTER  TEXT  AND  TERMINATE WITH ^Z.  You then
                          enter as many lines of text for  a  reason  as
                          you  need.   When  you  press CTRL/Z, the OPR>


                                  3-162
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


                          prompt returns and your report is logged  into
                          the ERROR.SYS file.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /COUNT:nn          specifies the  number  (nn)  of  tapes  to  be
                          initialized.    The   /COUNT:    switch,  when
                          specified,   provides    a    mechanism    for
                          initialization of multiple tapes with the same
                          attributes.  Each tape prompts you with a WTOR
                          message  for the volume identification.  After
                          initialization,  the  tape  is   automatically
                          unloaded and the tape drive is ready to accept
                          the next tape to  initialize.   When  as  many
                          tapes as specified by the /COUNT:  switch have
                          been initialized, the tape  drive  returns  to
                          the AVAILABLE state.

       /DENSITY:nn        specifies the BPI (bits-per-inch)  density  of
                          the  tapes to be initialized.  The number (nn)
                          can be 200, 556, 800, 1600, or 6250.   If  you
                          do  not  specify  the  /DENSITY:   switch, the
                          density defaults to 1600 BPI.

       /INCREMENT:nn      specifies the numeric value (nn) by  which  to
                          increment  the  tape  volumes.  This switch is
                          ignored  unless  you  also  use  the   /COUNT:
                          switch    and   specify   a   numeric   volume
                          identification (see the /VOLID:  switch)  that
                          contains  no  leading  zeros.   If  you do not
                          include this switch but do specify  a  numeric
                          volume identification that contains no leading
                          zeros, the default numeric value is 1.

       /LABEL-TYPE:type   specifies the type of label to be  written  on
                          the  tape.   The  type  can  be  ANSI, EBCDIC,
                          TOPS-20, or UNLABELED.  If you do not  specify
                          the   /LABEL-TYPE:   switch,  the  default  is
                          TOPS-20.




                                  3-163
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


       /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION: (YES or NO)

                          specifies whether to check for expiration date
                          of  the  data  on the tape.  If you specify NO
                          and attempt to re-initialize  a  labeled  tape
                          whose  first  file  is not expired, the system
                          issues  an  error   message   and   does   not
                          re-initialize  the  tape.  If you specify YES,
                          each tape is  re-initialized  unconditionally.
                          If  you  are initializing brand new tapes, you
                          should specify YES to prevent the  tape  drive
                          from  "running away" when MOUNTR tries to read
                          a label from the tape.  If you do not  specify
                          this switch, the default is NO.

       /OWNER:name        specifies the name of the owner of the tape(s)
                          to  be  initialized.  This switch affects only
                          to TOPS-20 label types.  If you do not specify
                          the  /OWNER:   switch, the tape is initialized
                          as a scratch tape.

       /PROTECTION:nnnnnn

                          specifies  a  6-digit  octal  number  as   the
                          protection  number of the tape.  The number is
                          usually from 000000 (so that no  one  can  use
                          the tape) through 777777 (where anyone can use
                          the  tape).   If  you  do  not   specify   the
                          /PROTECTION:   switch,  the default is 777777.
                          This switch is ignored if the  label  type  is
                          ANSI, EBCDIC, or UNLABELED.

       /TAPE-DISPOSITION:condition

                          specifies what is to be done to the tape after
                          it  is  initialized.   The  condition  can  be
                          either HOLD or UNLOAD.  If you  specify  HOLD,
                          the  tape  is initialized and is not unloaded.
                          A user requesting the tape can use it  without
                          your  having  to  reload  it.   If you specify
                          UNLOAD,  the  tape  is  initialized   and   is
                          unloaded  from the tape drive.  The default is
                          UNLOAD.   If  a  value  greater  than   1   is
                          specified   by   the   /COUNT:    switch,  the
                          /TAPE-DISPOSITION:   switch  is  ignored   and
                          UNLOAD is assumed.

       /VOLUME-ID:volid   specifies  a  volume  identification  for  the
                          tape.    The   volid  must  be  from  1  to  6
                          characters.   The  volid  must  contain   only
                          alphanumeric   characters.    If   the   volid


                                  3-164
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


                          contains  leading  zeros  it   is   considered
                          nonnumeric,  and  the  /INCREMENT:   switch is
                          ignored.  This switch is not necessary if  the
                          tape  is  being  initialized  as  an unlabeled
                          tape.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       If you set a tape drive to be UNAVAILABLE before you set the tape
       drive to INITIALIZE, the following error message appears:

       hh:mm:ss        --Tape Drive MTAn: is Not Under Operator
       Control--

       The SET TAPE-DRIVE command to INITIALIZE must be given for a tape
       drive  that  is  AVAILABLE.  When the initialization is complete,
       the tape drive is left AVAILABLE.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  A user (J.JONES) has requested a tape mount of an  ANSI  tape
           with  a volid of TAPE01 and has requested that you initialize
           the tape first.  The volume is initialized with  ANSI  labels
           and  a volid of TAPE01.  The system default for density (1600
           BPI) is used.  When the tape is mounted  on  the  drive,  the
           tape  is  initialized and the drive then becomes available to
           the  user  (/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD).   AVR  takes  over   and
           satisfies the mount request for TAPE01.

           OPR>              --Tape Mount Request # 31--
           12:11:34        Mount ANSI volume TAPE01, 9-track,
                           1600 BPI, WRITE-ENABLED
                           User J. JONES, Job 39, Terminal 13
                           User's remark: PLEASE INITIALIZE TAPE FIRST
               ___ __________ _____ __________ ______________________
           OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI-<RET>
           ____________________________________________
           /TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD/VOLUME-ID:TAPE01<RET>
           OPR>
           12:12:01          --Mount Tape To Be Initialized--
                           Mount tape volume TAPE01 for initialization
           on MTA3:
           OPR>

           You now load the tape on drive MTA3:.  When the  initializing
           is completed, OPR types the following message:

           12:13:14        --MTA3: Volume TAPE01 Initialized--
                           Label type: ANSI        Density: 1600
           OPR>
           12:13:19          --INITIALIZE Completed--


                                  3-165
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)
                             (SET TAPE-DRIVE)


                           MTA3: available for user tape requests
           OPR>
           12:13:30          --MTA3: Volume TAPE01, ANSI labeled tape
           mounted--
           OPR>
           12:13:33          --MTA3: Given to Request 31--
                           Volume TAPE01 now in use by
                           User J.JONES, Job 39, Terminal 13
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to set  tape  drive  MTA1:
           to  be unavailable.  Any user job currently using this device
           is allowed to finish his work and dismount  the  tape  before
           the device becomes unavailable.

               ___ __________ _____ ________________
           OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA1: UNAVAILABLE<RET>
           Enter Text and Terminate with ^Z
           ____ _____ __ ______ __ _____ _______
           TAPE DRIVE IS NEEDED BY FIELD SERVICE^Z
                                                 ^
                                                 |
                                              <CTRL/Z>
           OPR>
           10:23:56          --Tape Drive Set Unavailable--
                           MTA1: set unavailable for assignment by
           MOUNTR
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to make tape  drive  MTA3:
           available for tape mounts.

               ___ __________ _____ ______________
           OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: AVAILABLE<RET>
           OPR>
           12:02:24          --Tape Drive Set Available--
                           MTA3: set available for assignment by MOUNTR
           OPR>


















                                  3-166
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (SHOW)
                                  (SHOW)


  SHOW - Displaying System Information
  SHOW - Displaying System Information



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW command shows (or displays) information from the system.
       The  SHOW  command  does not alter or change any jobs, queues, or
       devices.  The SHOW command can be issued before a particular job,
       queue,  or  device  has  been  changed; and then it can be issued
       after the change to check to see if  the  particular  change  was
       satisfactory.

       Because the SHOW command is complex,  having  multiple  keywords,
       subkeywords,  parameters, switches, and numeric values, each SHOW
       keyword command is described in the same format as an  individual
       OPR command.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW  keyword<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

|                              ALIAS
|                              BROADCAST-MESSAGES
                              CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS
                              CONFIGURATION
                              CONTROL-FILE
                              MESSAGES
                              OPERATORS
                              PARAMETERS
                              QUEUES
                              ROUTE-TABLE
                              SCHEDULER
                              STATUS
                              TIME

       followed by one or more of the keywords, arguments, switches, and
       values described in the SHOW command subsections.












                                  3-167
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


  SHOW ALIAS - Displaying Printer Alias Names
|  SHOW ALIAS - Displaying Printer Alias Names
|
|
|
  Function
|  Function
|
|       The  SHOW  ALIAS  command   displays   the   alias   to   printer
|       specification mappings that were previously defined.
|
|
  Format
|  Format
|
|       OPR>SHOW ALIAS keyword argument /switch<RET>
|
|  where keyword can be one of the following:
|
|                                CLUSTER
|                                DQS
|                                LAT
|                                LOCAL
|
|  followed by a unit number:
|
|                                nn
|
|  or a range:                   n:m
|
|  followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                /NODE:node-name
|
|  or
|                                CLUSTER nn
|                                        n:m
|  followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|
|  or                            DQS queuename
|  followed by:                  NODE node-name::
|
|  or                            LAT
|  followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
|                                SERVER "name"
|  or followed by:               PORT "name"
|                                SERVER "name"
|
|  followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|
  Arguments
|  Arguments


                                  3-168
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


|       CLUSTER nn         specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
|                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
|                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
|                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
|                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
|                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
|                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
|                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
|                          processors.
|
|                 NODE node-name::
|
|                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
|                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
|                          following the node name is not needed.
|
|                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
|                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
|                          be the local node or an alias.
|
|            DQS queuename
|
|                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
|                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
|                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
|                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
|                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
|                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
|                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
|                          and dollar signs.
|
|                 NODE node-name::
|
|                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
|                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
|                          following the node name is not needed.
|
|                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
|                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
|                          alias.
|
|            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
|                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
|                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
|                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
|                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
|                          between your system, running LAT software, and
|                          the resource printer terminal.
|
|                          You     cannot     use      the      following


                                  3-169
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


|                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:
|
|                                    SERVICE name only
|                                    SERVER name only
|                                    PORT name only
|                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
|                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names
|
|                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
|                          about LAT communications.
|
|                 PORT "name"
|
|                          specifies the communication path  between  the
|                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
|                          access point that the node represents  to  the
|                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
|                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
|                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
|                          and dollar signs.
|
|                 SERVICE "name"
|
|                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
|                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
|                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
|                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
|                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
|                          signs.
|
|                 SERVER "name"
|
|                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
|                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
|                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
|                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
|                          characters in length.
|
|            LOCAL         specifies  to   display   the   line   printer
|                          parameters for your local logged-in system.
|
|       nn                 specifies  a  numeric  value  representing   a
|                          batch-stream  number  or a device unit number.
|                          The number is usually from 0 to 5, but can  be
|                          larger   if  your  installation  has  acquired
|                          additional devices.
|
|       n:m                specifies a range of unit numbers.
|
|



                                  3-170
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
|                          cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
|                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
|                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
|                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
|                          cluster.
|
|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
|                          station.   The double colon (::) following the
|                          node name is optional.
|
|
  Examples
|  Examples
|
|
|       1.  Specify the SHOW ALIAS command to display the alias names for
|           CLUSTER, DQS, and LAT printer specifications.
|
               ____ __________
|           OPR>SHOW ALIAS<RET>
|           OPR>
|           14:45:37       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|
|           Cluster printers
|             Alias     Unit   Node
|             ------    ----  ------
|              RONCO       0   RONCO
|
|           DQS printers
|             Alias              DQS queue name          Node
|             ------    ------------------------------  ------
|             NATASH                         TOPS$LN03   GALLO
|              XEROX                           SI$8700  JUNIPR
|               PLVD                          LVD$LN03     MED
|              XPLOT                         SI$87PLOT  MRSVAX
|             BENSON                         SI$BENSON  MRSVAX
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server
|             ------    ----------------    ------
|              ROCKY         24004_LN03A      LAT1
|              BULLW         24004_LN03B     LAT70
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71
|
|       2.  Specify the SHOW ALIAS command with the /CLUSTER-NODE  switch
|           to  display  which printer specifications on all the nodes in
|           the cluster use the alias name BORIS.



                                  3-171
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW ALIAS)
|                               (SHOW ALIAS)


               ___ _____ _____ ______________ ______
|           OPR>SHO ALIAS BORIS /CLUSTER-NODE: *<RET>
|
|           14:46:04       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server
|             ------    ----------------    ------
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71
|           OPR>
|           14:46:04  Received message from RONCO::
|           14:45:58       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server
|             ------    ----------------    ------
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71
|
|           14:46:05  Received message from CLOYD::
|           14:45:53       -- Alias Printer Mappings --
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias        Port name        Server
|             ------    ----------------    ------
|              BORIS                LN03     LAT71
|




























                                  3-172
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                        (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)
|                        (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)


  SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES - Displaying Status of Remote Broadcasting  of
|  SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES - Displaying Status of Remote Broadcasting  of
  ORION Messages
|  ORION Messages
|
|
|
  Function
|  Function
|
|       The SHOW  BROADCAST-MESSAGES  command  displays  whether  or  not
|       remote  broadcasting of ORION messages are enabled or disabled to
|       a particular node or nodes.
|
|
  Format
|  Format
|
|       OPR>SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES keyword argument /switch<RET>
|
|       where keyword is the optional keyword NODE
|
|       followed by either of the arguments:
|
|                                     cluster-node-name
|                                     *
|
|       followed optionally by the  switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|
  Keyword
|  Keyword
|
|       NODE               specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
|                          cluster  to  display  or  an  asterisk  (*) to
|                          display all nodes in the cluster.
|
  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
|                          cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
|                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
|                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
|                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
|                          cluster.
|
|
  Example
|  Example
|
|       OPR>SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES<RET>
|
|       OPR>


                                  3-173
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                        (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)
|                        (SHOW BROADCAST-MESSAGES)


|       17:01:54           -- Broadcast Messages --
|
|                CLOYD  GIDNEY  Message type
|               ------  ------  ------------
|                Ena     Ena   BATCH-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   MOUNT-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   PLOTTER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   PRINTER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   READER-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   USER-MESSAGES
|
|                Ena     Ena   BUGCHK-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   BUGINF-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   SYSTEM-MESSAGES
|
|                Ena     Ena   LCP-MESSAGES
|                Ena     Ena   NCP-MESSAGES






























                                  3-174
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                    (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)
                    (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)


  SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS - Displaying Cluster Link Status
  SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS - Displaying Cluster Link Status



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW  CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS  command  displays  NEBULA's
       DECnet connections to remote NEBULAs in the cluster.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS /switch<RET>

       where switch can be:          /NODE:node-name::
                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

                          If you do  not  specify  the  /NODE:   switch,
                          NEBULA's  link  status to every remote node in
                          the cluster is displayed.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
                          cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.


  Example
  Example

       You are logged in to GIDNEY and  you  wish  to  display  NEBULA's
       DECnet link status to the remote NEBULAs in the cluster.

           ____ _______________________________
       OPR>SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS<RET>
       OPR>
       19:28:26            -- Cluster Status --

                  Node      Sender Link Status  Listener Link Status
                 ------     ------------------  --------------------
                 THEP       Connected           Connected
                 CLOYD      Connected           Connected


                                  3-175
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                    (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)
                    (SHOW CLUSTER-GALAXY-LINK-STATUS)


                 RONCO      Connected           Connected




















































                                  3-176
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SHOW CONFIGURATION)
                           (SHOW CONFIGURATION)


  SHOW CONFIGURATION - Displaying Disk Drive Configuration
  SHOW CONFIGURATION - Displaying Disk Drive Configuration



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW CONFIGURATION command displays information that uniquely
       identifies disk drives.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW CONFIGURATION (of) keyword /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        DISK-DRIVE

       followed by one of these switches:

                                     /ALL
                                     /FREE
                                     /MOUNTED

       and, optionally the switch:

                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       DISK-DRIVE         specifies to display  information  about  disk
                          drives.


  Switches
  Switches

       /ALL               specifies  that  both  free  disk  drives  and
                          mounted disk drives be displayed.  This switch
                          is the default.

       /FREE              specifies that only those disk drives that are
                          available for structure mounts be displayed.

       /MOUNTED           specifies that only those disk drives that are
                          currently   mounted   and  being  accessed  be
                          displayed.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  TOPS-20
                          cluster  where  the command is processed.  The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name


                                  3-177
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SHOW CONFIGURATION)
                           (SHOW CONFIGURATION)


                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.


  Example
  Example

       You are logged in on cluster  node  CLOYD  and  wish  to  display
       configuration  information  about  mounted disk drives on cluster
       node GIDNEY.

           ____ _____________ __________ ________ ______
       OPR>SHOW CONFIGURATION DISK-DRIVE /MOUNTED -<RET>
       _________________________
       /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
       OPR>
       09:12:39  Received message from GIDNEY::
       09:12:32             -- Disk Drive Configuration --

                            MOUNTED DRIVES

             Chan-Cont                        Mount
        Type   Drive    Drive Serial Number   Status   Name
        ---- --------- ---------------------  -------  ------------
        RP06 0,  ,0    17170432  1156         Mounted  GIDNEY (1/1)
       *RP07 2,  ,0    17235968  8965         Mounted  CHOP   (1/1)
       *RP07 2,  ,2    17235968  10337        Mounted  REL7   (1/1)
       *RP07 2,  ,3    17235968  14402        Mounted  SLICE  (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,2    33882112  17697        Mounted  WORK   (2/2)
        RA81 7,01,11   33882112  4005         Mounted  WHITE  (1/1)
        RA81 7,01,12   33882112  3029         Mounted  LINK   (1/1)
        RA81 7,01,14   33882112  4258         Mounted  SNARK  (1/2)
        RA81 7,01,19   33882112  18036        Mounted  MOOSE  (1/1)
        RA81 7,01,21   33882112  4201         Mounted  WORK   (1/2)
        RA81 7,01,22   33882112  3411         Mounted  MORDOR (1/1)
        RP06 7,05,1    17170432  1368         Mounted  THEP   (1/1)
        RP06 7,06,1    17170432  370          Mounted  CLOYD  (1/1)
        RA81 7,01,8    33882112  18289        Mounted  MKT    (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,17   33882112  2463         Mounted  GREEN  (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,20   33882112  18035        Mounted  RIP    (1/1)
        RA60 7,00,16   33816576  1023         Mounted  DBMS20 (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,18   33882112  17878        Mounted  IGUANA (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,36   33882112  18053        Mounted  GALAXY (1/1)
        RA81 7,01,4    33882112  2003         Mounted  FTN    (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,15   33882112  4002         Mounted  SNARK  (2/2)
        RA81 7,00,13   33882112  3675         Mounted  SOFT   (1/1)
        RA81 7,01,0    33882112  17610        Mounted  COMMON (1/1)
       *RP06 1,  ,2    17170432  388          Mounted  APATCH (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,3    33882112  2014         Mounted  EXODUS (1/1)
        RA60 7,00,7    33816576  14375        Mounted  ROCKET (1/1)
       *RP06 1,  ,4    17170432  263          Mounted  JAWS   (1/1)
       *RP06 1,  ,6    17170432  1874         Mounted  GALKL  (1/1)
        RP07 7,06,546  17235968  9501         Mounted  DICE   (1/1)


                                  3-178
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SHOW CONFIGURATION)
                           (SHOW CONFIGURATION)


        RP06 1,  ,3    17170432  1317         Mounted  B20    (1/1)
        RA81 7,02,6    33882112  4009         Mounted  RANDOM (1/1)

       09:12:39  Received message from GIDNEY::
       09:12:32             -- Disk Drive Configuration --

        RA81 7,03,7    33882112  4255         Mounted  MOLD   (1/1)
        RA81 7,02,1    33882112  4274         Mounted  PUBLIC (1/1)
        RA81 7,00,9    33882112  18264        Mounted  GUMBY  (1/1)
        RA81 7,03,11   33882112  18466        Mounted  POKEY  (1/1)
        RA81 7,03,12   33882112  18293        Mounted  DEMO   (1/1)
        RP06 7,11,1    17170432  8192         Mounted  RONCO  (1/1)
        RP06 7,11,2    17170432  775          Mounted  RDUMP  (1/1)
        RA60 7,02,10   33816576  12148        Mounted  DML60  (1/1)
             NOTE: Channel 7 indicates CI channel
             (*) indicates potential external port

       OPR>



































                                  3-179
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)
                           (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)


  SHOW CONTROL-FILE - Displaying Batch Control Files
  SHOW CONTROL-FILE - Displaying Batch Control Files



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW CONTROL-FILE command displays  the  control  file  of  a
       batch  job  that is processing in a particular batch stream.  The
       only keyword for this command is  BATCH-STREAM  followed  by  the
       stream number.  You must specify the BATCH-STREAM keyword.

       Some of the advantages of this command is that it enables you  to
       display  a  particular stream while the job is processing, to see
       any possible problems that might come about due to  an  incorrect
       command, and to check whether there are any commands that require
       an operator action of some kind.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE  keyword  nn  /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be the following:     BATCH-STREAM

       followed by a stream number:             nn

       and, optionally, the switch:             /LINES:number


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream.

       nn                 specifies  the  stream  number  of  the  batch
                          stream  to  be  displayed  by  OPR.   You must
                          specify this stream number.


  Switch
  Switch

       /LINES:number      specifies  the  number  of  lines   you   want
                          displayed  of  the  control  file in the batch
                          stream.  If you do  not  specify  the  /LINES:
                          switch, the default is ten lines.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display  four  lines
           of a control file in batch stream 2.



                                  3-180
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                           (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)
                           (SHOW CONTROL-FILE)


               ____ ____________ ____________ ______________
           OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 2/LINES:4<RET>
           OPR>
           16:42:20    Batch-Stream 2   JOB #3   --SHOW-CONTROL-FILE--
                       Job MYFILE Req #121 for ADLEY

                       @MOUNT TAPE REEL1:
                       @COMPILE TEST2/FORTRAN
                       @EXECUTE
                       @DISMOUNT TAPE REEL1:

           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display ten lines in
           batch stream 0.

               ____ ____________ ____________ ______
           OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 0<RET>
           OPR>
           13:20:30    Batch-Stream 0   JOB #12   --SHOW-CONTROL-FILE--
                       Job EDIT01 Req #211 for LATTA

                       *F.PG^[
                       *M.
                       *D.
                       *E
                       @IF (ERROR) @GOTO DEL1
                       @EDIT
                       *F.PG^[
                       *M.
                       *D.
                       *E

           OPR>





















                                  3-181
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW MESSAGES)
                             (SHOW MESSAGES)


  SHOW MESSAGES - Displaying Outstanding Messages
  SHOW MESSAGES - Displaying Outstanding Messages



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW MESSAGES command displays any outstanding  messages  for
       which  you  must  perform an action and/or reply with the RESPOND
       command.

       With the SHOW MESSAGES command, you can  specify  an  outstanding
       message number or a node.  If you do not specify either a message
       number or a node, OPR responds with all outstanding messages that
       you are enabled to receive.

       Use the RESPOND command to respond  to  any  outstanding  message
       displayed by this SHOW command.  (Refer to the description of the
       RESPOND command in this chapter.)


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW MESSAGES nnnn /switch<RET>

       where, optionally, the message number is:

                                     nnnn

       or, optionally, the switch:   /NODE:node-name::

       or the switch:                /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keyword
  Keyword

       nnnn               specifies  the  outstanding  message   number.
                          Valid  message  numbers  can  range  from 0 to
                          9999.  If you do not specify a message number,
                          all  outstanding  messages with their sequence
                          numbers, if any, are displayed.


  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

                          If you do not specify the /NODE:  switch,  all
                          outstanding   messages   with  their  sequence
                          numbers, if any, are displayed, provided  that


                                  3-182
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW MESSAGES)
                             (SHOW MESSAGES)


                          you have enabled the messages to appear at the
                          OPR terminal.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHOW MESSAGES command to display all  outstanding
           messages  with  their  sequence  numbers.  You are enabled to
           receive the output display of all messages.

               ____ _____________
           OPR>SHOW MESSAGES<RET>
           OPR>          **  MESSAGES REQUIRING OPERATOR ACTION  **


           15:25:35  <2>   Printer 1     JOB #13
                           LPTSPL: Please load forms type 'NARROW'
                           Respond 'CONTINUE' when ready.

           17:23:40  <15>  Card-Punch 0    JOB #45
                           SPROUT: Please load 5081's
                           RESPOND GO when ready.

           23:20:50  <31>  Batch-stream 2   JOB #23
                           BATCON: Please mount the PAYROLL-MASTER-TAPE.
                           RESPOND GO when ready.

           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SHOW MESSAGES command to display  an  outstanding
           message with the message number 47.

               ____ ________ _______
           OPR>SHOW MESSAGES 47<RET>
           OPR>          **  MESSAGES REQUIRING OPERATOR ACTION  **

           12:30:30  <47>  Batch-stream 1   JOB #19
                           SPRINT: Please START the card-reader.
                           SEND message to User: McElmoyle when done.
           OPR>






                                  3-183
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW OPERATORS)
                             (SHOW OPERATORS)


  SHOW OPERATORS - Displaying Operators on the System
  SHOW OPERATORS - Displaying Operators on the System



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW OPERATORS command displays the terminal and job  numbers
       of  all  users  on  the  system who are running OPR.  The display
       shows the node, terminal number, job number, and user's name.

       In addition, you can specify the /NODE:  switch  to  display  the
|       operators  at a remote station.  The /ALL switch includes whether
|       or not operators will receive particular message types.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /switch<RET>

       where /switch can be one of the following:
|
|                                       /ALL
                                       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
                                       /NODE:node-name::



  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.

|       /ALL               specifies whether  or  not  operators  receive
|                          particular  message  types.   It displays if a
|                          particular message type is enabled or disabled
|                          for  the  operators  listed.   If  any  of the
|                          switches:               /INFORMATION-MESSAGES,
|                          /JOB-MESSAGES,   or  /OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES  are
|                          enabled for a message type that supports these
|                          switches, then that message type is considered
|                          enabled.


                                  3-184
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW OPERATORS)
                             (SHOW OPERATORS)


  Restriction
  Restriction

       If there are no users running OPR at the node you specify in  the
       SHOW OPERATORS command, OPR responds with:

       hh:mm:ss        --No Operators at Node name--

       where name is the node name or number.

       If you do not specify the /NODE:  switch, all  operators  on  the
       system (all nodes included) are displayed.


  Examples
  Examples


       1.  Specify the SHOW OPERATORS command to display  all  operators
           on cluster node THEP.

               ____ _________ _______________________
           OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /CLUSTER-NODE:THEP<RET>
           OPR>
           09:21:39  Received message from THEP::
           09:21:29        -- Operators --

               Node      Type   Terminal    Job        User
           -----------  ------  --------    ---  ---------------
           THEP         system       236    197  OPERATOR
           THEP         system       434    205  WONG

           **** SEMI-OPR is enabled ****
           OPR>
|
|       2.  Specify the SHOW OPERATORS command with the  /ALL  switch  to
|           display  what types of messages are enabled for the operators
|           listed.
|
               ____ _________ _________
|           OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /ALL<RET>
|           OPR>
|           17:02:12        -- Operators --
|
|               Node      Type   Terminal    Job     User
|           -----------  ------  --------    ---  --------------
|           RONCO        system       236     69  OPERATOR
|
|                           RONCO  Message type
|                          ------  ------------
|                            Ena   BATCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   MOUNT-MESSAGES


                                  3-185
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW OPERATORS)
                             (SHOW OPERATORS)


|                            Ena   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PLOTTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PRINTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   READER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   USER-MESSAGES
|
|                            Dis   BUGCHK-MESSAGES
|                            Dis   BUGINF-MESSAGES
|                            Dis   DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
|                            Dis   DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   SYSTEM-MESSAGES
|
|                            Ena   LCP-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   NCP-MESSAGES
|
|           RONCO        system       434     78  WONG
|                           RONCO  Message type
|                          ------  ------------
|                            Ena   BATCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   FILE-RETRIEVAL-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   MOUNT-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PLOTTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   PRINTER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   READER-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   USER-MESSAGES
|
|                            Ena   BUGCHK-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   BUGINF-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   DECNET-EVENT-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   DECNET-LINK-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   SYSTEM-MESSAGES
|
|                            Ena   LCP-MESSAGES
|                            Ena   NCP-MESSAGES
|
            S
|            SEMI-OPR is enabled
|













                                  3-186
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)


  SHOW PARAMETERS - Displaying Device Settings
  SHOW PARAMETERS - Displaying Device Settings



  Function
  Function

       The  SHOW  PARAMETERS  command  displays  information   about   a
       particular  device  or  range  of  devices,  showing  its current
       defaults and values.  The  device  can  be  a  batch  stream,  an
       input/output unit number, or all devices known to the system.

       The SHOW PARAMETERS command is  very  useful  when  you  want  to
       change  the  defaults of a particular device.  You can issue this
       command to check the parameters before and after the changes have
       been made.

       If you do not  specify  any  keyword  with  the  SHOW  PARAMETERS
       command, the command defaults to all devices.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS keyword nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     NETWORK-NODE
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument

       followed by a stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range:                   n:m

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

                                     CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"


                                  3-187
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)


       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, optionally, the switches: /NODE:node-name::
                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       The NETWORK-NODE argument can only be followed by the node  name;
       no  switches or stream/unit numbers.  For example, to specify the
       node named KL2102, type NETWORK-NODE KL2102::.  You must type two
       colons (::) after the node name.


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                          range  of batch streams.  If no unit number or
                          range is  specified,  all  batch  streams  are
                          displayed.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                          range  of  card-punch  devices.   If  no  unit
                          number or range is specified,  all  card-punch
                          devices are displayed.

       NETWORK-NODE       specifies that the IBM network  parameters  of
                          the  nodes  currently  known  to the system be
                          displayed.  This argument displays information
                          only  if  your installation has DN60 software.
                          The display shows the value of  the  arguments
                          that  can  be  altered with the DEFINE and SET
                          NODE commands.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.  If no
                          unit  number  or  range  is   specified,   all
                          paper-tape-punch devices are displayed.

       PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                          range  of  plotter devices.  If no unit number
                          or range is specified, all plotter devices are
                          displayed.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled


                                  3-188
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)


                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is processed.  The double colon (::) following
                          the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only


                                  3-189
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)


                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

            LOCAL         specifies  to   display   the   line   printer
                          parameters for your local logged-in system.

       nn                 specifies  a  numeric  value  representing   a
                          batch-stream  number  or a device unit number.
                          The number is usually from 0 to 5, but can  be
                          larger   if  your  installation  has  acquired
                          additional devices.

       n:m                specifies a range of  batch  streams  or  unit
                          numbers.


  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the


                                  3-190
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)


                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHOW PARAMETERS command to  display  the  current
           parameters of all batch streams.

               ____ __________ _________________
           OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS BATCH-STREAM<RET>
           OPR>
           18:25:07                -- System Device Parameters--

           Batch-Stream Parameters:
             Strm     Minutes    Prio  Opr-Intvn
             ----  -----------  -----  ---------
                0      0:3600    1:63        Yes
                1      0:10      1:19        Yes
                2      0:11000   1:19        Yes
                3      0:11000  20:63        Yes
                4      0:3600    1:63        No

           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SHOW PARAMETERS command to  display  the  current
           parameters of the card punch.

               ____ __________ __________ ______
           OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS CARD-PUNCH 0<RET>
           OPR>
           19:43:30                -- System Device Parameters--

           Card-Punch Parameters:
             Unit  Card-Limits    Form    Prio  Lim-Ex  Dev-Chars
             ----  ------------  ------  -----  ------  ---------
                0      1:500     NORMAL   1:63     Ask

           OPR>

       3.  Specify the SHOW PARAMETERS command to  display  the  current
           parameters of all cluster printer devices within the cluster.

               ____ __________ _______ _______ ____________________
           OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS PRINTER CLUSTER /CLUSTER-NODE:*<RET>


                                  3-191
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)
                            (SHOW PARAMETERS)


           OPR>
           09:31:19        -- System Device Parameters --

           Cluster printers
|             Alias    Unit     Node      Page Limits    Prio  Lim-Ex
|             ----    -------  ------     ------------  -----  ------
|             CHARLI      0    GIDNEY        0:10000     1:63  Ask
|             BARR        0      THEP        0:10000     1:63  Ask

           OPR>
           09:31:20  Received message from RONCO::
           09:31:18        -- System Device Parameters --

           Cluster printers
|             Alias     Unit     Node      Page Limits    Prio  Lim-Ex
|             -----     ----    ------     ------------  -----  ------
|             BINN        0      THEP        0:5000      1:63   Ask


           09:31:20  Received message from THEP::
           09:31:10         -- There are no devices started --

           09:31:21  Received message from GIDNEY::
           09:31:13         -- There are no devices started --
           OPR>




























                                  3-192
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW QUEUES)
                              (SHOW QUEUES)


  SHOW QUEUES - Displaying Queued Job Requests
  SHOW QUEUES - Displaying Queued Job Requests



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW QUEUES  command  displays  the  job  requests  that  are
       active, that are waiting to be processed, and that are being held
       and must be rescheduled.  You can specify all jobs in all  queues
       or  only  those  jobs in a particular queue.  The default for the
       SHOW QUEUES command is ALL-JOBS.

       A queue is a list of jobs for a particular device or stream  that
       are  processing,  are  waiting to be processed, or are being held
       for rescheduling.

       The asterisk (*) before the job name in the output display of the
       SHOW  QUEUES  command indicates that the job request is currently
       active.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW QUEUES keyword /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     ALL-JOBS
                                     BATCH-JOBS
                                     CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
                                     MOUNT-REQUESTS
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
                                     PLOTTER-JOBS
                                     PRINTER-JOBS
                                     RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS

       and, optionally, one or more of the following switches:

                                     /NODE:node-name::
                                     /ALL
                                     /SHORT
                                     /USER:name

       or the switch:                /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       ALL-JOBS           specifies all queues for  the  entire  system.
                          This is the default of the SHOW QUEUES command
                          if  you  do  not  specify  any  other  keyword


                                  3-193
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW QUEUES)
                              (SHOW QUEUES)


                          described below.

       BATCH-JOBS         specifies all batch jobs currently processing,
                          waiting,  or  being  held  in  the batch input
                          queue.

       CARD-PUNCH-JOBS    specifies  all   card-punch   jobs   currently
                          processing,  waiting,  or  being  held  in the
                          card-punch output queue.

       MOUNT-REQUESTS     specifies  all  requests  for  tape  and  disk
                          structure   mounts,   all  requests  that  are
                          currently using tape drives,  whether  or  not
                          the   tapes  are  labeled,  and  all  requests
                          waiting for a disk structure to be dismounted.
                          You   cannot   use  the  /NODE:   switch  with
                          MOUNT-REQUESTS.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS

                          specifies all paper-tape-punch jobs  currently
                          processing,  waiting,  or  being  held  in the
                          paper-tape-punch output queue.

       PLOTTER-JOBS       specifies   all   plotter    jobs    currently
                          processing,  waiting,  or  being  held  in the
                          plotter output queue.

       PRINTER-JOBS       specifies  all  line  printer  jobs  currently
                          processing, waiting, or being held in the line
                          printer output queue.

       RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS specifies all  file  retrievals  for  archived
                          and/or  migrated files waiting to be retrieved
                          from the retrieval request queue.  You  cannot
                          use      the      /NODE:       switch     with
                          RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS.


  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.  This switch cannot  be
                          used     with     the    MOUNT-REQUESTS    and
                          RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS keywords.

       /ALL               specifies that the following be added  to  the
                          display:     the    /ASSISTANCE,    /PRIORITY,
                          /RESTARTABLE, /NOTE, /SEQUENCE,  /UNIQUE,  and
                          /REMARK switches, whether a tape mount request


                                  3-194
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW QUEUES)
                              (SHOW QUEUES)


                          is for a labeled tape, and the tape volume-set
                          name.

       /SHORT             specifies that only the job name be displayed,
                          along  with  the request number, the scheduled
                          run time, and the user name of each job in the
                          queue.   There are no column headers and there
                          are no switches displayed in the output  queue
                          list.

       /USER:name         specifies  that   the   request   number   and
                          scheduled  runtime  of  a  particular  user be
                          displayed.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHOW QUEUES command to display  batch  jobs  that
           are  processing  or  waiting  to  be  processed  by the batch
           system.

               ____ ______ __________ _________
           OPR>SHOW QUEUES BATCH-JOBS /ALL<RET>

           10:17:24        -- System Queues Listing --

           Batch Queue:
           Job Name   Req    Run Time            User
           --------  ------  --------  ------------------------
             CLDDAY      14  00:20:00  WIZARD
                     /After:25-Mar-88 05:30
                            /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:No  /Assist:Yes
           /Output:Nolog
                            /Batlog:Super  /Seq:1208
             CLOYD        3  02:00:00  GSCOTT
                     /After:26-Mar-88 00:10
                            /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:Yes  /Assist:Yes
           /Output:Nolog
                            /Batlog:Super  /Seq:151
             EASY20      15  00:15:00  MONITOR
                     /After:31-Mar-88 06:00
                            /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:Yes  /Assist:Yes
           /Output:Nolog
                            /Batlog:Super  /Seq:1209
             CLDWEK      16  00:29:00  WIZARD
                                  3-195
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW QUEUES)
                              (SHOW QUEUES)


                     /After:31-Mar-88 07:30
                            /Uniq:Yes  /Restart:Yes  /Assist:Yes
           /Output:Nolog
                            /Batlog:Super  /Seq:1210
           There are 4 jobs in the queue (none in progress)

           OPR>


       2.  Specify the SHOW QUEUES command with  the  /SHORT  switch  to
           display all jobs in the line printer queue.

               ____ ______ _______ ___________
           OPR>SHOW QUEUES PRINTER /SHORT<RET>
           OPR>
            8:27:41                -- System Queues Listing --

           Printer Queue:
           * DAPFIL      23      624  LSCD
             MEM50        5      672  LOFGREN
             MS-OUT       6        6  GUNN
           OPR>
































                                  3-196
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)
                            (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)


  SHOW ROUTE-TABLE - Displaying Node Routing Tables
  SHOW ROUTE-TABLE - Displaying Node Routing Tables



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command displays the routing tables  of  the
       nodes  whose  output  has  been transferred by means of the ROUTE
       command.   (Refer  to  the  ROUTE  command  description  in  this
       chapter.)

       The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command has no keywords and no switches.

       The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command is applicable at  your  installation
       only  if  your  installation  has  remote  station  communication
       software.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>

       and, optionally the switch:   /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Switch
  Switch

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command to display  the  current
           routing on cluster node CLOYD.

               ____ ___________ ________________________
           OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE /CLUSTER-NODE:CLOYD<RET>
           OPR>
           10:34:55        -- System Device Routing Table --

|           Printer 0 [CLOYD] (Alias:FOO) Routed to Cluster Printer 0
|           [GIDNEY] (Alias:BAR)

           OPR>



                                  3-197
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                            (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)
                            (SHOW ROUTE-TABLE)


       2.  Specify the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command, but no routing has been
           performed.

               ____ ________________
           OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>
           OPR>
           16:30:23          --No Routing has been performed--
           OPR>














































                                  3-198
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW SCHEDULER)
                             (SHOW SCHEDULER)


  SHOW SCHEDULER - Displaying the System Scheduler
  SHOW SCHEDULER - Displaying the System Scheduler



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW SCHEDULER command displays the current settings  of  the
       scheduling  scheme  for  your  system.  The parameters and values
       shown in the display are  set  by  your  System  Manager  in  the
       n-CONFIG.CMD   file   at   system  installation  time.   You  can
       optionally change these  settings  with  the  SET  SCHEDULER  and
       ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULER commands.

       The scheduler information display shows the following:

       1.  the class scheduler setting (on or off)

       2.  the bias control setting

       3.  the batch class setting

       4.  the class number with its share (percentage) of CPU time, its
           use  percentage,  and load averages in intervals of 1, 5, and
           15 minutes

       5.  windfall setting (allocated or withheld)

       6.  the classes setting (by account or by policy program)

       Refer to the SET SCHEDULER and  ENABLE  CLASS-SCHEDULER  commands
       for a description of these parameters and values.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW SCHEDULER<RET>

       and, optionally the switch:   /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Switch
  Switch

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.



                                  3-199
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                             (SHOW SCHEDULER)
                             (SHOW SCHEDULER)


  Example
  Example

       Type SHOW SCHEDULER  to  display  the  current  settings  of  the
       scheduling scheme for cluster node GIDNEY.

           ____ _________ _________________________
       OPR>SHOW SCHEDULER /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
       OPR>
       10:28:14            -- System scheduler information --
                                      For node GIDNEY::
                           Class scheduler: off  Bias control: 11
                               Batch class: none set
       OPR>









































                                  3-200
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


  SHOW STATUS - Displaying Device/System Information
  SHOW STATUS - Displaying Device/System Information



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW STATUS command displays the current information about  a
       particular device or range of devices, showing its current status
       within the  system.   The  device  can  be  a  batch  stream,  an
       input/output  unit number, a tape-drive name, a structure name, a
       node, or all current devices known to the system.

       The SHOW STATUS command is useful  when  you  want  to  know  the
       current  status  of  the  system.   You can issue this command to
       check whether any devices are active or idle.

       If you do not specify any keyword with the SHOW  STATUS  command,
       the command defaults to batch streams, printers, and readers.  If
       your installation has a card punch, paper-tape punch, or plotter,
       the status of these devices are also displayed when no keyword is
       specified.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW STATUS keyword nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     DISK-DRIVE
                                     NETWORK-NODE
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument
                                     READER
                                     STRUCTURE
                                     TAPE-DRIVE

       followed by a stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range:                   n:m

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

       or                            CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::
                                  3-201
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       or a structure name:          structure-name:

       or a tape-drive logical name: MTAn:

       and, optionally, the switches: /NODE:node-name::
                                      /SHORT
                                      /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       DISK-DRIVES has these optional switches:

                                      /ALL
                                      /FREE
                                      /MOUNTED

       STRUCTURE has these optional switches:

                                      /ALL
                                      /MOUNTED
                                      /UNMOUNTED

       TAPE-DRIVE has these optional switches:

                                      /ALL
                                      /CHARACTERISTICS
                                      /FREE

       The NETWORK-NODE argument can only be followed by the node  name;
       no  switches or stream/unit numbers.  For example, to specify the
       node named KL2102, type NETWORK-NODE BOSTON::.  You must type two
       colons (::) after the node name.


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies one or more batch input streams.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies one or more card-punch devices.

       DISK-DRIVE         specifies all the disk drives currently  known
                          to  the  system.   With  this keyword, you can
                          optionally  specify  the   /ALL,   /FREE,   or
                          /MOUNTED  switch.   The /ALL switch is assumed
                          if you do not specify a switch.

                                  3-202
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


       NETWORK-NODE       specifies the status of  all  nodes  currently
                          known to the system be displayed.  The display
                          shows each node name and whether the  node  is
                          off-line or on-line.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies   one   or   more   paper-tape-punch
                          devices.

       PLOTTER            specifies one or more plotter devices.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.
                                  3-203
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

            LOCAL         specifies to display the  local  line  printer
                          parameters.
                                  3-204
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


       READER             specifies  one  or  more  punched-card   input
                          devices.

       STRUCTURE          specifies  all  structures  in  the   system's
                          structure  data  base.  With this keyword, you
                          can optionally specify a  structure  name,  or
                          the /ALL, /MOUNTED, or /UNMOUNTED switch.  The
                          /ALL switch is assumed if you do not specify a
                          switch.

                          When you specify a structure name, the display
                          shows  the names of all users who have mounted
                          the structure,  accessed  the  structure,  and
                          connected  to the structure.  In addition, the
                          disk  drive  status  for  the   structure   is
                          displayed.

       TAPE-DRIVE         specifies  one  or  more  magnetic  tape-drive
                          units known to the system.  With this keyword,
                          you can optionally specify a  tape-drive  name
                          (in the format of MTAn:), the /ALL switch, the
                          /CHARACTERISTICS switch, or the /FREE switch.

       nn                 specifies a batch stream number  or  a  device
                          unit  number.  The number is usually from 0 to
                          5, but can be larger if your installation  has
                          acquired additional devices.

       n:m                specifies a range of  batch  streams  or  unit
                          numbers.    The  n  represents  the  low-order
                          number; and the m  represents  the  high-order
                          number.

       structure-name:    specifies the name of a structure.

       MTAn:              specifies the logical  tape-drive  name.   The
                          colon   must   be   included   with  the  name
                          specified.  The  name  is  in  the  format  of
                          MTAn:, where n is the tape-drive number.

  Switches
  Switches

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of a  remote  node  in  the
                          cluster.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

       /SHORT             specifies that the status  display  list  only
                          the  stream/unit  number,  the current status,
                          the job name, the request-id number,  and  the
                          user  name with column headers.  If you do not
                          specify   the   /SHORT   switch,    additional
                          information  such  as  the  job number and the
                          runtime appears in the display  for  each  job
                                  3-205
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


                          request.   This  switch  is not valid with the
                          DISK-DRIVES or TAPE-DRIVE keyword.

       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

                          specifies the particular node in  the  cluster
                          where   the   command   is   processed.    The
                          "cluster-node-name"  can  be  any  node   name
                          within  the  cluster  or an asterisk (*).  The
                          asterisk  specifies  all  nodes   within   the
                          cluster.

       The following switches are optional for the DISK-DRIVE keyword:

       /ALL               specifies  that  both  free  disk  drives  and
                          mounted disk drives be displayed.  This switch
                          is assumed if you do not specify a switch.

       /FREE              specifies that only those disk drives that are
                          available for structure mounts be displayed.

       /MOUNTED           specifies that only those disk drives that are
                          currently   mounted   and  being  accessed  be
                          displayed.


       The following switches are optional for the STRUCTURE keyword:

       /ALL               specifies  that  both  mounted  and  unmounted
                          structures   be  displayed.   This  switch  is
                          assumed if you do not specify a switch.

       /MOUNTED           specifies that only those structures that  are
                          currently mounted be displayed.

       /UNMOUNTED         specifies that only those structures that  are
                          free for mounting be displayed.

       The following switches are optional for the TAPE-DRIVE keyword:

       /ALL               specifies that all tape drives  known  to  the
                          system  be displayed.  The status display also
                          provides additional information, such  as  the
                          AVR  status,  the  label-type, and the density
                          (BPI).  If you do not specify the /ALL switch,
                          the  additional information does not appear in
                          the status display.

       /CHARACTERISTICS   specifies that the status display contain  the
                          characteristics of all tape drives or one tape
                          drive if  you  specify  the  tape  drive  name


                                  3-206
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


                          (MTAn:).    The  characteristics  include  the
                          drive name, the model name (TU45, TU78  etc.),
                          the  type  of  drive (7-track or 9-track), and
                          the tape densities the drive accepts.

       /FREE              specifies that the status display contain  all
                          tape  drives  that  are currently unloaded and
                          available  for  mounting  tape  volumes.   The
                          /FREE  switch  also displays those tape drives
                          that are loaded, but are not being accessed by
                          any user.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHOW STATUS command to display the status of  all
           printers on all nodes within the cluster.

               ____ ______ _______ ____________________
           OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER /CLUSTER-NODE:*<RET>
           OPR>
           10:51:32  Received message from RONCO::
           10:51:30        -- System Device Status --

           Printer Status:

           Cluster printers
|             Alias     Unit     Node          Status
|             -----     ----    ------    ---------------
|             BINN         0      THEP    Idle
|
|
|           DQS printers
|
|             Alias           DQS queue name          Node   Status
|             -----        -----------------------  ------   ------
|             LARRY                        SI$8700  JUNIPR    Idle
|               JOE                       SWE$LN03  LATOUR    Idle
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name     Server       Status
|             -----    -----------   ------  ---------------
|             LAT1           LN03    LAT100  Idle
|
|           10:51:32  Received message from THEP::
|           10:51:22        -- System Device Status --
|







                                  3-207
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


|           Printer Status:
|
|           Local printers
|             Alias  Unit      Status
|             -----  ----  ---------------
|               BAR     0  Idle
|
|           DQS printers
|             Alias         DQS queue name           Node     Status
|             -----      -----------------------    ------    ------
|             CURLIE                     SI$8700    JUNIPR    Idle
|              SHEMP                    SWE$LN03    LATOUR    Idle
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name     Server       Status
|             -----    -----------   ------  ---------------
|             LAT2          F00-NN   BAR--M  Idle
|             LAT3            LN03   LAT100  Idle
|
|
|           10:51:32  Received message from GIDNEY::
|           10:51:25        -- System Device Status --
|
|           Printer Status:
|
|           Local printers
|             Alias Unit      Status
|             ----  ----   -----------
|             RUND   0     Idle
|
|           DQS printers
|             Alias         DQS queue name           Node     Status
|             -----      ----------------------     ------    ------
|             CURLIE                    SI$8700     JUNIPR    Idle
|              SHEMP                   SWE$LN03     LATOUR    Idle
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name     Server       Status
|             -----    -----------  ------  ---------------
|              LAT1           LN03  LAT100  Idle
|
|
|           10:51:32        -- System Device Status --
|
|           Printer Status:
|
|           Cluster printers
|             Alias   Unit     Node          Status
|             -----   -----    ------    ---------------
|              FOO    0        GIDNEY    Idle
|             BINN    0        THEP      Idle


                                  3-208
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


|           DQS printers
|             Alias         DQS queue name          Node   Status
|             -----    -----------------------    ------  ---------
|             CURLIE                   SI$8700    JUNIPR  Idle
|              SHEMP                  SWE$LN03    LATOUR  Idle
|
|           LAT PORT printers
|             Alias    Port name   Server       Status
|             -----   -----------  ------  ---------------
|             LAT3           LN03  LAT100  Idle

           OPR>

       2.  Give the SHOW STATUS command to display the  status  of  free
           disk drives on cluster node GIDNEY.

               ____ ______ __________ _____ _________________________
           OPR>SHOW STATUS DISK-DRIVE /FREE /CLUSTER-NODE:GIDNEY<RET>
           OPR>
           10:55:34  Received message from GIDNEY::
           10:55:28         -- Disk Drive Status --

                            FREE DRIVES

           DISK DRIVE INFORMATION                   DISK PACK
           INFORMATION
                 Chan-Cont   Disk   Mount   Mount                Usage
            Type   Drive    Status  Status  Count   Name         Options
            ---- --------- -------- ------- -----   ------------ -------
            RP06 0,  ,1    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,0    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,4    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,3    Avail    Offline
            RA60 7,01,7    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,13   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,15   Avail    Offline
            RA60 7,01,16   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,17   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,18   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,20   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,36   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,22   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,14   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,12   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,01,2    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,21   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,11   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,19   Avail    Offline
            RP06 1,  ,5    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,03,6    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,03,1    Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,00,8    Avail    Offline


                                  3-209
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                              (SHOW STATUS)
                              (SHOW STATUS)


            RA81 7,01,9    Avail    Offline
            RA60 7,03,10   Avail    Offline
            RA81 7,02,12   Avail    Offline
                 NOTE: Channel 7 indicates CI channel

           OPR>















































                                  3-210
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (SHOW TIME)
                               (SHOW TIME)


  SHOW TIME - Displaying Date and Time
  SHOW TIME - Displaying Date and Time



  Function
  Function

       The SHOW TIME command displays the date and time.

       The date is shown in the format of dd-mmm-yy (dd=day,  mmm=month,
       yy=year).

       The time is shown in the format of hh:mm:ss (hh=hour, mm=minutes,
       ss=seconds).


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>


  Example
  Example

       Type SHOW TIME and confirm with a carriage return.  OPR  responds
       with the display of the current date and time.

           ____ _________
       OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>
       20-Apr-88 11:55:38
       OPR>

























                                  3-211
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHUTDOWN)
                                (SHUTDOWN)


  SHUTDOWN - Terminating Device Scheduling
  SHUTDOWN - Terminating Device Scheduling



  Function
  Function

       The SHUTDOWN command terminates scheduling  for  a  device.   The
       SHUTDOWN command is the opposite of the START command.

       When  you  issue  this  command,  the  job  currently  processing
       continues  until  it  has  been  completed.   When  the  job  has
       completed, the stream or device is terminated and no further jobs
       requiring the stream or device are processed.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SHUTDOWN keyword nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     NODE
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument
                                     READER

       followed by the stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range:                   n:m

       or for the NODE keyword:      node-name::

       and, optionally, the following switches:

                                     /NODE:node-name::
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

       or                            CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename


                                  3-212
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHUTDOWN)
                                (SHUTDOWN)


       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                          range of batch-input streams.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                          range of card-punch devices.

       NODE node-name::   specifies to shutdown the printer  and  reader
                          device  for a node within the system's network
                          for remote station communication.  The  double
                          colon   (::)   following   the  node  name  is
                          optional.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS node-name and cannot be an
                          alias.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.

       PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                          range of plotter devices.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20


                                  3-213
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHUTDOWN)
                                (SHUTDOWN)


                          processors.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar


                                  3-214
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHUTDOWN)
                                (SHUTDOWN)


                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

       READER             specifies  a  particular  card-reader  (input)
                          device or a range of card-reader devices.

       nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                          be shutdown.

       n:m                specifies a range of stream/unit numbers.  You
                          can  specify  this  range  instead of a single
                          stream/unit number.  The colon  must  separate
                          the   two   numbers.   The  n  represents  the
                          low-order number  and  the  m  represents  the
                          high-order number.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
                          station.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the card  punch  at
           the central site.

               ________ __________ ______
           OPR>SHUTDOWN CARD-PUNCH 0<RET>
           OPR>
           13:23:33        Card-punch   0  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
           OPR>




                                  3-215
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SHUTDOWN)
                                (SHUTDOWN)


       2.  Specify the SHUTDOWN command to terminate all batch streams.

               ________ ____________ ________
           OPR>SHUTDOWN BATCH-STREAM 0:2<RET>
           OPR>
           12:30:15        Batch-stream 0  --Shutdown--
           12:30:16        Batch-stream 1  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
           12:30:17        Batch-stream 2  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the  line  printers
           at your site.

               ________ _______ ________
           OPR>SHUTDOWN PRINTER 0:1<RET>
           OPR>
           16:23:45        Printer 0  --Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled--
           16:23:46        Printer 1  --Shutdown--
           OPR>




































                                  3-216
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (START)
                                 (START)


  START - Starting Device Scheduling
  START - Starting Device Scheduling



  Function
  Function

       The  START  command  starts  the  scheduling  for  the  specified
       devices.   The  START  command  is  the  opposite of the SHUTDOWN
       command.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>START keyword nn /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     NODE identifier::
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument
                                     READER

       followed by the stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range:                   n:m

       optionally, followed by this switches:

                                     /NODE:node-name::
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name

       optionally followed by (PRINTER keyword only):

                                     /DEVICE:MTAn:
                                             TTYn:

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

       or                            CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::


                                  3-217
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (START)
                                 (START)


       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, for SERVER, the switch:  /TERMINAL-CHARACTERISTIC:


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                          range  of  batch  input  streams.  The maximum
                          number of batch streams is 63.  Note that this
                          maximum  can  be lowered by the system manager
                          using Galgen.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                          range of card-punch devices.

       NODE node-name::   specifies that the printer and  reader  device
                          for  a  node  within  the  system's network be
                          started.  The double colon (::) following  the
                          node  name  is  optional.  Before you start an
                          IBM node, you must define the node and set the
                          parameters  for the node.  Refer to the DEFINE
                          and SET NODE commands in this chapter.

                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS node-name and cannot be an
                          alias.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.

       PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                          range of plotter devices.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled


                                  3-218
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (START)
                                 (START)


                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"



                                  3-219
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (START)
                                 (START)


                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

       READER             specifies  a  particular  card-reader  (input)
                          device or a range of card-reader devices.

       nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                          be started.  You must specify a stream or unit
                          number.

       n:m                specifies a range of stream or  unit  numbers.
                          You can specify this range instead of a single
                          stream  or  unit  number.   The   colon   must
                          separate  the  two  numbers.  The n represents
                          the low-order number and the m represents  the
                          high-order number.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /DEVICE:MTAn:  or TTYn:

                          specifies that printer output is to be written
                          to tape, on device MTAn:, or to a terminal, on
                          device TTYn:.   The  "n"  is  the  tape  drive
                          number or the terminal line number.  The MTAn:
                          specification  allows  you  to  spool  printer
                          output  to tape.  This is particularly helpful
                          when printer  hardware  problems  exist.   The
                          TTYn:    specification  must  be  a  hardwired


                                  3-220
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (START)
                                 (START)


                          dedicated terminal line.

                          Before you use START PRINTER/DEVICE:MTAn:, you
                          must     specify    SET    TAPE-DRIVE    MTAn:
                                                     _______  __________
                          UNAVAILABLE.  Refer to the TOPS-20  Operator's
                          _____
                          Guide, for more information.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
                          station.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.

       /TERMINAL-CHARACTERISTIC:

                          specifies the printer  terminal  type  of  the
                          server.   The printer terminal type is defined
                          by your System Manager.   For  example,  LA50,
                          LA100, and LN03 are printer terminal types.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the START command to start the line  printer  at  the
           central site.

               _____ _______ ______
           OPR>START PRINTER 0<RET>
           OPR>
           20:31:09        Printer 0  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the START command to start all batch streams.

               _____ ____________ ________
           OPR>START BATCH-STREAM 0:3<RET>
           OPR>
           12:15:32        Batch-stream 0  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>
           12:15:38        Batch-stream 1  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>
           12:15:44        Batch-stream 2  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>
           12:15:50        Batch-stream 3  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the START command to start the card-punch devices  at
           your site.

               _____ __________ ________
           OPR>START CARD-PUNCH 0:1<RET>
           OPR>
           13:17:23        Card-punch 0  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>
           13:17:30        Card-punch 1  --Startup Scheduled--
           OPR>


                                  3-221
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (STOP)
                                  (STOP)


  STOP - Stopping Devices Temporarily
  STOP - Stopping Devices Temporarily



  Function
  Function

       The STOP command temporarily stops one of  six  possible  devices
       that are currently idle or processing a particular job.

       The STOP command only temporarily stops the device and the device
       is  still  active.   The  device has not been terminated and jobs
       requesting that device can still be scheduled.

       To re-activate the particular device after  a  STOP  command  has
       been issued, give the CONTINUE command.  Refer to the description
       of the CONTINUE command in this chapter.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>STOP keyword nn argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword can be one of the following:

                                     BATCH-STREAM
                                     CARD-PUNCH
                                     PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
                                     PLOTTER
                                     PRINTER argument
                                     READER

       followed by the stream/unit number:

                                     nn

       or a range:                   n:m

       optionally followed by the switches:

                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

       or the argument for the PRINTER keyword:

|                                     aliasname

       or                            CLUSTER nn
                                             n:m
       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            DQS queuename


                                  3-222
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (STOP)
                                  (STOP)


       followed by:                  NODE node-name::

       or                            LAT
       followed by:                  SERVICE "name"
                                     SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"

       and, optionally, one of the following arguments:

                                     AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST
                                           EVERY-REQUEST
                                     IMMEDIATELY


  Keywords
  Keywords

       BATCH-STREAM       specifies a particular batch input stream or a
                          range of batch input streams.

       CARD-PUNCH         specifies a particular card-punch device or  a
                          range of card-punch devices.

       PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH   specifies a particular paper-tape-punch device
                          or a range of paper-tape-punch devices.

       PLOTTER            specifies a particular  plotter  device  or  a
                          range of plotter devices.

       PRINTER argument   specifies a particular line printer device  or
|                          a  range of line printer devices.  You can use
|                          an alias name defined with  the  DEFINE  ALIAS
|                          command  to  reference a printer specification
|                          in this command.  The argument can be:

            CLUSTER nn    specifies a printer, or a range of printers,
                    n:m   on a remote node within a TOPS-20 cluster.   A
                          TOPS-20   cluster   is   a   loosely   coupled
                          configuration of between two and four  TOPS-20
                          processors.     Each    processor    in    the
                          configuration is identified by  a  node  name.
                          For example, HUEY::, DEWEY::, and LOUIE::  can
                          be three nodes within  a  cluster  of  TOPS-20
                          processors.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies  that  the  printer  device  for   a
                          cluster  be  started.   The  double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.



                                  3-223
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (STOP)
                                  (STOP)


                          For the  CLUSTER  argument,  NODE  node-name::
                          specifies a node within the cluster and cannot
                          be the local node or an alias.

            DQS queuename

                          specifies  the   Distributed   Queue   Service
                          allowing  users to queue print requests to VMS
                          systems using DECnet.  DQS  accepts  the  user
                          specified  print  request  and transmits it to
                          the  remote   VMS   node.    The   "queuename"
                          specifies  the  VMS  queuename  and  can  be a
                          string of 1 to 31  characters,  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 NODE node-name::

                          specifies the VMS node where the print request
                          is  to  be  processed.   The double colon (::)
                          following the node name is not needed.

                          For  the  DQS   argument,   NODE   node-name::
                          specifies  the  VMS  nodename and cannot be an
                          alias.

            LAT           specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

                 PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the


                                  3-224
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (STOP)
                                  (STOP)


                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

                 SERVICE "name"

                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

                 SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.

       READER             specifies  a  particular  card-reader  (input)
                          device or a range of card-reader devices.

       nn                 specifies the stream number or unit number  to
                          be stopped.  You must specify a stream or unit
                          number.

       n:m                specifies a range of stream or  unit  numbers.
                          You can specify this range instead of a single
                          stream  or  unit  number.   The   colon   must
                          separate  the  two  numbers.  The n represents
                          the low-order number and the m represents  the
                          high-order number.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST

                          specifies that the device must stop after  the
                          current request is finished.

       AFTER EVERY-REQUEST

                          specifies that the  device  stop  after  every
                          request.   This  setting will remain in effect
                          until you use the SHUTDOWN and START  commands
                          to  shut  the  device  down  and  restart  the
                          device.


                                  3-225
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (STOP)
                                  (STOP)


       IMMEDIATELY        specifies  that  the  device  stop  processing
                          immediately.   Any job in progress is stopped.
                          This  action  is  the  default  for  the  STOP
                          command.


  Switches
  Switches

|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
                          station.   The double colon (::) following the
                          node name is optional.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the STOP command to stop the card reader while it was
           processing to prevent a card-reader jam.

               ____ ______ ______
           OPR>STOP READER 0<RET>
           OPR>
           09:20:10        Reader 0  --Stopped--
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the STOP command to stop  a  batch  stream  that  was
           currently processing a job.

               ____ ____________ ______
           OPR>STOP BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>
           OPR>
           18:23:55        Batch-stream 2  --Stopped--
           OPR>

       3.  Specify the STOP command to stop the line  printer  that  was
           currently processing.

               ____ _______ ______
           OPR>STOP PRINTER 1<RET>
           OPR>
           11:37:02        Printer 1  --Stopped--
           OPR>






                                  3-226
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SUPPRESS)
                                (SUPPRESS)


  SUPPRESS - Suppressing Printer Form-Feeds
  SUPPRESS - Suppressing Printer Form-Feeds



  Function
  Function

       The  SUPPRESS  command  converts  all  vertical-form-feed  motion
       characters  to  single  space  characters.   All  form  feeds and
       multiple line feeds are converted to a single line  feed.   Thus,
       the  paging motion in a printer-job request is ignored.  However,
       this command does not cause printing to occur  across  the  forms
       page burst (perforation).

       The SUPPRESS command is very useful  when  you  want  to  stop  a
       user's  program  that  caused  a print loop, for example when bad
       code causes too many form feeds.  When this happens, you can stop
       the  printer,  issue  the SUPPRESS command, and then continue the
       printer, thus saving a lot of paper.

       The SUPPRESS command's only keyword  is  PRINTER  with  its  unit
       number  and,  optionally,  the  node  name  or  number.  You must
       specify the PRINTER keyword.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>SUPPRESS keyword nn (or) LAT /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:        PRINTER

|       followed by it alias name

       or followed by its unit number:

                                     nn

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                                     /NODE:node-name::

       or                            LAT

       followed by:                  SERVICE "name" SERVER "name"
       or followed by:               PORT "name"
                                     SERVER "name"


       and one of the following switches:

                                     /FILE
                                     /JOB


                                  3-227
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SUPPRESS)
                                (SUPPRESS)


                                     /STOP

|       or, optionally the following switch:
|
|                                     /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       PRINTER            specifies a particular  line  printer  device.
|                          You  can  use  an  alias name defined with the
|                          DEFINE ALIAS command to  reference  a  printer
|                          specification in this command.

       nn                 specifies the unit number of the line  printer
                          that  will have its vertical motion suppressed
                          (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,  and  so
                          forth).  You must specify this unit number.

       LAT                specifies the  Local  Area  Transport  service
                          used  to  control  communication  between  LAT
                          hosts and terminals on the Ethernet.  With the
                          LAT  keyword,  you specify the SERVICE or PORT
                          and its SERVER name to establish communication
                          between your system, running LAT software, and
                          the resource printer terminal.

                          You     cannot     use      the      following
                          SERVICE/PORT/SERVER specifications:

                                    SERVICE name only
                                    SERVER name only
                                    PORT name only
                                    SERVICE name and PORT name
                                    SERVICE, SERVER, and PORT names

                          Refer to Chapter 4 for additional  information
                          about LAT communications.

            PORT "name"

                          specifies the communication path  between  the
                          host  system  and  the printer resource or the
                          access point that the node represents  to  the
                          user.   The  "name"  is  the port name and can
                          have from 1 to  16  characters  consisting  of
                          alphanumeric  characters, underscores, dashes,
                          and dollar signs.

            SERVICE "name"



                                  3-228
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SUPPRESS)
                                (SUPPRESS)


                          specifies the resource and establishes the LAT
                          access  path  to  the resource.  The "name" is
                          the service name and can have  from  1  to  16
                          characters    consisting    of    alphanumeric
                          characters, underscores,  dashes,  and  dollar
                          signs.

            SERVER "name"

                          specifies the  server  name  of  the  resource
                          printer  terminal.   This  name can be the LAT
                          box with the proper LAT  software  running  in
                          it.   The name can be from 1 to 6 alphanumeric
                          characters in length.


  Switches
  Switches

       You must specify one of the following switches:

       /FILE              specifies the current file being printed  that
                          was  originally  queued  to  process  multiple
                          files.    (Refer   to   the   BACKSPACE    and
                          FORWARDSPACE commands.)

       /JOB               specifies the current job being printed.  With
                          the /JOB switch, the entire job is suppressed,
                          regardless of how many files or switches  were
                          specified  when  the job was originally queued
                          to print.  The /JOB switch is the  default  of
                          the SUPPRESS command.

       /STOP              specifies  a  switch  used  to  resume  normal
                          printing  and stop the suppression of carriage
                          control on the line printer.  When you specify
                          this   switch,   the  job  that  is  currently
                          printing reverts to the print job format  that
                          occurred   before  the  SUPPRESS  command  was
                          issued.

|       You can optionally specify the following switches:
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all
|                          nodes within the cluster.



                                  3-229
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                (SUPPRESS)
                                (SUPPRESS)


|       /NODE:node-name::  specifies the name of your host  or  a  remote
|                          station.   the double colon (::) following the
|                          node name is optional.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the SUPPRESS command to stop the waste  of  paper  on
           line  printer  0  that  is printing a run-away print program.
           This  SUPPRESS  command  affects  the  entire  job  that   is
           currently printing.

               ________ _______ ______
           OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0<RET>
           OPR>
            6:37:41        Printer 0  --Carriage control suppressed--
                           Job DUMP01 Req # 23 For: OPERATOR
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the SUPPRESS command to stop the suppression of  form
           feeds and carriage returns on line printer 0 after a run-away
           job has completed printing.  The line printer is now free  to
           print the next job in the queue.

               ________ _______ _ __________
           OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0 /STOP<RET>
           OPR>
            7:32:12        Printer 0  --Carriage control activated--
                           Job DUMP01 Req # 23 For: OPERATOR
           OPR>

























                                  3-230
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SWITCH)
                                 (SWITCH)


  SWITCH - Switching Tape Drives and Volids
  SWITCH - Switching Tape Drives and Volids



  Function
  Function

       The SWITCH command switches a tape-mount request from one  volume
       to another that is on another tape drive.  This command should be
       used when a user program wishes to switch volumes without issuing
       another tape MOUNT request.

       In particular, this command is useful when  you  want  to  handle
       tape  volume  switching for unlabeled tapes used by certain COBOL
       programs.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>SWITCH nnn volid MTAn: /switch<RET>

       where nnn is the tape-mount request number

       followed by the new tape-volume identification (volid)

       followed by the tape-drive name (MTAn:)

|       followed optionally by the switch /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|
  Switch
|  Switch
|
|        /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                                specifies the  particular  cluster  node
|                                within  the  TOPS-20  cluster  where the
|                                command     is      processed.       The
|                                "cluster-node-name" qualifier can be any
|                                node  name  within  the  cluster  or  an
|                                asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk specifies
|                                all nodes within the cluster.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

        The following list are the restrictions for the SWITCH command:

                                1.  You must specify a new volid.

                                2.  The tape drive name is optional.  If
                                    specified,  it must be a drive other
                                    than the drive that the  request  is


                                  3-231
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                 (SWITCH)
                                 (SWITCH)


                                    currently  using.  If not specified,
                                    the drive  must  be  the  same  tape
                                    drive.

                                3.  If you give a drive name,  you  must
                                    have  the  new  volume  mounted  and
                                    ready on the tape drive.

                                4.  The switched  tape  and  tape  drive
                                    must  be  the  same  track-type  and
                                    density.


  Example
  Example

       A user has requested that you SWITCH volid COBOL1 to COBOL2.  You
       have already mounted and made ready COBOL2 on tape drive MTA1:.

           ______ __ ______ __________
       OPR>SWITCH 90 COBOL2 MTA1:<RET>
       OPR>
        7:45:06          --Tape Drive Released By User--
                       MTA0: Volume COBOL1 Being unloaded
       OPR>
        7:45:06          --MTA1: Given To Request 90--
                       Volume COBOL2 now in use by
                       User BROWN, Job 16, Terminal 114
       OPR>


























                                  3-232
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (TAKE)
                                  (TAKE)


  TAKE - Executing OPR Commands Automatically
  TAKE - Executing OPR Commands Automatically



  Function
  Function

       The TAKE command executes a series of commands that reside  in  a
       TAKE command file.  This command serves as an aid to you when you
       execute the same commands over and over again.  You can create  a
       command  file  that consists of the commands used most frequently
       and then execute these commands by issuing the TAKE command.

       There is no minimum  or  maximum  limit  on  the  number  of  OPR
       commands that you can put in a TAKE command file.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>TAKE filespec /switch<RET>

       where filespec is the input-file specification

       and, optionally, /switch can be:              /DISPLAY
                                                     /NODISPLAY


  Keywords
  Keywords

       filespec           specifies the input filename and file type  of
                          the  file  that  contains  the  executable OPR
                          commands.  If you do not specify the dev:, OPR
                          defaults to DSK:.


  Switches
  Switches

       /DISPLAY           specifies that OPR displays all messages  from
                          the TAKE command file, any error messages that
                          occur, and the OPR  commands  once  they  have
                          been executed.

       /NODISPLAY         specifies that OPR does not  display  the  OPR
                          commands  that  exist in the TAKE command file
                          after their  execution.   All  other  messages
                          appear  with  the /NODISPLAY switch specified.
                          This  switch  is  the  default  of  the   TAKE
                          command.






                                  3-233
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (TAKE)
                                  (TAKE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Specify the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR  commands
           that are in OPR-TAKE01.CMD, which resides in your directory.

               ____ _____________________________
           OPR>TAKE <OPERATOR>OPR-TAKE01.CMD<RET>
           OPR>
           14:54:10        Batch-stream 0  --Startup Scheduled--

           14:54:12        Batch-stream 1  --Startup Scheduled--

           14:54:15        Batch-stream 2  --Startup Scheduled--

           START BATCH-STREAM 0:2
           OPR>
           14:54:18        Printer 0  --Startup Scheduled--

           14:54:21        Printer 1  --Startup Scheduled--

           START PRINTER 0:1
           OPR>

       2.  Specify the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR  commands
           from SYS:OPRCMD.CMD.  You do not specify SYS:  as this is the
           default device type.

               ____ __________ _______________
           OPR>TAKE OPRCMD.CMD /NODISPLAY<RET>
           OPR>
           16:43:07        Card-punch 0  --Shutdown Scheduled--

           16:43:11        Plotter 0  --Shutdown Scheduled--

           16:43:15        Reader 0  --Shutdown Scheduled--

           16:43:18        Paper-tape-punch 0 --Shutdown Scheduled--

           OPR>
















                                  3-234
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (UNDEFINEn)
                               (UNDEFINEn)


  UNDEFINE - Removing Structure Parameters
  UNDEFINE - Removing Structure Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The UNDEFINE command removes a structure's  attribute  definition
       from the structure data base.  The structure data base contains a
       list of all the system's structures and  their  parameters.   You
       can display the contents of the structure data base with the SHOW
       STATUS STRUCTURE command.

       Use the UNDEFINE command when a structure in the  structure  data
       base is no longer used.  You can also use the UNDEFINE command if
       you incorrectly enter a new structure name with the SET STRUCTURE
       command.


  Format
  Format

|       OPR>UNDEFINE keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword must be:             STRUCTURE

       followed by the argument:          structure-name:

|       followed optionally by the switch:
|
|                           /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name


  Keywords
  Keywords

       STRUCTURE          specifies a disk structure.


  Arguments
  Arguments

       structure-name:    specifies the alias name of the disk structure
                          to remove from the structure table.


  Switch
|  Switch
|
|       /CLUSTER-NODE:cluster-node-name
|
|                          specifies the particular cluster  node  within
|                          the  TOPS-20  cluster  where  the  command  is
|                          processed.  The "cluster-node-name"  qualifier
|                          can  be any node name within the cluster or an
|                          asterisk  (*).   The  asterisk  specifies  all


                                  3-235
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                               (UNDEFINEn)
                               (UNDEFINEn)


|                          nodes within the cluster.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       The UNDEFINE command functions  only  if  the  structure  is  not
       mounted.


  Examples
  Examples

       Specify  the  SHOW  STATUS  STRUCTURE  command  to  verify   that
       structure  JACK:   is  not  mounted.   Then  specify the UNDEFINE
       STRUCTURE command to remove structure JACK:  from  the  structure
       data base.

           ____ ______ _________ __________
       OPR>SHOW STATUS STRUCTURE JACK:<RET>
       OPR>
       10:14:21             -- Structure Status --

                     Mount   Mount File
       Alias  Name   State   Count Count Status         Access...
       ------ ------ ------- ----- ----- -------- ------------...
       JACK                              Unavail  Shared      ...

       Structure is not mounted on a disk drive

           ________ _________ __________
       OPR>UNDEFINE STRUCTURE JACK:<RET>
       OPR>
       10:14:22          -- Undefine Structure Command --
                       Structure JACK: deleted from data base
       OPR>





















                                  3-236
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (WAIT)
                                  (WAIT)


  WAIT - Controlling Input from Batch Jobs
  WAIT - Controlling Input from Batch Jobs



  Function
  Function

       The WAIT command causes OPR to wait a specified number of seconds
       before accepting input.

       The WAIT command is used in batch control files to try to prevent
       OPR  from  accepting a command before a previously issued command
       has been processed.

       The OPR program  is  designed  to  accept  and  process  commands
       immediately,  and the batch system (BATCON) will send commands to
       OPR as soon as the previous command is accepted.

       Most OPR commands require processing  by  other  modules  of  the
       operating  system.   OPR can accept a command, dispatch it to the
       appropriate module, and accept another  command  from  the  batch
       file  before  the  output  from the first command returns to OPR.
       For example, it is possible for an EXIT command in the batch file
       to  be processed before the response to previously issued command
       is displayed.  The WAIT command should  be  entered  between  the
       previous command and the EXIT command, to allow the first command
       to finish processing before the EXIT command is sent to OPR.


  Format
  Format

       OPR>WAIT n<RET>

       where n is the number of seconds  that  OPR  should  wait  before
       accepting  the  next  command  in the batch file.  The value of n
       must be between 1 and 60.


  Warning
  Warning

       Using the WAIT command does NOT guarantee that  the  output  from
       the  first command will be successfully displayed before the EXIT
       command is accepted and processing by OPR.   OPR  will,  however,
       WAIT  the  specified  number  of seconds, and the output from the
       first command will  be  displayed  if  it  is  ready  before  the
       specified number of seconds is up.


  Example
  Example

       The following batch file may be submitted to the batch system:



                                  3-237
                          OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                         OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
                                  (WAIT)
                                  (WAIT)


            @ENABLE
            $OPR
            *SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
            *EXIT

       When this job is processed, the SHOW STATUS command is issued and
       accepted  by  OPR,  passed  to ORION for processing, and then the
       output is passed back through OPR  to  BATCON.   However,  BATCON
       will  send  the EXIT command immediately after OPR dispatches the
       SHOW STATUS command.  When OPR  receives  the  EXIT  command,  it
       causes  the  batch  job  to exit from OPR immediately, before the
       output from SHOW STATUS is received by OPR.

       The WAIT command is used to cause OPR to WAIT for  the  specified
       number  of  seconds  before  accepting  the  EXIT  command.   The
       following batch file would probably work successfully:

            @ENABLE
            $OPR
            *SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
            *WAIT 10
            *EXIT































                                  3-238












                                CHAPTER 4
                                CHAPTER 4

                               LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



  4.1  INTRODUCTION
  4.1  INTRODUCTION

  LCP is the LAT Control Program.   LAT  is  the  Local  Area  Transport
  protocol,   used  to  control  communication  between  LAT  hosts  and
  terminals on the  Ethernet.   LCP  allows  you  to  perform  LAT  host
  management functions at a TOPS-20 host.

                                 WARNING

          The  LCP  commands  described  in  this  chapter   can
          seriously  affect  system performance.  If you are not
          sure of what you are doing, do not use LCP commands to
          set or clear LAT parameters.

                                   NOTE

          This introduction describes the  LAT  protocol  as  it
          pertains  to  TOPS-20  LAT  hosts.   The  LCP  command
          descriptions in this chapter apply only  to  LAT  host
          management  functions  on  TOPS-20  nodes.   For  more
          information about LAT architecture  and  LAT  Terminal
                                                      _____ ____
          Server  Configuration  Guidelines  see  the Local Area
          _________ _____ ____________ _______  _________  _____
          Transport (LAT) Architecture Network  Manager's  Guide
                  _______ ______ _________ _____
          and the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide.

  To run LCP, you must first run OPR, and therefore  must  have  OPR  or
  WHEEL privileges enabled.

  Many hundreds of hosts and terminals can  be  connected  on  the  same
  Ethernet.   LAT  terminal  servers  allow terminal users to connect to
  TOPS-20 hosts that are connected to the same Ethernet.  There must  be
  corresponding  server  software  in the host.  The host server and the
  terminal server use the  LAT  protocol  to  enable  the  (potentially)
  thousands of communications links to efficiently utilize the Ethernet.
  Users do not need to be aware of the LAT servers.

  Three types of parameters control the action of  a  TOPS-20  LAT  host


                                   4-1
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



  server:

        o  permanent

        o  static

        o  dynamic

  You can change permanent parameters only by  rebuilding  the  monitor.
  You can change static parameters by editing n-CONFIG.CMD and reloading
  the monitor.  You can change dynamic  parameters  with  LCP  commands.
  LAT operation and some dynamic parameters are discussed below.

  There is one physical connection between all hosts  and  LAT  terminal
  servers:   the Ethernet.  All communication is transmitted on that one
  physical connection.  All communication between users of a  particular
  LAT  terminal server and a particular host is transmitted on a logical
  connection known as a  virtual  circuit.   Software  in  the  terminal
  server  and  in the host ensures that each message is delivered to the
  correct destination.

  Each message received (by  a  host  or  a  terminal  server)  must  be
  acknowledged  by the receiver.  The acknowledgement can be included in
  a data message, or can be sent as a separate message when there is  no
  data.   If  a  host does not receive an acknowledgement from a server,
  the host can send one more message to that server, at which  time  the
  host   starts  its  retransmit  timer.   When  the  host  receives  an
  acknowledgement from the server, this timer is stopped.  If  the  host
  receives  no  acknowledgement and the host's retransmit timer expires,
  the host retransmits all unacknowledged messages  to  the  server  and
  restarts  the  timer.   The  host  can  retransmit  these  messages  a
  specified number of times, known as the retransmit limit.  You can use
  LCP  commands  to  change  the  host's retransmit timer and retransmit
  limit in response to network load.

  Hosts present themselves to users of terminal servers  as  "services".
  Dynamic parameters associated with the services, such as service-name,
  group, and service-rating, let you control access  to  the  hosts.   A
  host  can  offer more than one service.  For example, a host can offer
  one service that is the host itself, and another service that  is  the
  host as part of a cluster.

  Service-names identify the services to users of the terminal  servers.
  The  service-name can be the host's node name.  More than one host can
  use the same service-name, letting you identify a cluster of hosts  as
  one  service.   The  fact  that  two  or  more  services have the same
  service-name is transparent to the user.

  The ratings of identically named services determine to which host  the
  connection  will  be  made.   You  can set the rating to be an integer
  between 0 and 255, or  you  can  set  it  to  be  dynamic.   The  host


                                   4-2
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



  periodically updates a dynamic rating to be

                255 - (4 * 15-minute load average)

  When a user requests a connection to a service that is offered by  two
  hosts,  the connection is made to the service with the highest rating.
  Terminal  servers  and  host  services  are  organized  into   logical
  categories  called  groups.   Each  group  is identified by an integer
  between zero and 255 that  controls  access  to  the  service  by  the
  terminal  server.   A service or a terminal server can be in more than
  one group.  Terminal servers can connect only to services  with  which
  they  have  a group in common.  For example, a terminal server that is
  in group 2 (only) can connect to a service only  if  that  service  is
  also  a  member  of  group 2.  By default, all terminal servers are in
  group zero.  Therefore, a service that is in group zero  (the  TOPS-20
  default)  is  accessible  to all terminal servers unless you clear the
  terminal server from group zero.

  At intervals determined by its multicast-timer, each host broadcasts a
  multicast message (a message to all terminal servers on the Ethernet),
  listing the services that the host offers.  This message also contains
  information  about  service-ratings  and  the  host's  groups.  Before
  sending  the  multicast  message,  the  host   updates   any   dynamic
  service-ratings.

  In response to a user request, a terminal server displays  a  list  of
  services  that  consists  of only those services to which the terminal
  server can connect.  Each service is identified by a service-name  and
  a service-identification string.  When the user logs in to the service
  (using the servicename), the host displays the  service-identification
  string.   This  is  a  descriptive  message about the service, such as
  "Node A of cluster ABC".  You can set and change the service-name  and
  service-identification with LCP commands.



  4.2  LOADING AND DUMPING LAT TERMINAL SERVERS
  4.2  LOADING AND DUMPING LAT TERMINAL SERVERS

  You load and dump LAT terminal servers with  the  NCP  LOAD  and  DUMP
                         ________________  ______  _________  _____
  commands.    See  the  DECnet-20/PSI-20  System  Manager's  Guide  for
  information on using these commands.



  4.3  OPR COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN LCP
  4.3  OPR COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN LCP

  Certain OPR commands can be executed from LCP.

        o  ENTER (command subset) name




                                   4-3
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



        o  EXIT (to monitor level)

        o  PUSH (to EXEC level)

        o  RETURN (to Operator Command Level)

        o  TAKE (commands from) file /DISPLAY
                                     /NODISPLAY

        o  WAIT (for) seconds

  These OPR commands are described briefly on the next  page.   You  can
  find complete descriptions of these commands in Chapter 3 (OPR Command
  Descriptions) of this manual.


       Command                            Function
       Command                            Function

       ENTER name         enters another command level such as NCP.

       EXIT               exits from LCP and returns to TOPS-20  command
                          level.  For example:

                              _____ ________
                          OPR>ENTER LCP<RET>
                              _________
                          LCP>EXIT<RET>
                          $



























                                   4-4
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



       Command                            Function
       Command                            Function

       PUSH               exits LCP enters a new TOPS-20 command  level.
                          You  can then perform any software task or run
                          a utility.  To return, give  the  TOPS-20  POP
                          command.  For example:

                              _________
                          LCP>PUSH<RET>

                           TOPS-20 Command processor 7.0(186)
                           ___________
                          @ENABLE<RET>
                           ___________
                          $DUMPER<RET>
                          DUMPER>
                               .
                               .
                                 _________
                          DUMPER>EXIT<RET>
                           ________
                          $POP<RET>
                          LCP>

       RETURN             returns immediately to OPR command level.  You
                          do  not  lose any commands or actions that you
                          specified in LCP.

                              ___________
                          LCP>RETURN<RET>
                          OPR>

       TAKE input-filespec

                          executes a series of  commands  in  a  command
                          file  automatically.  The commands in the TAKE
                          command file can be both OPR and LCP commands.

                              ____ ____________
                          LCP>TAKE LCP.CMD<RET>
                          LCP>

                          The TAKE command works in LCP the same way  as
                          in  OPR.   You can specify either the /DISPLAY
                          switch  or   the   /NODISPLAY   switch.    The
                          /NODISPLAY switch is the default if you do not
                          specify either switch.

       WAIT n             waits from 1 to 60  seconds  before  executing
                          the  next  command.   This  is useful when you
                          TAKE (see above) commands from a file, to give
                          each command time to execute.



  4.4  LCP COMMANDS
  4.4  LCP COMMANDS

  The LAT Control Program (LCP) enables you to control and  monitor  LAT


                                   4-5
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



  activity  associated  with the host on which you are running LCP.  For
  example, LCP commands:

        o  Clear LAT parameters.

        o  Set LAT parameters.

        o  Show the current parameters,  terminal  connections,  counter
           and server information.

        o  Change certain counter settings to zero.

  This chapter explains how to enter and exit LCP, and describes the LCP
  commands listed below.

        o  CLEAR

        o  SET

        o  SHOW

        o  START

        o  STOP

        o  ZERO

                                    WARNING

               The LCP commands described in  this  chapter  can
               seriously  affect system performance.  If you are
               not sure of what you are doing, do  not  use  LCP
               commands to set or clear LAT parameters.

  You start the LCP program from within OPR.  To enter LCP use  the  OPR
  command, ENTER, as shown below.

           _____ ________
       OPR>ENTER LCP<RET>

       LCP>

  There are three ways to exit LCP:

        o  You can exit LCP and return to OPR command level.

        o  You can exit LCP and return to monitor command level.

        o  You can exit LCP by entering another command level, such as
           NCP.

  To return to OPR command level, use the RETURN command as below:


                                   4-6
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS



           ___________
       LCP>RETURN<RET>

       OPR>

  To return to EXEC command level, use the EXIT command as below:

           _________
       LCP>EXIT<RET>


  The LCP commands are in alphabetical order on the following pages.











































                                   4-7
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                 (CLEAR)
                                 (CLEAR)


  CLEAR - Clearing LAT host parameters
  CLEAR - Clearing LAT host parameters



  Function
  Function

       The CLEAR  command  resets  parameters  specified  with  the  SET
       command.


  Format
  Format

       LCP>CLEAR keyword argument<RET>

       Keywords:

                          _          _
                    /    |            | \
            GROUPS / n   |,n1, ....   |  \
                   \ m:n |,m1:n1, ....|  /
                    \    |_          _| /
            IDENTIFICATION
                     /               \
            MAXIMUM / ACTIVE-CIRCUITS \
                    \ SESSIONS        /
                     \               /
            MULTICAST-TIMER
            NUMBER
                        /     \
            RETRANSMIT / LIMIT \
                       \ TIMER /
                        \     /
            SERVICE-NAME text


  Keywords
  Keywords

       GROUPS n           clears the specified GROUPS setting.  You  can
                          clear the current setting for single groups or
                          a range of groups.  You can specify  a  number
                          from 0 to 255, a range of numbers (m:n) from 0
                          to 255, or a list of both.

                          For example:

                          CLEAR GROUPS 7

                          CLEAR GROUPS 8:10, 22

       IDENTIFICATION     resets the host identification information  to
                          the system banner as defined in MONNAM.TXT.


                                   4-8
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                 (CLEAR)
                                 (CLEAR)


       MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS

                          changes to 20 the maximum  number  of  virtual
                          circuits  that can simultaneously be connected
                          to your host.

       MAXIMUM SESSIONS   changes  the  maximum  number  of  active  LAT
                          terminals allowed to connect to the host.  The
                          new  value  is  the  maximum  number  of   LAT
                          terminals   allowed   in   the   host   system
                          configuration.

       MULTICAST-TIMER    changes   the   time   period   set   on   the
                          multicast-timer    to    30    seconds.    The
                          multicast-timer  specifies  the  interval   at
                          which  the  host transmits a multicast message
                          announcing host services that are available to
                          LAT terminal servers.

       NUMBER             resets the host identification number to  that
                          specified in n-CONFIG.CMD.

       RETRANSMIT LIMIT   changes to 30 the number of times that  a  LAT
                          host can retransmit unacknowledged messages to
                          the   server.    After   the   last    message
                          transmission,   the  host  detaches  all  jobs
                          associated with the virtual  circuit  to  that
                          server.

       RETRANSMIT TIMER   changes  the   setting   of   the   LAT   host
                          retransmit-timer   to   1000  milliseconds  (1
                          second).  The retransmit-timer  specifies  the
                          amount of time before the host retransmits any
                          unacknowledged  messages   to   the   terminal
                          server.

       SERVICE-NAME text  cancels the service identified by service-name
                          text.   The  CLEAR  SERVICE-NAME  command also
                          clears   all   RATING    and    IDENTIFICATION
                          information associated with service text.

                                               NOTE

                              If   there   is   only   one   service
                              associated  with  a  host,  you cannot
                              CLEAR that service.







                                   4-9
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                 (CLEAR)
                                 (CLEAR)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You no longer wish the host to serve groups 2, 4, 14, 15, 16,
           or 20.

               _____ ______ _________________
           LCP>CLEAR GROUPS 2,4,14:16,20<RET>
           LCP>

       2.  You reset the multicast timer to the default value.

               _____ ____________________
           LCP>CLEAR MULTICAST-TIMER<RET>
           LCP>

       3.  You no longer wish the host to provide the service named
           KLUDGE.

               _____ ____________ ___________
           LCP>CLEAR SERVICE-NAME KLUDGE<RET>
           LCP>



































                                   4-10
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SET)
                                  (SET)


  SET - Setting LAT host parameters
  SET - Setting LAT host parameters




  Function
  Function

       You can  specify  LCP  parameters  with  the  SET  command.   The
       parameters that you can set and the LCP commands to do it are:

        o  Host Id                     SET IDENTIFICATION

        o  Host Number                 SET NUMBER

        o  Maximum Active Circuits     SET MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS

        o  Maximum Sessions            SET MAXIMUM SESSIONS

        o  Retransmit Limit            SET RETRANSMIT LIMIT

        o  Retransmit Timer            SET RETRANSMIT TIMER

        o  Multicast Timer             SET MULTICAST-TIMER

        o  Groups                      SET GROUPS

        o  Service Name(rating)        SET SERVICE-NAME/RATING:

        o  Service Id                  SET SERVICE-NAME /IDENTIFICATION:

       You can clear the current settings for each of  these  parameters
       with the CLEAR command.


  Format
  Format

       LCP>SET keyword argument /switch<RET>

       where keyword, argument, and switch syntax is:

                        _          _
                  /    |            | \
          GROUPS / n   |,n1, ....   |  \
                 \ m:n |,m1:n1, ....|  /
                  \    |_          _| /
          IDENTIFICATION "quoted string"
                   /                  \
          MAXIMUM / ACTIVE-CIRCUITS n  \
                  \ SESSIONS n         /
                   \                  /
          MULTICAST-TIMER n


                                   4-11
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SET)
                                  (SET)


          NUMBER n
                      /       \
          RETRANSMIT / LIMIT n \
                     \ TIMER n /
                      \       /
                                     _         _                   _ _
                                    |         |                     | |
          SERVICE-NAME service-name |/RATING: |n                    | |
                                    |         |DYNAMIC              | |
                                    |         |_                   _| |
                                    |/IDENTIFICATION:"quoted string"  |
                                    |_                               _|


  Keywords
  Keywords

       GROUPS n             specifies for the host a group, a  range  of
                            groups,  or  a  list  that  can contain both
                            single  groups  and  group   ranges.    Only
                            terminal servers that have the corresponding
                            groups set can connect to the host.   Groups
                            can  be  integers  from  0  to 255.  You can
                            specify any combination of ranges or  single
                            numbers,  separated  by commas.  Zero is the
                            default.  For example:

                                 SET GROUPS 7:9, 22, 45:49
                                 SET GROUPS 8, 12, 14:17

       IDENTIFICATION "quoted string"

                            specifies host  identification  information.
                            This    host    identification   is   purely
                            descriptive, and is  displayed  when  a  LAT
                            terminal  server  displays information about
                            the host node.  You can specify a string  of
                            up  to  64  characters.  You can include any
                            printable characters.  You must enclose  the
                            string  in  double  quotes (").  This string
                            defaults to the  system  banner  defined  in
                            MONNAM.TXT

       MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS n

                            sets  the  maximum  number  of  LAT  virtual
                            circuits  that  can  exist simultaneously at
                            the host.  MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS can be an
                            integer  between  1 and 173, inclusive.  The
                            default is 20.

       MAXIMUM SESSIONS n   sets  the  maximum  number  of  active   LAT


                                   4-12
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SET)
                                  (SET)


                            terminals  that can be connected to the host
                            at one time.   MAXIMUM SESSIONS  can  be  an
                            integer  between  1  and 50, inclusive.  The
                            default is the maximum number  of  terminals
                            allowed in your system configuration.

       MULTICAST-TIMER n    sets the interval (in seconds) at which  the
                            host  transmits  to  all servers a multicast
                            message announcing  the  services  available
                            from   that   host.    You   can   set   the
                            MULTICAST-TIMER to an integer between 8  and
                            48, inclusive.  The default is 30 seconds.

         NUMBER n           specifies  a  unique   host   identification
                            number.

         RETRANSMIT LIMIT n sets the maximum number of  times  that  the
                            host  retransmits unacknowledged messages to
                            the server.  If the  final  transmission  is
                            not acknowledged, the host detaches all jobs
                            associated with the virtual circuit  to  the
                            server.   The  RETRANSMIT LIMIT  can  be  an
                            integer between 0 and  64,  inclusive.   The
                            default is 60.

         RETRANSMIT TIMER n sets the host retransmit-timer.  This  timer
                            determines    the   amount   of   time   (in
                            milliseconds) before  the  host  retransmits
                            any  unacknowledged  messages to the server.
                            The  RETRANSMIT TIMER  can  be  set  to   an
                            integer  between  100 (.1 second) and 100000
                            (100  seconds).    The   default   is   2000
                            milliseconds (1 second).

         SERVICE-NAME text  specifies that the  host  offers  a  service
                            named  text.   Users  select the name of the
                            service, rather than the name  of  the  host
                            when  they  request the server to initiate a
                            terminal session.  The  SERVICE-NAME  (text)
                            can  be  up  to  16 characters long, and can
                            contain any alphanumeric characters,  dollar
                            sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_).


  Switches
  Switches

                 _     _
                |       |
       /RATING: |n      |
                |DYNAMIC|
                |_     _|


                                   4-13
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SET)
                                  (SET)


                          specifies the rating assigned to the  service.
                          When you select a service name that is used by
                          more  than  one  available  host,  the  server
                          connects  you  to  the  host  with the highest
                          rating.  You can specify n as  an  integer  in
                          the range 0-255, inclusive, or you can specify
                          DYNAMIC.  When you  use  the  SET  command  to
                          specify a service but do not specify a rating,
                          the default rating is zero.

       /IDENTIFICATION: "quoted string"

                          specifies  a  descriptive  phrase  that   will
                          display  when  a  user connects to the service
                          (specified by SERVICE-NAME).  You can  specify
                          a  string  of  up  to  64 characters.  You can
                          include any printable  characters.   You  must
                          enclose the string in double quotes (").


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You wish the host to serve groups 2, 4, 14, 15, 16, and 20.

               ___ ______ _________________
           LCP>SET GROUPS 2,4,14:16,20<RET>
           LCP>

       2.  You set the host to retransmit unacknowledged messages 30
           times.

               ___ ________________ _______
           LCP>SET RETRANSMIT-LIMIT 30<RET>
           LCP>

       3.  You set the identification string for a service named  ALPHA,
           and allow the service-rating to default to DYNAMIC.

               ___ ____________ ______________________________
           LCP>SET SERVICE-NAME ABClustr/IDENTIFICATION:-<RET>
           ______ __ ______________
           "Alpha of ABClustr"<RET>
           LCP>




  SHOW - Displaying LAT Host and Terminal Server Parameters
  SHOW - Displaying LAT Host and Terminal Server Parameters

  The SHOW command displays the following LAT information:

        o  Dynamic and permanent parameters of the LAT host

        o  Active LAT terminal server connections to the LAT host



                                   4-14
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SHOW)
                                  (SHOW)


        o  Server information

        o  Counter information


  Format
  Format

       LCP>SHOW keyword /switch argument<RET>

       Keywords:

            CHARACTERISTICS
            COUNTERS [/SERVER:server-name]
            HOST-INITIATED-REQUESTS
            PENDING-REQUESTS
                    _         _
                   |           |
            SERVER |server-name|
                   |/ALL       |
                   |_         _|
            SESSIONS


  Keywords
  Keywords

       CHARACTERISTICS    displays the dynamic parameters  and  many  of
                          the permanent LAT parameters.

       COUNTERS           displays the counter totals for all servers on
                          the system.

                          To  display  the  counters  for  a  particular
                          server,  use the /SERVER:  switch and supply a
                          server name.

       HOST-INITIATED-REQUESTS

                          displays all the currently active outgoing LAT
                          connections.

       PENDING-REQUESTS   displays all the  currently  pending  outgoing
                          LAT connections.

       SERVER server-name displays information about  the  servers  that
                          have  connected  to  the local LAT host.  SHOW
                          SERVER with no switch displays  a  summary  of
                          server  information including the server name,
                          number  and  Ethernet  address.   SHOW  SERVER
                          followed  by a server name displays additional
                          information   about   the   specified   server
                          including  the  server  location, type, status


                                   4-15
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SHOW)
                                  (SHOW)


                          and timers.

            server-name   specifies the  server  for  which  to  display
                          information.

       SESSIONS           displays information  about  the  current  LAT
                          terminal connections including:

                           o  Job number

                           o  Line number

                           o  Program name

                           o  Server name

                           o  Port name

                           o  User


  Switches
  Switches

       /SERVER: server-name

                          displays counters for  the  specified  server.
                          You  must  specify  a  server  name  with this
                          switch.  Use this switch only  with  the  SHOW
                          COUNTERS command.

            server-name   specifies the  server  for  which  to  display
                          information.

       /ALL               displays   summary   information   about   the
                          specified  server.   Use this switch only with
                          the SHOW SERVER command.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You display the LAT host parameters.

               ____ ____________________
           LCP>SHOW CHARACTERISTICS<RET>
           LCP>
           13:12:44 [LCP]  -- Host Characteristics --

           LAT Access State: ON
           Host Name: CLOYD
           Host id: Cloyd, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(20172)
           Host number: 140
           Retransmit Limit: 60


                                   4-16
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SHOW)
                                  (SHOW)


           Retransmit Timer: 1000
           Multicast Timer: 30
           Groups: 3:4,7,10,18,21:23,29,45,47

                                Current   Maximum
                                -------   -------
           Allocated circuits      12        32
           Active circuits          9        32
           Sessions                16       128

           Service name   Rating        Identification
           ------------   ------   ------------------------
              CLOYD         1      CLOYD - The toe tag has been removed
              TOPS20        D      Software Engineering Cluster
           LCP>

       2.  You display a list of all LAT terminal sessions connected to
           the host.

               ____ _______ _________
           LCP>SHOW SESSION /ALL<RET>
           LCP>
           13:13:18 [LCP]  -- Active LAT Sessions --

           Job Line Program   Server Name       Port Name     User
           --- ---- ------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------
           140  326 EXEC    LAT95            RASPUZZI_2       RASPUZZI
           141  327 EXEC    LAT96            DAWN_EVANS       EVANS
           134  330 EXEC    LAT1             GREG_SCOTT       GSCOTT
           133  331 EXEC    LAT99            H_MAYBERRY       MAYBERRY
           138  333 EXEC    LAT1             J_DUSSEAULT      DUSSEAULT
           142  334 EXEC    LAT1             D_LOMARTIRE      LOMARTIRE
           144  335 EXEC    LAT1             TIPH_WORLEY      WORLEY
           145  336 MS      LAT1             LAT1_PORT23      GAGNE
           146  337 EXEC    LAT98            JACK_WONG        WONG
           147  340 OPR     LAT97            E_BROWN          EBROWN
           148  341 EMACS   LAT92            RUTH_FONG        FONG
           149  342 EXEC    LAT1             JIM_MCCOLLUM     MCCOLLUM
           151  343 EXEC    LAT308           TSN_IN_308_1     KSTEVENS
           152  345 EXEC    LAT49            DIALIN_49_17     WORLEY
           LCP>

       3.  You display information about LAT terminal server CICERO.

               ____ ______ ___________
           LCP>SHOW SERVER CICERO<RET>
           LCP>
           16:57:39       [LCP] Information about server CICERO

           Server Number: 6
           Server Location: MRO1-2 Pole J9
           Server Type: Ethernet Terminal Server
           Ethernet Address: AA-00-03-00-01-0E


                                   4-17
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (SHOW)
                                  (SHOW)


           Server Status: Connected
           Max Slots: 33
           Data Link Size: 1514
           Circuit Timer(ms): 80
           Keep-alive Timer(s): 12
           LCP>

       4.  You display the counters for LAT terminal server CICERO.

               ____ ________ ________ ___________
           LCP>SHOW COUNTERS /SERVER: CICERO<RET>
           LCP>
           16:57:00       [LCP] Counters for server CICERO

           Messages received: 1315
           Messages transmitted: 1398
           Messages retransmitted: 0
           Sequence errors received: 0
           Illegal messages received: 0
           Illegal slots received: 0
           Resource failures: 0
           LCP>

       5.  You  display  the  counters  for  all  LAT  terminal  servers
           connected to the host.

               ____ _____________
           LCP>SHOW COUNTERS<RET>
           LCP>
           16:57:13       [LCP] Counter totals for all servers

           Messages received: 7502
           Messages transmitted: 8167
           Messages retransmitted: 0
           Sequence errors received: 0
           Illegal messages received: 0
           Illegal slots received: 0
           Resource failures: 0
           LCP>
















                                   4-18
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                 (START)
                                 (START)


  START - Making the LAT Host Available
  START - Making the LAT Host Available



  Function
  Function

       The  START  command  notifies  all  servers  that  the  host   is
       available,  and  sets  the  LAT-ACCESS-STATE to ON.  See the STOP
       command for information about restricting  access  to  the  local
       host.


  Format
  Format

       LCP>START<RET>






































                                   4-19
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (STOP)
                                  (STOP)


  STOP - Making the LAT Host Unavailable
  STOP - Making the LAT Host Unavailable


  Function
  Function

       The STOP command terminates all existing  LAT  terminal  sessions
       and  rejects  any  new  connections  from servers.  See the START
       command for information on permitting access to the local host.


  Format
  Format

       LCP>STOP<RET>








































                                   4-20
                                LCP COMMANDS
                               LCP COMMANDS
                                  (ZERO)
                                  (ZERO)


  ZERO - Resetting LAT Counters to Zero
  ZERO - Resetting LAT Counters to Zero



  Function
  Function

       The ZERO COUNTERS command changes specified LAT counters to zero.


  Format
  Format

       LCP>ZERO keyword /switch argument<RET>


  Keyword:

       ZERO [/SERVER: server-name]


  Switch
  Switch

       /SERVER:           sets the counters for a particular  server  to
                          zero.    This   switch  does  not  affect  the
                          counters for the combined server totals.   You
                          must specify a server name with this switch.


            server-name   specifies the server  for  which  to  set  the
                          counters to zero.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You reset all counters to zero.

               ____ _____________
           LCP>ZERO COUNTERS<RET>
           LCP>

       2.  You reset counters for LAT terminal server CICERO to zero.

               ____ ________ ___________________
           LCP>ZERO COUNTERS /SERVER:CICERO<RET>
           LCP>











                                   4-21

























































                                   5-1












                                CHAPTER 5
                                CHAPTER 5

                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS



  5.1  INTRODUCTION
  5.1  INTRODUCTION

  The commands in this chapter  must  be  given  with  a  ^E  (<CTRL/E>)
  preceding  the command and these commands can affect the entire system
  or a specific user.  Thus, these commands  are  called  ^E  Privileged
  Commands.

  Because these commands can easily destroy your system security,  their
  usage  is  restricted  to users who have WHEEL or OPERATOR capability.
  WHEEL capability  allows  you  to  execute  all  privileged  commands.
  OPERATOR capability allows you to execute only the privileged commands
  relevant to system operations.

  WHEEL and OPERATOR capabilities can be  granted  when  you  create  or
  change  a  directory.   Normally,  the  user  name OPERATOR, which you
  should be using, has the OPERATOR capability.

  Before you can successfully issue a privileged command, you must  type
  the  ENABLE  command  to  enable  your capabilities.  If you are using
  recognition input, the command is ENABLE (CAPABILITIES).  Once you are
  enabled, the prompt character changes from @ to $.  For example,

        ______ ___________________
       @ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)<RET>
       $

                                   NOTE

          Even if you do not have WHEEL or OPERATOR  capability,
          ENABLE changes the prompt to $.

  Once you are at privileged  command  level,  you  must  type  <CTRL/E>
  before  each  command.   The  <CTRL/E>  prints as ^E on your terminal.
  Then type the remainder of the command.  There are nine (9) privileged
  commands and most of them have subcommands.

  If you do not have the privileges needed to execute the command or you
  have not typed ENABLE, you get the message:


                                   5-1
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS



       ?Unrecognized command

  and your terminal is at operating system command level.

  When  you  complete  a  privileged  command,  disable   your   special
  capabilities  by  typing  DISABLE.  The prompt character changes to @.
  For example,

        ____________
       $DISABLE<RET>
       @

                                   NOTE

          It is very important that you give the DISABLE command
          after  you  use  a privileged command.  This safeguard
          protects you against accidentally damaging part of the
          system.

  In the following sections of  each  privileged  command,  <CTRL/E>  is
  indicated by ^E.  Where you would press the RETURN key is indicated by
  the <RET> symbol.  You can abbreviate a privileged command  by  typing
  as  few  of the beginning characters as are needed to make the command
  unique.  Recognition with  guide  words  is  given  with  the  command
  formats.

  You can easily get a list of all ^E commands by typing ENABLE<RET> AND
  THEN  <CTRL/E>?   (question  mark).   The following is printed on your
  terminal.

        ___________
       @ENABLE<RET>
       $^E? one of the following:
          CEASE  CREATE    DEFINE    EDDT      PRINT     QUIT      SEND
          SET    SPEAK
       $



  5.2  PRIVILEGED COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
  5.2  PRIVILEGED COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

  The following descriptions of the ^E privileged commands are listed in
  alphabetical order.












                                   5-2
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECEASE)
                                (^ECEASE)


  ^ECEASE - Scheduling System Shutdown
  ^ECEASE - Scheduling System Shutdown



  Function
  Function

       The ^ECEASE command schedules system shutdown at a specified time
       to end timesharing.


  Format
  Format

       ^ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) downtime (RESUMING AT) uptime


  Arguments
  Arguments

       downtime           NOW
                          TODAY +hh:mm
                          day-of-week +hh:mm
                          +hh:mm
                          date-and-time

                          Legal formats for dates are:

                          FRIDAY
                          6 DEC 79
                          7-APR-79
                          11 JULY 1979
                          24-OCTOBER-1979
                          NOV 26, 79
                          APRIL 30, 1979

                          Other date formats might be accepted; however,
                          they  are  not  recommended  because  of their
                          ambiguity.

                          Legal formats for times are:

                          +1:00                (1 hour from now)
                          day-of-week +8:00    (8 hours after midnight)
                          1630                 (4:30 p.m.)
                          1200                 (noon)
                          116                  (1:16 a.m.)
                          16:30                (4:30 p.m.)
                          00:00                (midnight)
                          1:12:13              (13 seconds after 1:12
                          a.m.)
                          23:59:59             (1 second before
                          midnight)



                                   5-3
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECEASE)
                                (^ECEASE)


       uptime             date and time given in the same format as  for
                          downtime.  The uptime argument is optional and
                          does not need to be specified.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       After you type the ^ECEASE command and press RETURN,  the  system
       outputs  the name of the system to be shutdown (displayed only if
|       the system is part of a DECnet or INTERNET network) and the  time
       of the scheduled shutdown.  For example:

            BADGER Shutdown scheduled for 4-Apr-84 18:00:00

       If the output is not what you expected, type CTRL/C to abort  the
       command.  Otherwise, confirm the command by pressing RETURN.

       When the command is in effect, downtime and uptime, if specified,
       are  reported to users when they first type CTRL/C or RETURN on a
       terminal.  They receive a message similar to:

            System shutdown scheduled for 22-Apr-84 18:00:00,
            Up again at 22-Apr-84 20:00:00

       When you issue the command,  you  and  users  already  logged  in
       receive one of the following messages.

       If downtime is more than one hour away, the  message  is  similar
       to:

            [System going down at 2-Apr-84 11:30:00]

       If the downtime is 60 or  fewer  minutes  away,  the  message  is
       similar to:

            [System going down in 30 minutes at 2-Apr-84 11:30:00]

       When the downtime is one minute away, the message is:

            [System going down in one minute!!]

       One of the preceding messages is also printed at hourly intervals
       before  downtime  and  30  minutes,  15  minutes,  10  minutes, 5
       minutes, and 1 minute before downtime to indicate how long it  is
       before the actual shutdown.

       In addition, if:

        o  your system is part of a CFS cluster   AND




                                   5-4
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECEASE)
                                (^ECEASE)


        o  any other system in the cluster has access  to  any  of  your
           disks through the MSCP server   AND

        o  you issue this command  with  downtime  scheduled  within  60
           minutes

       the following message appears on the CTY and on the  terminal  of
       anyone who is running OPR:

            Check other cluster systems for possible structure dismount
            instructions.

       If your system is part of a CFS cluster and another system in the
       cluster  has  access  to your disks as described above, the above
       message also appears on the CTY and on the terminal of anyone who
       is  running OPR at 30 minutes, 15 minutes, 10 minutes, 5 minutes,
                                              _______  __________  _____
       and 1 minute before downtime.  See the TOPS-20  Operator's  Guide
       for more information.

       When downtime is reached, if you specified uptime, a message such
       as the following is printed.

            [System down, up again at 2-Apr-84 12:00:00]

       When downtime occurs, SHUTDOWN COMPLETE is printed  on  the  CTY.
       All jobs are then logged out, except the CTY, so PTYCON continues
       to run.  Processes under  SYSJOB  continue  to  run,  but  PTYCON
       subjobs  are  logged  out.   Then,  no further LOGINs are allowed
       except from the CTY.

       To cancel an existing plan for a shutdown, type ^ECEASE and press
       RETURN.  Then you and all users receive the message:

            [Shutdown cancelled]

       If you do not know the uptime, omit it by pressing  RETURN  after
       (RESUMING AT).  The message output to users before they log in is
       similar to:

            System shutdown scheduled for 2-Apr-84 16:30:00

       The uptime is  only  informational;  it  does  not  initiate  any
       automatic  startup.  To resume timesharing, you should use ^ESEND
       to say that the system is being reloaded, enter the  PARSER  with
       <CTRL/\>, type SHUTDOWN, and reload via a load switch.


  Hints
  Hints

       After giving the command, look at the output message to check the
       dates  and  times.  The output times are based on a 24-hour clock


                                   5-5
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECEASE)
                                (^ECEASE)


       for example, twelve is  added  to  the  hours  between  noon  and
       midnight.  The times are given as hh:mm:ss, where hh is the hour,
       mm is the minute, and ss is the second.

       If you use AM or PM in the time, do not put a space before either
       of  them.  For example, 6:00 PM causes the error message "INVALID
       DATE FORMAT" explained in the Restrictions  section  below.   You
       must use 6:00PM.

       For the time, you must specify minutes if you are also specifying
       hours,  for  example, for 6p.m.  you must use 6:00PM or 1800.  If
       you use 6PM, it is interpreted as 12:06p.m..

       If you give the command with an incorrect date  or  time,  retype
       the command correctly.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       Error messages associated with the ^ECEASE command are:

       ?Downtime has already passed

            The time you specified for downtime has already gone by.

       ?Downtime cannot be more than 7 days in the future

            You specified a downtime that was too far in the future.

       ?Invalid date format

            You typed an unacceptable date or you typed a  space  before
            AM  or  PM,  which  causes  the  time  specified  not  to be
            recognized as time format.

       ?Invalid time format

            You typed an unacceptable time.

       ?Timesharing will resume before it ends

            You typed an uptime that comes before the downtime.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  By using recognition input and typing ?, you get  the  prompt
           for downtime:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            _______ ____________ ___ _
           $^ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) ? Date/time, or NOW for immediately,


                                   5-6
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECEASE)
                                (^ECEASE)


            or null to cancel shutdown
            or "+" to enter amount of time from now
            or day of the week or TODAY

           Then, if you type ?  for uptime, you get:

           (RESUMING AT) ? Date and time of restart of null if unknown
            or "+" to enter amount of time from now
            or day of the week or TODAY

       2.  To stop timesharing at 6 p.m.  on July 16, 1984, and have  it
           resume at 8 p.m.  the same day:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            _______ ____________ ___ __ ___ __ ____ ______
           $^ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) 16 JUL 88 1800 -<RET>
           _________ ___ __ ___ __ _________
           (RESUMING AT) 16 JUL 84 2000<RET>
            GIDNEY Shutdown scheduled for 16-Jul-84 18:00:00
                    _____
           [Confirm]<RET>
           [System going down at 16-Jul-84 18:00:00]
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>

       3.  To stop timesharing at the end of the day July 23,  1984  and
           resume at noon July 24, 1984.

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            _______ _________ _______ _________ ____________
           $^ECEASE 24-JUL-84 12:00AM 24-JUL-84 12:00PM<RET>
            BOSTON Shutdown scheduled for 24-Jul-84 00:00:00
                    _____
           [Confirm]<RET>
           [System going down at 24-Jul-84 00:00:00]
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>

       4.  To stop timesharing one hour from the  current  time  without
           knowing when the system resumes timesharing:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            _______ __________
           $^ECEASE +1:00<RET>
            Shutdown scheduled for 4-Apr-84 16:30:00
                    _____
           [Confirm]<RET>
           [System going down in 60 minutes at 4-Apr-84 16:30:00]
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>

       5.  To cancel a shutdown:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ____________
           $^ECEASE<RET>
           [Shutdown cancelled]
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @





                                   5-7
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


  ^ECREATE - Creating/Removing Directories
  ^ECREATE - Creating/Removing Directories



  Function
  Function

       The ^ECREATE command is used to:

       1.  Create a directory for a user.

       2.  Create a files-only directory.

       3.  Create a directory on a mountable structure.

       4.  Change the parameters for an existing directory.

       5.  Remove a user from the system.

       6.  Remove a user and his files from the system.


  Format
  Format

       ^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) structure:<directory>

       or

       ^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) structure:<directory>
                                              (PASSWORD) password


  Arguments
  Arguments

       structure:         specifies the 1- to  6-character  alphanumeric
                          name  or  logical  name  for  the structure on
                          which you want to create or alter a directory.
                          You  must  type  a  colon  (:) after the name.
                          Also, you must MOUNT the structure using  this
                          name,  unless  the  structure  is  the  public
                          structure   or   an   unregulated   structure.
                          (Regulated   and  unregulated  structures  are
                          discussed in Chapter 3, in the  SET  STRUCTURE
                          command  description.)  If  you do not specify
                          structure:,  you  can  create   or   alter   a
                          directory    on    your    currently-connected
                          structure.  If you have  not  connected  to  a
                          specific   structure,  you  are  connected  by
                          default to the public structure.  Note that  a
                          user  must  have  a  directory  on  the public
                          structure to be able to log in.



                                   5-8
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


       <directory>        specifies the name of the directory  that  you
                          want  to create or alter.  The name is 1 to 39
                          alphanumeric  characters,  including  hyphens,
                          underlines, and dollar signs.  Angle or square
                          brackets must enclose the name.  This name  is
                          used  when  a  user  tries  to  log  in to the
                          system,  connect  to  a  directory,  access  a
                          directory,  or  change  directory  parameters.
                          You can use recognition on this  name  if  the
                          directory already exists.

       password           specifies 1 to 39 letters, digits, or hyphens.
                          You  can omit the password here and specify it
                          later in  a  subcommand.   You  can  omit  the
                          password    completely    for   a   files-only
                          directory.  The password is used when  a  user
                          tries  to  log  in to the system, connect to a
                          directory,  access  a  directory,  or   change
                          directory parameters.

  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       To create a directory on a structure, the directory name  in  the
       ^ECREATE  command  must  be different from any existing directory
       name on the structure and must be enclosed in angle brackets.  If
       the  directory name contains one or more periods (.), for example
       <T.YOW>, the directory is a subdirectory.  Before you can  create
       a  subdirectory, you must first create its superior directory, in
       this case <T>.  You can determine the superior  directory  for  a
       subdirectory   by   using   the  name  of  the  subdirectory  and
       eliminating the last period (.) and the characters after it.  For
       example,  the  superior  directory for <FP.BONS> is <FP>, and the
       superior directory for <R.ACE.LT.MEM> is <R.ACE.LT>.

       After you type the ^ECREATE command using either format and press
       RETURN, the system outputs [NEW] or [OLD] on the next line and $$
       on the following line.  Be sure you check this output.  If  [NEW]
       is  printed,  you are creating a directory.  If [OLD] is printed,
       you are altering an existing directory.  If  the  output  is  not
       what  you  expected,  type  ABORT<RET>  and  retype  the ^ECREATE
       command.  The $$ (double-dollar-signs)  indicates  that  you  can
       give  a  subcommand  or  press RETURN to finish the command.  The
       ^ECREATE subcommands are  described  under  Subcommands  in  this
       section.

       If  you  are  creating  a  directory  and  you  press  RETURN  at
       subcommand  level  without  giving  any subcommands, you create a
       directory with default parameters.  (Refer to Table 5-1  in  this
       section for the default parameters.)

       For example, using recognition input,


                                   5-9
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


             ________                  __________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TES><RET>
            [New]
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       or simply

             ________ __________
            $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
            [New]
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       If you use the second format of the ^ECREATE command (see  Format
       section  below),  to  create  a directory and you press RETURN at
       subcommand level without giving any  subcommands,  you  create  a
       directory with default parameters except for the password.

       For example,

             ________                  _____            ________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TES> (PASSWORD) XAP<RET>
            [New]
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       or simply

             ________ _____ ________
            $^ECREATE <TES> XAP<RET>
            [New]
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       To change the password for an existing  directory,  you  can  use
       either ^ECREATE command format.  However, one format requires the
       PASSWORD subcommand.  For example,

             ________ ___________            __________
            $^ECREATE SQM:<HOGAN> (PASSWORD) JOHNQ<RET>
            [Old]
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       or

             ________ ________________
            $^ECREATE SQM:<HOGAN><RET>
            [Old]
              ________ __________
            $$PASSWORD JOHNQ<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       Also, see Hint under PASSWORD subcommand,  described  later,  for
       another way of changing a password.



                                   5-10
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


  Subcommands
  Subcommands

       To create a directory with some nondefault parameters or to alter
       some directory parameters of an existing directory, you must give
       the appropriate  subcommands  to  ^ECREATE.   You  can  list  the
       subcommands  available  with  ^ECREATE  by  typing a ?  (question
       mark) at subcommand level.

        ________ _____________
       $^ECREATE <SAMPLE><RET>
       [New]
         _
       $$? confirm with carriage return
         or one of the following:
|        ABORT                            ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
        ACCOUNT-DEFAULT                  ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
        CONFIDENTIAL                     DECNET-ACCESS
        DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION          DIRECTORY-GROUP
        DISABLE                          ENABLE
        ENQ-DEQ                          FILES-ONLY
|        GENERATIONS                      INTERNET-ACCESS
|        INTERNET-WIZARD                  IPCF
        KILL                             LIST
        MAINTENANCE                      MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
        NOT                              NUMBER
        OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT       ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT
        OPERATOR                         PASSWORD
        PERMANENT                        PRESERVE
        PROTECTION                       PUSH
        REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES            SEMI-OPERATOR
        SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP          TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER...
        USER-OF-GROUP                    WHEEL
        WORKING
       $$





















                                   5-11
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


  Table 5-1:  Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands
  Table 5-1:  Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands

  _____________________________________________________________________

  Subcommand                         Default   Help Text
  _____________________________________________________________________

  ABORT                               -        <RET>(1)
|  ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS          NOT       <RET>
     (CAPABILITY)
  ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN)        NONE SET  DEFAULT ACCOUNT
                                               FOR USERS LOGGING
                                               INTO THIS DIRECTORY
  ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES       NOT       <RET>
  CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION
       ACCESS CAPABILITY)            NOT       <RET>
  DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)         NOT       <RET>
  DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION
       (NUMBER)                      777700    6-DIGIT OCTAL NUMBER
  DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER)           NONE SET  DECIMAL GROUP NUMBER
  DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)             ENABLE    <RET>
  ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)              ENABLE    <RET>
  ENQ-DEQ (CAPABILITY)               NOT       <RET>
  FILES-ONLY                         NOT       <RET>
  GENERATIONS (TO KEEP)              1         DECIMAL NUMBER OF
                                               GENERATIONS TO
                                               RETAIN PER FILE
|  INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)       NOT       <RET>
|  INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)       NOT       <RET>
  IPCF (CAPABILITY)                  NOT       <RET>
  KILL (THIS DIRECTORY)               -        <RET>
  LIST                                -        ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
                                               FAST NAME-ONLY VERBOSE
  MAINTENANCE (CAPABILITY)           NOT
  MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES             NONE SET  DECIMAL NUMBER OF
       (ALLOWED)                               SUBDIRECTORIES ALLOWED
                                               UNDER THIS DIRECTORY
  NOT                                 -        ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
                                               ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS
                                               ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED...
                                               ARPANET-ACCESS
                                               ARPANET-WIZARD
                                               CONFIDENTIAL
                                               DECNET-ACCESS
                                               DIRECTORY-GROUP
                                               ENQ-DEQ
                                               FILES-ONLY
                                               IPCF
                                               KILL

  (1) <RET> in this column means to press the RETURN key.


                                   5-12
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


  Table 5-1 (Cont.) Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands
  Table 5-1 (Cont.) Summary of ^ECREATE Subcommands

  _____________________________________________________________________

  Subcommand                         Default   Help Text
  _____________________________________________________________________

                                               MAINTENANCE
                                               OPERATOR
                                               REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
                                               SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
                                               USER-GROUP
                                               WHEEL
  NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY)              FREE ONE  OCTAL DIRECTORY NUMBER
  OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT         90        EXPIRATION DATE OR "+n"
  ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT          60        EXPIRATION DATE OR "+n"
  OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)              NOT       <RET>
  PASSWORD                           NONE SET  1 TO 39 ALPHANUMERIC
                                               CHARACTERS OR HYPHENS
  PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE
       PAGE LIMIT)                   250       DECIMAL NUMBER OF PAGES
                                               OR INFINITY
  PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)                   <RET>
  PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY)          777700    6-DIGIT OCTAL NUMBER
  PUSH                                -        <RET>
  REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES              NOT       <RET>
  SEMI-OPERATOR                      NOT       <RET>
  SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
       (ALLOWED)                     NONE SET  DECIMAL GROUP NUMBER
  TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER   NONE SET  OCTAL NUMBER IN RANGE
       (FOR COMPATIBILITY)                     10-377777, 6-DIGIT
                                               OCTAL NUMBER
  USER-OF-GROUP (NUMBER)             NONE SET  DECIMAL GROUP NUMBER
  WHEEL (CAPABILITY)                 NOT       <RET>
  WORKING (DISK STORAGE
     PAGE LIMIT)                     250       DECIMAL NUMBER OF PAGES
                                               OR INFINITY
  ____________________________________________________________________


  Subcommand Characteristics
  Subcommand Characteristics

       When you give a subcommand, you need to type only  the  beginning
       characters  up  to the point that the abbreviation is unique.  If
       you want to see the guide words, press the ESCape key  after  you
       give  the  subcommand  or its abbreviation.  You can also see the
       help text for the argument by typing ?  (question mark) in  place
       of  the argument.  After the help text is printed, the subcommand
       is repeated up to the argument.  At any point before you end  the
       subcommand, you can delete the subcommand line by typing CTRL/U.



                                   5-13
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


       To end the subcommand, press  RETURN  or  LINE  FEED.   When  you
       finish  giving subcommands to alter, kill, or create a directory,
       you must type an extra RETURN or LINE FEED for confirmation.

       For the system to ignore the  creation  of  a  directory  or  any
       changes  to  an  old  directory  since  the last ^ECREATE, type a
       CTRL/C any time during the ^ECREATE, or type ABORT at  subcommand
       level, instead or waiting to give the final RETURN or LINE FEED.

                                     NOTE

               Remember that you need to use a  subcommand  only
               if you want to assign a nondefault value when you
               are creating a directory or if you want to change
               any  value  for  an  existing directory.  See the
               Subcommands  Table  for  a  list   of   all   the
               subcommands  and  their  defaults.   You can also
               print the defaults on your terminal by giving the
               LIST  subcommand  to  ^ECREATE before you specify
               any  other  subcommands  (or  you  can  use   the
               INFORMATION  DIRECTORY command at TOPS-20 command
               level).

               If  you  change  a  directory  parameter  for   a
               logged-in  user  and  the user complains that the
               change has not occurred, tell the user to log out
               and  log  in again.  Some directory parameters do
               not take effect until a user logs in.

       The  ^ECREATE  subcommands  and  their  guide  words,  functions,
       arguments,  and  defaults  are given on the following pages.  The
       discussion of a subcommand also contains the explanation  of  any
       corresponding negative function.

       ABORT
       ABORT

            This  subcommand  returns  you  to  system   command   level
            immediately.   It is equivalent to typing CTRL/C at any time
            before you give the final <RET> to the ^ECREATE command.  As
            a  result, the system ignores the creation of a directory or
            any changes to an old  directory  since  the  last  ^ECREATE
            command was given.

                                ----- Example -----

            If you give an incorrect name, you can simply abort and type
            ^ECREATE again with the correct name.

             ________                  ______________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TESTING><RET>
            [New]
              __________
            $$ABORT<RET>


                                   5-14
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


             ________                  ___________________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) FORT:<TESTING><RET>
            [Old]
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS (CAPABILITY)
|       ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS (CAPABILITY)
|
|            This subcommand grants a user the ABSOLUTE INTERNET  SOCKETS
            capability.   This  capability  allows  a  user  to  specify
|            absolute socket numbers in a certain privileged monitor call
|            on a system running TCP/IP.

            Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
            can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
            break system security.

|            NOT  ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS,  which   is   the   default,
            withholds this capability from the user.

                                ----- Example -----

|            To  give  a  TCP/IP  user  the  ABSOLUTE  INTERNET   SOCKETS
|            capability:

             ________ _____________
            $^ECREATE <CIRINO><RET>
            [New]
              _________________________             _____
|            $$ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS (CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) account
       ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) account

            This subcommand specifies  the  default  account  for  users
            logging  into this directory.  A user with a default account
            can press RETURN for the account in the LOGIN  command  when
            logging  into  this  directory, and the account specified in
            this subcommand is used.

            If this subcommand is not given, no default account is  set.
            To eliminate a default account, give this subcommand without
            an  argument.   To  change  a  default  account,  give  this
            subcommand with the new default account as the argument.  At
            some installations,  a  user  can  also  change  an  account
            default with the command SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            You  can   also   use   ENABLE   and   the   SET   DIRECTORY
            ACCOUNT-DEFAULT command to change the default account.  When
            you  have  OPERATOR  capability  enabled,  you  can  type  a
            fictitious password in the command.


                                   5-15
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                                ----- Example -----

            If  user  J.SMITH  wants   his   default   account   to   be
            PAYROLL.TEST, type the following:

             ________ ______________
            $^ECREATE <J.SMITH><RET>
            [Old]
              _______________             _________________
            $$ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) PAYROLL.TEST<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
       ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES

            This subcommand specifies that expired disk files are to  be
            automatically  marked for archiving.  The TOPS-20 Operator's
            Guide discusses archiving.

            NOT  ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES,  which  is  the  default,
            causes  all  files  in  the  directory to remain on the disk
            regardless of the expiration date.

                                ----- Example -----

            To ensure that user GORE's  files  are  archived  some  time
            after  the  expiration  date  is reached, give the following
            command:

             ________ ___________
            $^ECREATE <GORE><RET>
            [Old]
              _________________________________
            $$ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)
       CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand grants a user the  confidential  information
            access  capability.  This capability lets a user obtain some
            confidential  information  within  the  system  via  certain
            monitor calls.

            Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
            can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
            break system security.

            NOT CONFIDENTIAL,  which  is  the  default,  withholds  this
            capability from the user.

                                ----- Example -----

            If you need to give  a  user  the  confidential  information
            access capability, give the CONFIDENTIAL subcommand.


                                   5-16
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


             ________                  ___________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TESS><RET>
            [New]
              ____________                                _____
            $$CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)
       DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand, in conjunction with pre-established  system
            manager  controls, grants a user the capability to establish
            DECnet network connections.  Note that this is  the  default
            in the absence of system manager controls.

            NOT DECNET-ACCESS denies access to the network.  This is the
            default  if  the  system  manager has exercised control over
            network access.

                                ----- Example -----

            To enable access to the DECnet network, type the following:

             ________ ____________
            $^ECREATE <CURRY><RET>
            [Old]
              _____________             _____
            $$DECNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION (NUMBER) 6-digit octal number
       DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION (NUMBER) 6-digit octal number

            This subcommand specifies the default file-access protection
            for   files   within  this  directory.   (You  can  find  an
            explanation of file-access protection in the TOPS-20  User's
            Guide.)  The  argument  for  this command is a 6-digit octal
            number.  If you do not  use  this  subcommand,  the  default
            protection is 777700.

            To change  the  default  file  protection  for  an  existing
            directory,  give this subcommand with the new protection.  A
            user can also change  this  default  with  the  command  SET
            DIRECTORY FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT.

            Do not  confuse  this  value  with  the  protection  of  the
            directory,  which  is set with the PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY)
            subcommand.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            You  can   also   use   ENABLE   and   the   SET   DIRECTORY
            FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT  command  to change the default file
            protection.  When you have OPERATOR capability enabled,  you
            can type a fictitious password in the command.


                                   5-17
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                                ----- Example -----

            To make the default file protection 775252 for user TES:

             ________ __________
            $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
            [New]
              _______________________ ___________
            $$DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION 775252<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number
       DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number

            This subcommand specifies a group number  for  a  directory.
            If  the group number is n, users in group n have group-level
            access to this directory.  (See the subcommand USER-OF-GROUP
            to  put  a  user  into  a  group.) The group-level access is
            determined by the  directory-  and  file-access  protection.
            (Refer  to  the  TOPS-20  User's Guide for an explanation of
            access protection.)

            The argument is a decimal number from 1 to 262143 (2**18-1).
            Because  you  can  specify only one number for the argument,
            you must repeat  the  subcommand  for  each  group  that  is
            allowed  to  access  the  files  in  the directory.  You can
            specify a maximum  of  40  different  group  numbers  for  a
            directory.

            NOT DIRECTORY prevents the directory from being accessed  at
            the group level by users in that group.  Because a directory
            does not belong to any group by default,  NOT  DIRECTORY  is
            needed  to  prohibit group access only if DIRECTORY had been
            given for that group.  You must repeat  the  subcommand  for
            each group for which you want access prohibited.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  To make a directory accessible to groups 4 and 9:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <WHITE><RET>
                [New]
                  _______________          ______
                $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 4<RET>
                  _______________          ______
                $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 9<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

            2.  If you want to create a directory of library subroutines
                called  <LIBRARY>, which is accessible to users in group
                6, give the  subcommand  DIRECTORY  6  when  you  create
                <LIBRARY>.

                 ________ ______________
                $^ECREATE <LIBRARY><RET>


                                   5-18
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                [New]
                  _______________          ______
                $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 6<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

                Then, to allow a user to access  the  library,  put  the
                user in user group 6 (see USER subcommand).

                 ________        ____________
                $^ECREATE (NAME) <ROSEN><RET>
                [Old]
                  __________          ______
                $$USER-GROUP (NUMBER) 6<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

       DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)
       DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)

            This subcommand disables any capabilities that you may  have
            activated  with  the ENABLE subcommand or the ENABLE TOPS-20
            command.

       ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)
       ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)

            This  subcommand  allows  you  to  activate  any  privileged
            capabilities  that the system manager has given you and that
            you may need during  the  ^ECREATE  session.   This  is  the
            default setting.

       ENQ-DEQ (CAPABILITY)
       ENQ-DEQ (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand gives a  user  the  ability  to  do  certain
            ENQUEUE and DEQUEUE functions.

            Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
            can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
            break system security.

            NOT ENQ-DEQ, which is the default,  withholds  this  ability
            from a user.

                                ----- Example -----

             ________ _____________
            $^ECREATE <UPDATE><RET>
            [New]
              ____________
            $$ENQ-DEQ<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       FILES-ONLY
       FILES-ONLY

            This subcommand makes the directory simply a  storage  place
            for  files.  A user cannot give the LOGIN or ACCESS commands
            for this directory.  A user can  gain  owner  privileges  to
            this   directory   by   giving  the  CONNECT  command.   The
                                   5-19
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            subdirectories of a FILES-ONLY directory must be FILES-ONLY.
            A FILES-ONLY directory cannot receive mail.

            NOT FILES-ONLY, which is the default, allows a user to  give
            the LOGIN and ACCESS commands for the directory.

            If  a  FILES-ONLY  directory  does  not  have  a   password,
            connecting  to  it  depends on directory protection and user
            groups.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            To temporarily disable a user from logging in and leave  his
            files  intact,  simply make his directory FILES-ONLY.  Then,
            to restore his log-in  privilege,  make  his  directory  NOT
            FILES-ONLY.   This  method  does not change any of the other
            directory parameters.

                                ----- Example -----

            To  make  the  directory   <LIBRARY>   on   structure   FORT
            FILES-ONLY:

             ________ ___________________
            $^ECREATE FORT:<LIBRARY><RET>
            [New]
              _______________
            $$FILES-ONLY<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       GENERATIONS (TO KEEP) decimal number
       GENERATIONS (TO KEEP) decimal number

            This specifies the default number of generations that a file
            can  have in this directory.  The argument must be a decimal
            number from 0 to 63, where 0 means an infinite number.   The
            default  is  1.   Currently,  it  is  advisable  to use this
            default to limit disk usage.

            To change  the  number  of  default  generations,  use  this
            subcommand and specify a new number.  At some installations,
            a user can also change this default  with  the  command  SET
            DIRECTORY GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            You  can   also   use   ENABLE   and   the   SET   DIRECTORY
            GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT  command  to  change  the
            default number  of  generations  to  keep.   When  you  have
            OPERATOR  capability  enabled,  you  can  type  a fictitious
            password in the command.

                                ----- Example -----


                                   5-20
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            To allow a user two generations of a file by default:

             ________                  ____________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TRESS><RET>
            [New]
              ___________           ______
            $$GENERATIONS (TO KEEP) 2<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)
|       INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand, in conjunction with pre-established  system
            manager  controls, grants a user the capability to establish
|            INTERNET network connections.  Note that this is the default
            in the absence of system manager controls.

|            NOT INTERNET-ACCESS denies access to the network.   This  is
            the default if the system manager has exercised control over
            network access.

                                ----- Example -----

|            To  enable  access  to  the  INTERNET  network,   type   the
|            following:

             ________ ______________
            $^ECREATE <SIMMONS><RET>
            [Old]
              _______________             _____
|            $$INTERNET-ACCESS (CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)
|       INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)
|
|            This  subcommand  grants  a   user   the   INTERNET   WIZARD
            capability.   This  capability  allows  a  user  to  execute
|            certain privileged monitor calls on a system running TCP/IP.

            Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
            can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
            break system security.

|            NOT INTERNET-WIZARD, which is the  default,  withholds  this
            capability from the user.

                                ----- Example -----
|
|            To give a TCP/IP user the INTERNET WIZARD capability:

             ________ ________________
            $^ECREATE <CROSSLAND><RET>
            [New]
              _______________             _____
|            $$INTERNET-WIZARD (CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>


                                   5-21
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            $

       IPCF (CAPABILITY)
       IPCF (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand grants a user the  capability  of  executing
            all privileged IPCF functions.

            Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
            can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
            break system security.

            NOT IPCF, which is the default,  withholds  this  capability
            from the user.

                                ----- Example -----

            To give a user the IPCF capability:

             ________ ___________________
            $^ECREATE <COMMUNICATOR><RET>
            [New]
              _________
            $$IPCF<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       KILL (THIS DIRECTORY)
       KILL (THIS DIRECTORY)

            This subcommand allows you to eliminate a directory from the
            system.   After  you  give  the subcommand, you are asked to
            [CONFIRM].  [CONFIRM] warns you that KILL also  deletes  all
            the  files  in the directory.  At this time be sure that you
            typed the correct directory.  If you did not, type CTRL/C to
            abort  immediately.   If  it  is  the right directory, press
            RETURN  after  [CONFIRM].   When  you  get   the   next   $$
            (double-dollar-signs),  you  can  continue  with the KILL by
            pressing RETURN again or cancel the KILL by typing NOT KILL.

            NOT KILL, which is the default, cancels  a  KILL  subcommand
            when it is given before the ^ECREATE command is completed.

                                 ----- Hints -----

            Do not kill a directory  that  is  logged  in,  because  the
            system  is  not  able  to  use  that user's job number until
            TOPS-20 is reloaded.  If you must kill that  directory,  log
            out the user first and then kill the directory.

            When you kill a directory, you lose all  the  files  in  the
            directory.

            If you try to kill a directory and get:



                                   5-22
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                 ?Directory file is mapped

            the directory is being used.  You cannot kill the  directory
            until it is not in use.

            If you try to kill a directory and get:

                 ?Internal format of directory is incorrect

                            _______  __________  _____
            refer  to  the  TOPS-20  Operator's  Guide  to  delete   the
            directory.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  To eliminate the user ALPHONSE from the system:

                 ________ __________________
                $^ECREATE PS:<ALPHONSE><RET>
                [Old]
                  _________
                $$KILL<RET>
                [Confirm]<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

            2.  To prevent killing a directory when  you  discover  that
                you typed the wrong name:

                 ________ ________________
                $^ECREATE <ROSENBURG><RET>
                [Old]
                  _________
                $$KILL<RET>
                [CONFIRM]^C
                          ^
                          |
                       <CTRL/C>
                $

       LIST argument
       LIST argument

            This subcommand lets you  check  the  directory  parameters.
            Consequently,  it  helps  to use it before you terminate the
            ^ECREATE command, so you can make any necessary changes.

            The acceptable arguments are FAST, NAME-ONLY,  and  VERBOSE.
            If no argument is typed, FAST is assumed.

                               ----- Arguments -----

            If you type LIST FAST or LIST<RET>, the output  is  a  short
            list  equivalent  to  the  output  from the ^EPRINT command.
            Items not listed have default values.

            If you type LIST NAME-ONLY, the output gives the name of the


                                   5-23
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            directory  that  you  specified  after the ^ECREATE command.
            This is equivalent to the output from  the  ^EPRINT  command
            with the NAME-ONLY subcommand.

            If  you  type  LIST  VERBOSE,  the  output  lists  all   the
|            parameters  except  PASSWORD, NOT ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS,
|            and NOT INTERNET-WIZARD.  This is equivalent to  the  output
            from  the  ^EPRINT  command  with  the  VERBOSE  subcommand,
            providing the directory was previously completed.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            If you typed KILL as a subcommand, the LIST output is simply
            KILLED.  For example,

                   _________
                 $$KILL<RET>
                 [Confirm]<RET>
                   _________
                 $$LIST<RET>
                  Killed
                 $$

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  To get a brief list of parameters for <SMITH>:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <SMITH><RET>
                [Old]
                  _________
                $$LIST<RET>
                 Name <SMITH>
                 Working disk storage page limit 800
                 Permanent disk storage page limit 600
                 WHEEL
                 Number of directory 142
                 Account default for LOGIN BASIC
|                 Last interactive login 10-AUG-83 07:58:28
|                 Last non-interactive login Never
                 TOPS10 project-programmer number 27-5434

                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

            2.  To get a complete list of  parameters  for  <SMITH>  and
                increase  the  permanent  disk storage page limit by 200
                pages:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <SMITH><RET>
                [Old]
                  ____ ____________
                $$LIST VERBOSE<RET>
                 Name <SMITH>
                 Working disk storage page limit 800
                 Permanent disk storage page limit 400


                                   5-24
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                 WHEEL
                 not OPERATOR
                 not CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
                 not MAINTENANCE
                 not IPCF
                 not ENQ-DEQ
                 not SEMI-OPERATOR
                 not FILES-ONLY
|                 SECURE
                 Number of directory 142
                 Default file protection 777700
                 Account default for LOGIN BASIC
                 Protection of directory 777700
                 Generations to keep 1
                 Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|                 Last interactive login 10-Jun-90 07:58:28
|                 Last non-interactive login Never
|                 Password expiration date is 1-Jul-90 15:41:37
|                 No interactive login failures
|                 No non-interactive login failures
                 User of groups - none set
                 Directory groups - none set
                 Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
                 Online expiration default 60 days
                 Offline expiration default 90 days
                 TOPS10 project-programmer number 27-5434

                  _________                           ________
                $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 600<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $


            3.  To list just the name of the directory.

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <SMITH><RET>
                [Old]
                  ____ ______________
                $$LIST NAME-ONLY<RET>
                 NAME <SMITH>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

       MAINTENANCE (CAPABILITY)
       MAINTENANCE (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand grants a user  the  MAINTENANCE  capability.
            It  allows  the  user  to execute certain system maintenance
            functions.

            Give this capability only to those users who need it and who
            can  be  trusted,  because  a  user with this capability can
            break system security.



                                   5-25
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            NOT  MAINTENANCE,  which  is  the  default,  withholds  this
            capability from the user.

                                ----- Example -----

            To  give  the  field  service  directory   the   MAINTENANCE
            capability:

             ________ ____________________
            $^ECREATE <FIELD-SERVICE><RET>
            [New]
              ________________
            $$MAINTENANCE<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

       MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES (ALLOWED) decimal number
       MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES (ALLOWED) decimal number

            This subcommand specifies a limit for the sum of the  number
            of  subdirectories  that can be created in the directory and
            the number of subdirectories that can currently be delegated
            to subdirectories in the directory.  The limit can be from 0
            to 262143.

            A number of subdirectories is delegated when the  value  for
            MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES  is  specified  for a subdirectory in
            the directory.   After  subdirectories  are  delegated,  the
            value  for  MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES in the superior directory
            is automatically decremented by the number delegated.

            The default value is zero.  You can  change  the  value  for
            this parameter by giving the subcommand with a new value.

                                ----- Example -----

            To let user WIZARD create two subdirectories and allow those
            subdirectories to create a total of four subdirectories:

             ________ _____________
            $^ECREATE <WIZARD><RET>
            [Old]
              ______________________           ______
            $$MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES (ALLOWED) 4<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

       NOT subcommand
       NOT subcommand

            The NOT must be followed by one of the following
            subcommands:

|                 ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
                 ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES


                                   5-26
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                 CONFIDENTIAL
                 DECNET-ACCESS
                 DIRECTORY-GROUP
                 ENQ-DEQ
                 FILES-ONLY
|                 INTERNET-ACCESS
|                 INTERNET-WIZARD
                 IPCF
                 KILL
                 MAINTENANCE
                 OPERATOR
                 REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
                 SEMI-OPERATOR
                 SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP
                 TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER
                 USER-OF-GROUP
                 WHEEL

            The function for NOT  subcommand  is  discussed  under  each
            subcommand,  for  example, NOT USER-GROUP is described under
            the subcommand USER-GROUP.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  To take away the ENQ-DEQ capability from JONES:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <JONES><RET>
                [Old]
                  ___ ____________
                $$NOT ENQ-DEQ<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

            2.  To prohibit the directory <GAMES> on structure FUN  from
                being  accessed  by  users in group 9 when the directory
                protection does not allow all users to access <GAMES>:

                 ________ ________________
                $^ECREATE FUN:<GAMES><RET>
                [Old]
                  ___ _______________ ______
                $$NOT DIRECTORY-GROUP 9<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

       NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY) octal directory number
       NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY) octal directory number

            This subcommand allows you to  assign  an  unused  directory
            number  to  the directory that you are creating.  The number
            must be octal.  Certain programs use  a  specific  directory
            number.   Also,  directory numbers 1 through 17 are reserved
            for use by DIGITAL.  Currently, <ROOT-DIRECTORY>,  <SYSTEM>,


                                   5-27
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            <SUBSYS>,  <ACCOUNTS>,  <OPERATOR>,  and  <SPOOL>  must have
            directory numbers 1 to 6, respectively.

            If you do not use  this  subcommand,  a  default  number  is
            chosen by TOPS-20.  You should always use the default number
            unless the directory must have a specific number.

            While creating a new directory, you can change  a  directory
            number  you specified by repeating the subcommand with a new
            number or by giving the  subcommand  NUMBER  0  to  get  the
            default.  However, once you create the directory, you cannot
            change this number.

                                ----- Example -----

            To re-create  the  directory  <OPERATOR>,  which  must  have
            directory number 5:

             ________ _______________
            $^ECREATE <OPERATOR><RET>
            [New]
              ______                ______
            $$NUMBER (OF DIRECTORY) 5<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS)
       OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) date or +n

            This subcommand establishes the  tape  expiration  date  for
            files  in  your directory that are to go off line because of
            migration or archiving.  To generate a relative  date,  give
            the  "+n"  argument,  where  n represents the number of days
            from the removal date.

            After issuing this subcommand, you  may  receive  the  error
            message:

                 ?Offline expiration time cannot exceed system maximum.

            In this situation, you have requested a longer  interval  of
            time than that established by the system manager.  Issue the
            INFORMATION (ABOUT) SYSTEM-STATUS command to learn what  the
            system  default  is.   (Refer to the description of the PUSH
            subcommand, below, for information on entering  and  exiting
            from TOPS-20 command level during the ^ECREATE session.)

                                ----- Example -----

            To indicate that all off-line files  can  be  expunged  from
            tape  two  months after the removal date, give the following
            command:

             ________ _______________
            $^ECREATE <ANDERSON><RET>
            [New]
              __________________________      ________
            $$OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) +60<RET>
                                   5-28
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS)
       ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) date or +n

            This subcommand establishes the  expiration  date  for  disk
            files  that  are  to  be  created  in  the  directory.  Upon
            expiration, the  files  will  be  automatically  marked  for
            archiving     if     you     previously     specified    the
            ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES  subcommand.   To  indicate   a
            relative  date,  give  the "+n" argument, where n represents
            the number of days from the creation date.

                                ----- Example -----

            If user HILL wants all newly  created  files  to  expire  on
            Labor Day, issue the following:

             ________                  ___________
            $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <HILL><RET>
            [New]
              _________________________      _____________
            $$ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) 6-SEP-82<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)
       OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand  grants  a  user  the  OPERATOR  capability.
            Normally,   it   is   given   to  the  operator's  directory
            <OPERATOR>.

            NOT OPERATOR, which is the default, withholds the capability
            from a user.

            SEMI-OPERATOR  capability  is  a  subset  of  the   OPERATOR
            capability (see SEMI-OPERATOR).

                                ----- Example -----

            To give <2-OPERATOR> the OPERATOR capability:

             ________ _________________
            $^ECREATE <2-OPERATOR><RET>
            [New]
              _____________
            $$OPERATOR<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

       PASSWORD 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters or hyphens
       PASSWORD 1 to 39 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

            This subcommand specifies the password for the directory.  A
            user must give his correct password to log in to the system.
            The identifier may be 1 to 39 letters, digits, or hyphens.

                                   5-29
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            If this subcommand is not given  and  the  password  is  not
            specified  on the same line as ^ECREATE, no password is set.
            To eliminate a password, give  this  subcommand  without  an
            argument.

            You  can  change  an  existing  password  by   giving   this
            subcommand  with the new password.  At some installations, a
            user can  also  change  a  password  with  the  command  SET
            DIRECTORY PASSWORD.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            You can also ENABLE your WHEEL  or  OPERATOR  capability  to
            change the password with the SET DIRECTORY PASSWORD command.
            This method  has  the  advantage  of  not  echoing  the  new
            password.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  To change a user's password to NEW-ONE:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <JONES><RET>
                [Old]
                  ________ ____________
                $$PASSWORD NEW-ONE<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

            2.  To create a new directory named ELLIS with a password of
                JOAN:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <ELLIS><RET>
                [New]
                  ________ _________
                $$PASSWORD JOAN<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

       PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument
       PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument

            This subcommand specifies the limit of the sum of disk space
            that  the  directory  can have for permanent storage and the
            disk space that can be delegated to  subdirectories  in  the
            directory for permanent storage.

            Disk space for permanent storage is delegated when the value
            for  PERMANENT  is  specified  for  a  subdirectory  in  the
            directory.  After permanent storage is delegated, the  value
            for  PERMANENT  in  the  superior directory is automatically
            decremented by the amount delegated.



                                   5-30
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            You should make permanent storage  less  than  or  equal  to
            working   storage.   You  can  change  the  value  for  this
            parameter by giving the subcommand with a new value.

            The arguments are the number of pages or INFINITY.

                               ----- Arguments -----

            The number of pages argument is a  decimal  number  where  a
            page is 512 36-bit words.  The default value is 250 pages.

            The INFINITY argument allocates an unlimited number of pages
            to  the  directory.   The  permanent storage of the superior
            directory must also be INFINITY.  The number of  pages  that
            can  be  used  by  the user is limited to the number of free
            pages on the  structure.   This  argument  is  intended  for
            special  system  directories; it is not intended for general
            users.

                                ----- Example -----

            To give user FOX 200 pages of permanent storage:

             ________ __________
            $^ECREATE <FOX><RET>
            [NEW]
              _________                           ________
            $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 200<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

       PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)
       PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)

            This  subcommand  preserves  the  values  of  the   superior
            directory's  PERMANENT,  WORKING  and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES
            parameters.  Normally, when you create a  subdirectory,  the
            PERMANENT,  WORKING,  and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES subcommands
            subtract equal values from the permanent superior directory.
            The  PRESERVE  subcommand,  when  used  with  the PERMANENT,
            WORKING, and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES subcommands, stops  this
            subtraction.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            This subcommand allows you to create a subdirectory  without
            first increasing the pages in the superior directory.

                                ----- Example -----

            To create a subdirectory for user  FOX  with  100  pages  of
            permanent  and working storage without subtracting 100 pages
            from the  permanent  and  working  quotas  of  the  superior


                                   5-31
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            directory:

             ________ ______________
            $^ECREATE <FOX.SUB><RET>
            [New]
              _________                            ________
            $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT ) 100<RET>
              _______                            ________
            $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT ) 100<RET>
              ________ _________ ____________
            $$PRESERVE (SUPERIOR QUOTAS)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY) 6-digit octal number
       PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY) 6-digit octal number

            This  subcommand  specifies  the  access  protection  for  a
            directory.  (You can find an explanation of directory-access
                              _______ ______ _____
            protection in the TOPS-20 User's Guide.)  The  argument  for
            this  command  is a 6-digit octal number.  If you do not use
            this subcommand, the directory protection is 777700.

            To change the protection of an existing directory, give this
            subcommand  with the new protection.  A user can also change
            the protection of a directory with the command SET DIRECTORY
            PROTECTION.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            You can also use ENABLE and  the  SET  DIRECTORY  PROTECTION
            command  to  change  the protection.  When you have OPERATOR
            capability enabled, you can type a  fictitious  password  in
            the command.

                                ----- Example -----

            To  make  the  <LIBRARY>  directory  protection  775252   on
            structure APPL:

             ________ ___________________
            $^ECREATE APPL:<LIBRARY><RET>
            [New]
              __________                ___________
            $$PROTECTION (OF DIRECTORY) 775252<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
       PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)

            This subcommand creates a level of TOPS-20 inferior  to  the
            one  from  which you issued the ^ECREATE command, and leaves
            your terminal at this new level.  You can issue any  TOPS-20
            command  from this level.  Give the POP command to return to
            your ^ECREATE session.

            With this subcommand you  can  leave  the  ^ECREATE  command
            sequence  in  order  to  issue  a  user,  operator, or other
            privileged command.  Following this, you can resume ^ECREATE
            activities, with your previous work intact.
                                   5-32
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            You can use the PUSH subcommand to create an  inferior  EXEC
            of  your choice.  Normally, PUSH creates the EXEC defined by
            the system logical name  DEFAULT-EXEC:.   You  can  use  the
            DEFINE  command  to define a job definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:
            with the name of the EXEC you want to create each  time  you
            PUSH.

            Note  that  many  TOPS-20  programs  have  their  own   PUSH
            commands.   However,  only  the  EXEC  and OPR PUSH commands
            refer to the job definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:; all other PUSH
            commands refer to the system definition.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  You may be  called  upon  to  perform  some  unscheduled
                software  task,  such  as initializing tapes or handling
                tape mount requests while you are in  the  middle  of  a
                ^ECREATE  session.  The PUSH subcommand allows you to do
                this:

                 ________                  _____________
                $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TUCKER><RET>
                [Old]
                  ____________________________ _____
                $$ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES <RET>
                  _________________________      _________
                $$ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT (IS) +180<RET>
                  _______________             ________
                $$ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) 172<RET>
                  ____                _____
                $$PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)<RET>
                 TOPS-20 Command processor 5(702)
                 ______               _____
                @ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)<RET>
                 ________
                $OPR<RET>
                    ___ __________ _____ __________
                OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE
                _________________________
                /LABEL-TYPE:TOPS-20-<RET>
                ________________________ ____________________________
                /OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION:YES /TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD-<RET>
                ______________________
                /VOLUME-ID:SAMPLE<RET>
                OPR>

                When you are notified of  a  successful  initialization,
                exit  from  OPR;  give  the POP command to return to the
                ^ECREATE  session;  then   continue   issuing   ^ECREATE
                subcommands:

                    _________
                OPR>EXIT<RET>
                 ________
                $POP<RET>
                [Continuing BUILD of directory PS:<TUCKER>]
                  _______________________          ___________
                $$DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION (NUMBER) 770000<RET>
                  _________                           ________
                $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 600<RET>
                  _______                           ________
                $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 600<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

            2.  Suppose you gave an unacceptable argument to the WORKING
                subcommand, as follows:


                                   5-33
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                 ________                  _______________________
                $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <TUCKER.OPERATOR>-<RET>
                            _________
                 (PASSWORD) TEST<RET>
                [Old]
                  _______                           _______
                $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 30<RET>
                  _________                           _______
                $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 21<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                ?Working space insufficient for current allocation.
                Please fix incorrect subcommands.

                $$

                The error message above indicates  that  the  number  of
                pages  currently  assigned to your directory exceeds the
                working space quota that  you  desire.   Give  the  PUSH
                subcommand.   Then,  while at this new level of TOPS-20,
                give  the  INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  DISK-USAGE  command  to
                display the current page assignment:

                  _________
                $$PUSH<RET>

                 TOPS-20 Command processor 5(703)
                 ___________         __________               _____
                @INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE (OF DIRECTORY)<RET>
                 PS:<TUCKER.OPERATOR>
                 37 Pages assigned
                 75 Working pages, 75 Permanent pages allowed
                 4452 Pages free on PS:, 147548 pages used.
                @

                If you are unwilling for  the  working  space  quota  to
                equal  or  exceed  the  current page assignment, you can
                delete files to sufficiently  reduce  the  current  page
                assignment:

                                .
                 ______         _____________
                                _
                @DELETE (FILES) .QXAMPLE<RET>
                 CREATE.QXAMPLE.2 [OK]
                 OPR-POP.QXAMPLE.1 [OK]
                 OPR-PUSH.QXAMPLE.5 [OK]
                 POP-RETURN.QXAMPLE.5 [OK]
                 PUSH-ERROR.QXAMPLE.4 [OK]
                 SYSJ.QXAMPLE.7 [OK]

                 _______             _____
                @EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY) <RET>
                 PS:<TUCKER.OPERATOR> [30 pages freed]

                Only seven pages are  assigned  to  the  directory  now.
                Return  to  your  ^ECREATE  session,  and  respecify the
                working space quota.

                 ________
                @POP<RET>
                [Continuing BUILD of directory PS:<TUCKER.OPERATOR>]
                  _______                           _______
                $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 30<RET>


                                   5-34
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

       REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
       REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES

            This subcommand allows  the  user,  when  logging  onto  the
            system, to read all messages in SYSTEM:MAIL.TXT.  Thus, when
            a    user    logs    into    his    directory    with    the
            REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES  attribute  enabled, all messages from
            SYSTEM:MAIL.TXT will be displayed at his terminal.

            NOT REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES, which is the  default,  withholds
            this attribute from the user.

                                ----- Example -----

            To give a user the REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES attribute:

             ________ ____________
            $^ECREATE <BROWN><RET>
            [Old]
              __________________________
            $$REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       SEMI-OPERATOR
       SEMI-OPERATOR

            This subcommand allows the user to execute a sub-set of  OPR
            commands.   The  subset are those OPR commands for accessing
            information and controlling certain devices.   (The  devices
            are  determined by the System Administrator when a GALGEN is
            performed.)

            After this subcommand is issued for a particular  user,  the
            operator must turn-on SEMI-OPR with the OPR command ENABLE.

                                ----- Example -----

             ________ ____________
            $^ECREATE <BROWN><RET>
            [Old]
              _____________             _____
            $$SEMI-OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) decimal group number
       SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) decimal group number

            This subcommand specifies what user groups can be  specified
            in  the USER-OF-GROUP or SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP subcommands
            for a subdirectory in this directory.

            The argument is a decimal number from 1 to 262143 (2**18-1).
            You  can  specify a maximum of 40 different groups.  Because


                                   5-35
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            you can give only one number for the argument, however,  you
            must  repeat  the  subcommand  for each different group.  If
            this subcommand is being specified for a  subdirectory,  the
            user-group  number  must be in the list of subdirectory user
            groups allowed in the superior directory.

            NOT SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP removes a group from the list of
            groups  allowed.   To  remove  more  than one group from the
            list, you must repeat the subcommand for each group.

                                ----- Example -----

            To allow the subdirectories of directory <A> to specify user
            groups or subdirectory user groups of 1, 2, 3, or 4:

             ________ ________
            $^ECREATE <A><RET>
            [New]
              _______________________           ______
            $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 1<RET>
              _______________________           ______
            $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 2<RET>
              _______________________           ______
            $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 3<RET>
              _______________________           ______
            $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 4<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER (FOR COMPATIBILITY) n,n
       TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER (FOR COMPATIBILITY) n,n

            This subcommand sets  a  TOPS-10  project-programmer  number
            (PPN)  to  the directory.  This allows TOPS-10 programs that
            require PPNs to be compatible with TOPS-20.

            The project-programmer number consists of two octal numbers,
            separated  by  a  comma, that identify the user and his file
            storage area on a TOPS-10 file structure.

            To change the  PPN  in  an  existing  directory,  give  this
            subcommand with the new PPN.

                                ----- Example -----

            To assign user JONES a TOPS-10 PPN:

             ________ ____________
            $^ECREATE <JONES><RET>
            [Old]
              ________________________________ ____________
            $$TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER 27,5434<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       USER-OF-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number
       USER-OF-GROUP (NUMBER) decimal group number

            This subcommand places the user of the directory in a  group
            and  gives  the user group-level access to other directories


                                   5-36
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            with the same directory group number.  (See  the  subcommand
            DIRECTORY-GROUP to specify a directory group number.)

            The argument is a decimal number from 1 to 262143 (2**18-1).
            A  user  can  belong  to  a  maximum of 40 different groups.
            However, because you  can  give  only  one  number  for  the
            argument,  you must repeat the subcommand for each different
            group.   If  this  subcommand  is  being  specified  for   a
            subdirectory,  the  user group number must be in the list of
            subdirectory user groups allowed in the superior directory.

            NOT USER-OF-GROUP removes  a  user  from  the  group  number
            specified.   To  remove a user from more than one group, you
            must repeat the subcommand for each group.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  To put a user in groups 3, 9, and 27:

                 ________ __________
                $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
                [New]
                  _____________ ______
                $$USER-OF-GROUP 3<RET>
                  _____________ ______
                $$USER-OF-GROUP 9<RET>
                  _____________ _______
                $$USER-OF-GROUP 27<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

            2.  To allow an instructor whose  directory  is  <TEACH>  to
                have  group-level  access  to his students' directories,
                which have a directory group number of 5:

                 ________ ____________
                $^ECREATE <TEACH><RET>
                [New]
                  _____________ ______
                $$USER-OF-GROUP 5<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

            3.  To remove a user from group 3:

                 ________ __________
                $^ECREATE <TES><RET>
                [Old]
                  ___ _____________ ______
                $$NOT USER-OF-GROUP 3<RET>
                  _____
                $$<RET>
                $

       WHEEL (CAPABILITY)
       WHEEL (CAPABILITY)

            This subcommand grants the WHEEL capability to a user.





                                   5-37
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                                        NOTE

                Be  very  cautious  about  giving  this  capability,
                because  it  allows  a  user  to  do anything on the
                system and possibly destroy system security.

            NOT WHEEL, which is the default, withholds  this  capability
            from a user.

                                ----- Example -----

            To give user <SYSTEM-ACE> WHEEL capability:

             ________ _________________
            $^ECREATE <SYSTEM-ACE><RET>
            [New]
              __________
            $$WHEEL<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
            $

       WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument
       WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) argument

            This subcommand specifies the limit of the sum of  temporary
            working  space that a user of the directory can have on disk
            while logged in and the temporary working space that can  be
            delegated to subdirectories in the directory.

            Temporary working space is  delegated  when  the  value  for
            WORKING  is  specified  for a subdirectory in the directory.
            After temporary working space is delegated,  the  value  for
            WORKING   in   the   superior   directory  is  automatically
            decremented by the amount delegated.

            You should  allow  at  least  as  much  working  storage  as
            permanent  storage.   You  can  change  the  value  for this
            parameter by giving the subcommand with a new value.

            The arguments are the number of pages or INFINITY.

                               ----- Arguments -----

            The number of pages argument is a  decimal  number  where  a
            page is 512 36-bit words.  The default value is 250 pages.

            The INFINITY argument allocates an unlimited number of pages
            to  the  directory.   The  working  storage  of the superior
            directory must also be INFINITY.  The number of  pages  that
            can  be  used  by  the user is limited to the number of free
            pages on the  structure.   This  argument  is  intended  for
            special  system  directories; it is not intended for general
            users.



                                   5-38
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


                                ----- Example -----

            To give user FOX 400 pages of working storage:

             ________ __________
            $^ECREATE <FOX><RET>
            [New]
              _______                           ________
            $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 400<RET>
              _____
            $$<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @

  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       The following are error messages  associated  with  the  ^ECREATE
       command and its subcommands.

       After some of the following error messages, you will also get the
       message:

            Please fix incorrect subcommands.

       After any error, you automatically  return  to  subcommand  level
       with  the  prompt  $$.   You  can  then  give more subcommands to
       correct the error, specify additional  directory  parameters,  or
       type ABORT and then correct the problem.

       ?6-digit value only

            The maximum value accepted is six octal digits.

       ?Can't add new group; buffer full

            You specified over 40 directory groups or user groups.

       ?Carriage return or subcommand required
       ?Does not match switch or keyword

            You typed an invalid subcommand.

       ?Directory file is mapped

            You tried to kill a directory that was being used.

       ?Directory still contains subdirectory.

            You cannot delete a directory that has subdirectories.

       ?First nonspace character is not a digit - "character"

            You must type a numeric argument.

       ?Group already exists

                                   5-39
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            The group number that you typed was previously given.

       ?Group numbers must be between 1 and 262143.

            A user group  number  or  directory  group  number  must  be
            between 1 and 262143, inclusive.

       ?Illegal to create non-files-only subdirectory under files-only
        directory.

            You cannot create  a  non-FILES-ONLY  subdirectory  under  a
            FILES-ONLY directory.

       ?Illegal to delete connected directory.

            You cannot  delete  your  connected  directory.To  delete  a
            specific directory, first connect to a different directory.

       ?Illegal to delete logged-in directory.

            You cannot delete your logged-in  directory.   To  delete  a
            specific directory you must log in to a different directory.

       ?Internal format of directory is incorrect

            You tried to kill  a  directory  whose  internal  format  is
            incorrect.  (See Hints under the KILL subcommand.)

       ?Invalid character in number

            You typed a nondigit in a numeric argument or  you  typed  a
            nonoctal digit in an octal argument.

       ?Invalid directory number.

            The number that you tried to give to  a  new  directory  has
            already been given to another directory.

       ?Invalid directory specification

            You typed a directory incorrectly.  Perhaps you  forgot  the
            right angle bracket (>).

       ?Invalid structure name - "name"

            You specified a structure  name  incorrectly.   Perhaps  you
            omitted  the  angle brackets around a directory name, or you
            omitted the colon after the structure name.

       ?Invalid user group.



                                   5-40
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            You    specified    a    number    for     USER-GROUP     or
            SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP   that   is   not  in  the  superior
            directories list of subdirectory user groups allowed.

       ?Must be 0-63

            The default number of generations to keep must be 0 to 63.

       ?No group to remove

            You tried to remove a group number that was never assigned.

       ?Not confirmed

            You must press RETURN  or  LINE  FEED  at  the  end  of  the
            command.

       ?Overflow (number is greater than 2**35)

            The argument you specified is too large.

       ?Request exceeds superior directory permanent quota.

            The number of  pages  you  specified  for  a  subdirectory's
            permanent  disk-storage  page  limit  exceeds  the permanent
            disk-storage  page  limit   remaining   for   the   superior
            directory.

       ?Request exceeds superior directory subdirectory quota.

            You  tried  to  create  a  subdirectory  when  the  superior
            directory  allows no more subdirectories, or you specified a
            value  for  MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES  that  exceeds  what   is
            allowed by the superior directory.

       ?Request exceeds superior directory working quota.

            The number of  pages  you  specified  for  a  subdirectory's
            working   disk-storage   page   limit  exceeds  the  working
            disk-storage  page  limit   remaining   for   the   superior
            directory.

       ?Structure str: not mounted

            The structure you specified, str:, has not been mounted.  Be
            sure  you typed the structure name correctly.  Also, MOUNT a
            structure before you create a directory on it.

       ?Subdirectory quota insufficient for existing subdirectories.

            You tried to specify a value for MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES that


                                   5-41
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            is  less  than  the number of subdirectories already created
            and delegated.

       ?Superior directory does not exist.

            You tried to create the  subdirectory  <directory.xxx>,  but
            <directory>, the superior directory, does not exist.

       ?Superior directory full

            Either <ROOT-DIRECTORY>  on  the  structure  where  you  are
            trying  to  create  a  directory  cannot  contain  any  more
            directories, or you are trying to create <directory.xxx> and
            <directory> cannot contain any more directories.

       ?Working space insufficient for current allocation.

            You tried to specify a value for WORKING that is  less  than
            the  current disk space already being used by the directory.
            Refer to Example 2 of the PUSH  subcommand  description  for
            help.

       ?You can't change the number of an old directory

            You cannot change the number of an existing directory.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  To create a directory with all default values:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ________ ___________ _______
           $^ECREATE <STUDENT-1> S1<RET>
           [New]
             _____
           $$<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @
















                                   5-42
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


       2.  To create a new directory with some nondefault parameters:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ________                  _______________
           $^ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) <WHITEMAN><RET>
           [New]
             ________ ___________
           $$PASSWORD PAULAM<RET>
             _______________             ____________
           $$ACCOUNT-DEFAULT (FOR LOGIN) BANK.MC<RET>
             _______                           ________
           $$WORKING (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 500<RET>
             _________                           ________
           $$PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 300<RET>
             __________ ________ ______
           $$USER-GROUP (NUMBER) 9<RET>
             _______________ ________ ______
           $$DIRECTORY-GROUP (NUMBER) 5<RET>
             _________
           $$LIST<RET>
            Name <WHITEMAN>
            Working disk storage page limit 500
            Permanent disk storage page limit 300
            Account default for LOGIN BANK.MC
            User of groups 9
            Directory groups 5
            TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

             ____ ____________
           $$LIST VERBOSE<RET>
            Name <WHITEMAN>
            Working disk storage page limit 500
            Permanent disk storage page limit 300
            not WHEEL
            not OPERATOR
            not CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
            not MAINTENANCE
            not IPCF
            not ENQ-DEQ
            not FILES-ONLY
|            not SERCURE
            No directory number
            Default file protection 777700
            Account default for LOGIN BANK.MC
            Protection of directory 777700
            Generations to keep 1
            Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|            Never logged in interactively
|            Never logged in non-interactively
|            Password expiration date not set
|            No interactive loging failures
|            No non-interactive login failures
            User of groups 9
            Directory groups 5
            Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
            Online expiration default 60 days
            Offline expiration default 90 days
            TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

             _____
           $$<RET>


                                   5-43
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       3.  To alter a parameter for a directory:

            ________ _______________
           $^ECREATE <WHITEMAN><RET>
           [Old]
             ____________                                _____
           $$CONFIDENTIAL (INFORMATION ACCESS CAPABILITY)<RET>
             _____________             _____
           $$SEMI-OPERATOR (CAPABILITY)<RET>
             ____ ____________
           $$LIST VERBOSE<RET>
            Name <WHITEMAN>
            Working disk storage page limit 500
            Permanent disk storage page limit 300
            not WHEEL
            not OPERATOR
            CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
            not MAINTENANCE
            not IPCF
            not ENQ-DEQ
            SEMI-OPERATOR
            not FILES-ONLY
|            not SECURE
            Number of directory 606
            Default file protection 777700
            Account default for login BANK.MC
            Protection of directory 777700
            Generations to keep 1
            Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|            Last interactive login 11-May-90 15:30:47
|            Last non-interactive login 22-Feb-90 18:28:21
|            Password expiration date is 15-Aug-90 17:35:14
|            No interactive login failures
|            No non-interactive login failures
            Never logged in non-interactively
            Password expiration date not set
            No interactive loging failures
            No non-interactive login failures
            Last LOGIN
            User of groups 5, 9
            Directory groups 5
            Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
            Online expiration default 60 days
            Offline expiration default 90 days
            TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

             _____
           $$<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @





                                   5-44
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ECREATE)
                                (^ECREATE)


       4.  To delete a directory from the system:

            ________ _______________
           $^ECREATE <WHITEMAN><RET>
           [Old]
             _________
           $$KILL<RET>
                    _____
           [Confirm]<RET>
             _____
           $$<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       5.  To create the files-only  directory  <MANUALS>  on  structure
           DSKA with DSKA previously MOUNTed:

            ________ ___________________
           $^ECREATE DSKA:<MANUALS><RET>
           [New]
             _______________
           $$FILES-ONLY<RET>
             _____
           $$<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       6.  To create PS:<P> and allow it to have  50  subdirectories  in
           user groups 3 and/or 4:

            ________ ___________
           $^ECREATE PS:<P><RET>
           [New]
             _______ __________
           $$WORKING 12500<RET>
             _________ __________
           $$PERMANENT 12500<RET>
             ______________________ _______
           $$MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES 50<RET>
             _______________________           ______
           $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 3<RET>
             _______________________           ______
           $$SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP (ALLOWED) 4<RET>
             _____
           $$<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       7.  To create the subdirectory <P.HURLEY> in user  group  3  when
           <P> already exists:

            ________ _______________
           $^ECREATE <P.HURLEY><RET>
           [New]
             ________ __________
           $$PASSWORD YUIOP<RET>
             __________ ______
           $$USER-GROUP 3<RET>
             _____
           $$<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @









                                   5-45
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EDEFINE)
                                (^EDEFINE)


  ^EDEFINE - Defining and Deleting System Logical Names
  ^EDEFINE - Defining and Deleting System Logical Names



  Function
  Function

       The ^EDEFINE command creates or deletes system logical names.   A
       system logical name applies to all users on the system.  A system
       logical name is a list  of  system  directories  that  tells  the
       system  where  and  in  what  order  to search for a file for all
       users.


  Format
  Format

       ^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) lognam: (AS) filespec


  Arguments
  Arguments

       lognam:            specifies a 1-  to  39-character  alphanumeric
                          abbreviation  or  system  logical  name  to be
                          defined or deleted, or * to delete all  system
                          logical names.

       filespec           specifies  one  or  more  file  specifications
                          separated  by commas.  A file specification is
                          any combination of device or  structure  name,
                          directory    name,    filename,   file   type,
                          generation number, and wild cards.  If you are
                          deleting  a  system  logical name, do not type
                          any file specification.

  Hints
  Hints

       Whenever you give this command, you are asked to CONFIRM.  If you
       have  typed the command correctly, press RETURN.  Otherwise, type
       CTRL/U and retype the command.

       Do not confuse the ^EDEFINE command with the TOPS-20 EXEC  DEFINE
       command.   The DEFINE command defines a logical name for only the
       user that issues the command.   (See  the  TOPS-20  User's  Guide
       and/or  TOPS-20 Commands Manual for a complete description of the
       DEFINE command.)

       To check the current  list  of  system  logical  names,  use  the
       command  INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  LOGICAL  NAMES  with  the argument
       SYSTEM.  You should use this command before and after you add  or
       delete a system logical name.  For example:




                                   5-46
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EDEFINE)
                                (^EDEFINE)


             ___________         _____________      ___________
            @INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES (OF) SYSTEM<RET>
            CR: => CDR:
            DS: => DSK:
            HLP: => SYS:
            LP: => LPT:
            NEW: => PS:<LOADTEST>,PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>
            SY: => SYS:
            SYS: => PS:<LOADTEST>,PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>,
            PS:<FIELD-IMAGE>,PS:<UNSUPPORTED>,PS:<REL>
            TT: => TTY:


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       The following is a warning message associated with  the  ^EDEFINE
       command:

       %Logical name lognam:  was not defined

            The system logical name "lognam:" that you tried  to  delete
            was not defined.

       The following are error messages  associated  with  the  ^EDEFINE
       command:

       ?Directory terminating delimiter  is  not  preceded  by  a  valid
            beginning delimiter

            You made an error in typing the file specification.  Perhaps
            you forgot a comma between two directory names.

       ?Invalid character in filename

            You typed an invalid character in the file specification.

       ?More than one name field is not allowed

            You made an error in the file specification.   You  probably
            typed a period instead of a comma.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  To define SYS:  as PS:<SUBSYS> and PS:<NEW> using  all  guide
           words and prompts:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ________                       _
           $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) ?
            LOGICAL NAME TO DEFINE OR DELETE,
            OR "*" TO DELETE ALL
            ________                       ____      _
           $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) SYS: (AS) ?


                                   5-47
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EDEFINE)
                                (^EDEFINE)


            DEFINITION LIST OR NULL TO DELETE
            ________                       ____ ______
           $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) SYS: -<RET>
                _________________________
           (AS) PS:<SUBSYS>,PS:<NEW><RET>
                    _____
           [CONFIRM]<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       2.  To define BAS:  as PS:<BASIC>:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ________                       ____      _______________
           $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) BAS: (AS) PS:<BASIC><RET>
                    _____
           [CONFIRM]<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       3.  To delete the logical name BAS:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ________                       ____ _________
           $^EDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) BAS: (AS)<RET>
                    _____
           [CONFIRM]<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       4.  To define TEST:  as PS:<TEST>TSTPAK.FOR.3:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ________ _____ __________________________
           $^EDEFINE TEST: PS:<TEST>TSTPAK.FOR.3<RET>
                    _____
           [CONFIRM]<RET>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @























                                   5-48
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EEDDT)
                                 (^EEDDT)


  ^EEDDT - Debugging the EXEC
  ^EEDDT - Debugging the EXEC



  Function
  Function

       The ^EEDDT command  transfers  control  to  DDT  looking  at  the
       TOPS-20 EXEC with symbols.


  Format
  Format

       ^EEDDT


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       The ^EEDDT command should be used only by  a  system  programmer.
       If necessary, it gets DDT from the file SYS.UDDT.EXE and stores a
       symbol table pointer into it.  Normally,  this  command  is  used
       only by a system programmer to debug the EXEC.

  Hint
  Hint

       If you get into EDDT by mistake, type $G to get back to the EXEC.
       For example,

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ___________
            $^EEDDT<RET>
            ________
            DDT<RET>
             ______
            $G<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @


  Restriction
  Restriction

       You must have WHEEL capability to execute the ^EEDDT command.  If
       you  issue  the ^EEDDT command without WHEEL capability, an error
       message appears and the enabled prompt reappears.  For example,

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ___________
            $^EEDDT<RET>
            ?Insufficient privileges
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @







                                   5-49
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EPRINT)
                                (^EPRINT)


  ^EPRINT - Print Directory Parameters
  ^EPRINT - Print Directory Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The ^EPRINT  command  prints  on  your  terminal  the  parameters
       associated with the directory specified.


  Format
  Format

       $^EPRINT (DIRECTORY NAME) structure:<directory>,<RET>
       $$subcommand<RET>


  Arguments
  Arguments

       structure          specifies a  1-  to  6-character  alphanumeric
                          name   or   logical  name  for  the  structure
                          containing the directory for  which  you  want
                          directory  information.  If you do not specify
                          a  structure  name,  your  currently-connected
                          structure   is   assumed.   If  you  have  not
                          connected to a  specific  structure,  you  are
                          connected  by default to the public structure.
                          You cannot use recognition  on  the  structure
                          name.

       <directory>        specifies 1 to 39 letters, digits, hyphens, or
                          periods representing the name of the directory
                          for which you want information.  The directory
                          name  must be embedded in angle brackets.  You
                          can use recognition on this name.


  Subcommands
  Subcommands

       FAST                     specifies the output  be  a  short  list
                                equivalent  to  the LIST FAST subcommand
                                of the ^ECREATE command.   If  you  omit
                                the  comma  and  the subcommand, FAST is
                                assumed.

       NAME-ONLY                specifies the output be the name of  the
                                directory.   This  is  equivalent to the
                                LIST   NAME-ONLY   subcommand   of   the
                                ^ECREATE command.

       VERBOSE                  specifies  the   output   be   all   the
                                parameters    except    PASSWORD,    NOT


                                   5-50
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EPRINT)
                                (^EPRINT)


|                                ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS,    and    NOT
|                                INTERNET-WIZARD.   This is equivalent to
                                the  LIST  VERBOSE  subcommand  of   the
                                ^ECREATE command.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       This command  is  equivalent  to  the  EXEC  command  INFORMATION
       DIRECTORY.

       When you specify the  NAME-ONLY  subcommand,  the  structure  and
       directory name that you specified after ^EPRINT are output.  When
       you  specify the  VERBOSE subcommand,  all the  parameters listed
       on the next page are printed except the following:

|            Not ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
|            Not INTERNET-ACCESS
            Not ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
            Not DECNET-ACCESS

       If  you  use  the  FAST  subcommand  or  no   argument,   certain
       default-value  parameters are suppressed as indicated below.  The
       values are set when you use ^ECREATE.

       PARAMETER                           SUPPRESSED BY "FAST" IF

       Name                                    -
       Password                            always suppressed
       Working disk storage page limit         -
       Permanent disk storage page limit       -
       WHEEL                               not WHEEL
       OPERATOR                            not OPERATOR
       CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS     not CONFIDENTIAL
                                            INFORMATION ACCESS
       MAINTENANCE                         not MAINTENANCE
       IPCF                                not IPCF
       ENQ-DEQ                             not ENQ-DEQ
       SEMI-OPERATOR                       not SEMI-OPERATOR
       DECNET-ACCESS                       not DECNET-ACCESS
|       INTERNET-ACCESS                     not INTERNET-ACCESS
|       INTERNET-WIZARD                     not INTERNET-WIZARD
|       ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS           not ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-
                                            SOCKETS
       FILES-ONLY                          not FILES-ONLY
|       SECURE                              not SECURE
       Archive-online-expired-files        not ARCHIVE-ONLINE-
                                            EXPIRED-FILES
       Number of directory                     -
       Default file protection             777700
       Account default for login           none set


                                   5-51
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EPRINT)
                                (^EPRINT)


       Protection of directory             777700
       Generations to keep                 1
       Maximum subdirectories allowed      0
|       Last interactive login              never logged in
|       Last non-interactive login          never logged in
|       Password expiration date            none set
|       Interactive login failures          no failures
|       Non-interactive login failures      no failures
       User of groups                      none set
       Directory groups                    none set
       Subdirectory user groups allowed    none set
       Online expiration default           SYSTEM DEFAULT
                                            (USUALLY 60 DAYS)
       Offline expiration default              -
       TOPS10 project-programmer number        -

       (See ^ECREATE for a definition of the parameters.)


  Hints
  Hints

       If you want to see the values of all the parameters,  except  the
       ARPANET  ones, use the VERBOSE subcommand.  Once you are familiar
       with default values, you seldom need to use VERBOSE.

       You can also use the EXEC command, INFORMATION (ABOUT) DIRECTORY,
       instead of ^EPRINT.

       If you need to change a parameter, use ^ECREATE.


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

       The following are error  messages  associated  with  the  ^EPRINT
       command:

       ?Invalid structure name

            You specified a structure  name  incorrectly.   Perhaps  you
            omitted  the  angle brackets around a directory name, or you
            omitted the colon after the structure name.

       ?No such directory

            The user name that you  typed  does  not  exist.   Type  the
            command again with a valid user name; try recognition input.


  Examples
  Examples




                                   5-52
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EPRINT)
                                (^EPRINT)


       1.  To print a brief list of parameters for directory <PETER>:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            _______ ____________
           $^EPRINT <PETER><RET>
            Name PS:<PETER>
            Working disk storage page limit 100
            Permanent disk storage page limit 70
            MAINTENANCE
            Number of directory 523
            Account default for LOGIN INVENTORY
|            Last interactive LOGIN 24-Aug-88 13:05:52
|            Last non-interactive LOGIN 12-Sep-88 15:22:48
            TOPS10 project-programmer number 12,3553

            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       2.  To print all the parameters for directory <PETER>:

            _______ _____________
           $^EPRINT <PETER>,<RET>
             ____________
           $$VERBOSE<RET>
             _____
           $$<RET>
            Name PS:<PETER>
            Working disk storage page limit 100
            Permanent disk storage page limit 70
            not WHEEL
            not OPERATOR
            not CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION ACCESS
            MAINTENANCE
            not IPCF
            not ENQ-DEQ
            not FILES-ONLY
|            not SECURE
            Number of directory 523
            Default file protection 777700
            Account default for LOGIN INVENTORY
            Protection of directory 777700
            Generations to keep 1
            Maximum subdirectories allowed 0
|            Last interactive login 24-Aug-89 13:05:52
|            Last non-interactive login 23-Aug-89 20:57:07
|            Password expires on 18-Oct-89 07:01:00
|            Number of interactive login failures 1
|            Number of non-interactive login failures 2
            User of groups - none set
            Directory groups - none set
            Subdirectory user groups allowed - none set
            Online expiration default 60 days
            Offline expiration default 90 days
            TOPS10 project-programmer number 12,3553



                                   5-53
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^EPRINT)
                                (^EPRINT)


            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       3.  To use recognition input, determine arguments, and then get a
           brief list of parameters:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            _______                  ____________
           $^EPRINT (DIRECTORY NAME) <ALAN>,<RET>
             _
           $$? confirm with carriage return
             or one of the following:
            FAST        NAME-ONLY    VERBOSE
             _____
           $$<RET>
            NAME PS:<ALAN>
            Working disk storage page limit 800
            Permanent disk storage page limit 400
            Number of directory 142
            Account default for login 120
|            Last interactive login 27-OCT-89 07:45:30
|            Last non-interactive login 12-OCT-89 03:30:44
            TOPS10 project-programmer number - none set

            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @






























                                   5-54
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EQUIT)
                                 (^EQUIT)


  ^EQUIT - Halting the EXEC
  ^EQUIT - Halting the EXEC



  Function
  Function

       The ^EQUIT command halts the EXEC (the TOPS-20 command processor)
       and  returns control to the program under which the EXEC is being
       run.


  Format
  Format

       ^EQUIT


  Hint
  Hint

       The ^EQUIT command should be used only by  a  system  programmer.
       For  the privileged user the command is normally used to get into
       the MINI-EXEC.  The prompt  to  indicate  that  you  are  in  the
       MINI-EXEC is MX>.  Some commands for the MINI-EXEC are documented
       in the TOPS-20 Software  Installation  Guide,  because  they  are
       useful in the installation process.

       If you get into the  MINI-EXEC  by  mistake,  type  S  after  the
       prompt.   TART will be printed immediately.  Press RETURN and you
       are back at EXEC level with the enable prompt.  (See the  example
       below.)

       Once you use ^EQUIT to enter the  MINI-EXEC,  whenever  you  type
       <CTRL/P>  thereafter,  you enter the MINI-EXEC.  The <CTRL/P> has
       this effect until you log out.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       You must have WHEEL capability to execute the ^EQUIT command.  If
       you issue the ^EQUIT command without WHEEL capability, a question
       mark appears and the enabled prompt reappears.  For example,

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             ___________
            $^EQUIT<RET>
            ?
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @


  Example
  Example

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>


                                   5-55
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^EQUIT)
                                 (^EQUIT)


             ___________
            $^EQUIT<RET>

            INTERRUPT AT 17377
               __________
            MX>START<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>
            @















































                                   5-56
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESEND)
                                 (^ESEND)


  ^ESEND - Sending Messages to Users Immediately
  ^ESEND - Sending Messages to Users Immediately



  Function
  Function

       The ^ESEND command  sends  a  single-  or  multiple-line  message
       immediately  to  a  particular  user,  a particular terminal-line
       number, or all users, or terminal numbers, on the local system or
       a remote system within the cluster.


  Format
  Format

       ^ESEND (TO) arguments


  Arguments
  Arguments

       user name          specifies a user name or an asterisk  (*)  for
                          all users.

       terminal number    specifies  a  terminal-line   number   or   an
                          asterisk (*) for all terminals.

       /NODE:node-name::  specifies  a  remote  node  name  within   the
                          cluster  or  an  asterisk (*) for all users on
                          all systems within the cluster.

       message            specifies a message of one  to  six  lines  of
                          text followed by a carriage return.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       The ^ESEND command accepts multiple-line messages with up to  six
       lines  of text.  You can continue typing the message past the end
       of a line and  onto  the  next  line,  without  pressing  RETURN.
       ^ESEND  reorganizes  the  message so that any words split between
       two lines appear on the same line on receiving terminals.

       If you want to avoid divided words while typing your message, use
       the hyphen (-) continue character.  At the end of each line, type
       a space and a hyphen, and then press RETURN.

       The  ^ESEND  command  does  not  send   the   message   to   PTYs
       (pseudo-terminals).   When  you  end  the command, the message is
       then printed on the specified terminals.





                                   5-57
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESEND)
                                 (^ESEND)


  Hints
  Hints

       Use the TOPS-20 SYSTAT command to determine a user's line number.

       If you wish to begin the message with a question mark  (?),  type
       CTRL/V  before  the  "?".   The CTRL/V allows the "?" to be taken
       literally instead of printing the help text.  Note that CTRL/V is
       required only if the "?" is in the first character position.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  To immediately tell all users to free up disk space,  because
           available disk space is getting low:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ______ _ ______ ______ ___ _______ ___________
           $^ESEND * PLEASE DELETE AND EXPUNGE UNNECESSARY
            _____ ________
            FILES NOW<RET>

           [From OPERATOR on line 130: PLEASE DELETE AND EXPUNGE
           UNNECESSARY FILES NOW]
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       2.  Send a multiple-line message to TTY20:.  Note that the  words
           "installed" and "converted" are divided between lines.

            ______  ______  ____  ___  __________  ________  _______  __
           $^ESEND  ASMITH  Your  new  short-ship  tracking  program  is
           _________  __  _____   ________  ___ ________ _____ ______ __
           installed  on  SYS:.   However,  the database files cannot be
           _________ _____ ________  ______ ____ _____ ________ __  ____
           converted until tonight.  Please wait until tomorrow to  make
           ___ _____________
           new entries.<RET>

           The message appears on the receiving terminals as:

           [From OPERATOR on line 17:
           Your new short-ship tracking program is installed on
            SYS:.  However, the database files cannot be converted
            until tonight.  Please wait until tomorrow to make new
            entries.]

       3.  Send the same message as in Example 2 only use  the  continue
           character.

            ______ ______ ____ ___ __________ ________ _______ __ ______
           $^ESEND ASMITH Your new short-ship tracking program is -<RET>
           _________ __ _____  ________ ___ ________ _____ ______
           installed on SYS:.  However, the database files -<RET>
           ______ __ _________ _____ ________  ______ ____ _____ ______
           cannot be converted until tonight.  Please wait until -<RET>
           ________ __ ____ ___ _____________
           tomorrow to make new entries.<RET>






                                   5-58
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


  ^ESET - Setting Job, System, and Terminal Parameters
  ^ESET - Setting Job, System, and Terminal Parameters



  Function
  Function

       The ^ESET command sets various parameters  for  a  job,  for  the
       system, and for terminals.


  Format
  Format

       ^ESET argument


  Arguments
  Arguments

       CLUSTER-INFORMATION
       CLUSTER-INFORMATION

            specifies to allow information (@INFORMATION SYSTEM command)
            about the local system to be reported on remote systems.


       NO CLUSTER-INFORMATION
       NO CLUSTER-INFORMATION

            specifies  to  disable  (not  allow)  information  from  the
            @INFORMATION SYSTEM command on remote systems.


       CLUSTER-SENDALLS
       CLUSTER-SENDALLS

            specifies to allow the acceptance of remote sendalls to  the
            local system or node, by way of the @SEND /NODE:  command.


       NO CLUSTER-SENDALLS
       NO CLUSTER-SENDALLS

            specifies to disallow the acceptance of remote  sendalls  to
            the  local  system  or  node,  by  way  of  the @SEND /NODE:
            command.


       DATE-AND-TIME (TO) date and time
       DATE-AND-TIME (TO) date and time

            Sets the system date and time while the system  is  running.
            This  is  helpful if you type an incorrect date or time when
            you start the system.  It is also  useful  when  the  system
            time  has fallen behind because the system has been down for
            a while and then continued.

            (See the examples of legal dates and times under the ^ECEASE


                                   5-59
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


            command.)

                             ----- Characteristic -----

            The ^ESET DATE-AND-TIME command, given from any OPR terminal
            in  a CFS cluster, sets the date and time for all systems in
            the cluster.

                                  ----- Hint -----

            If  you  set  the  time  back,  you  can  seriously   affect
            accounting and the compilation of user programs.  Therefore,
            you should notify all users that you had  to  set  the  time
            back.

            After you give the  ^ESET  DATE-AND-TIME  command,  you  can
            check  the  results  with the TOPS-20 DAYTIME command or the
            OPR command:  SHOW DAYTIME.

                                ----- Example -----

            To change the date and time to February 29, 1980, 8 a.m.:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ _____________ ____ _________ ________
                 $^ESET DATE-AND-TIME (TO) 29-FEB-80 800<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

       FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED
       FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED

            specifies that the /FAST switch is available with the  LOGIN
            command.   This  switch prevents processing of LOGIN.CMD and
            COMAND.CMD files, printing of system mail, and  printing  of
            the notice of new mail.

            This is the default setting.

       NO FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED
       NO FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED

            specifies that the /FAST switch is not  available  with  the
            LOGIN command.

                                ----- Example -----

            To disallow the use of the /FAST  switch  with  the  TOPS-20
            LOGIN command:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ __ ________________________
                 $^ESET NO FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @


                                   5-60
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


       LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES
       LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES

            specifies that level-one messages (messages of  interest  to
            all  users)  are  sent  to  terminals  on  the  system.  The
            INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS displays whether or not  level-one
            messages are enabled.

                                ----- Example -----

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _____ _______________________
            $^ESET LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

       NO LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES
       NO LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES

            specifies that level-one messages (messages of  interest  to
            all users) are sent only to the CTY (console terminal).

                                ----- Example -----

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _____ __ _______________________
            $^ESET NO LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGES<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

       LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES
       LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES

            specifies that level-zero messages  (messages  primarily  of
            interest  to operations personnel) are sent to all terminals
            on  the  system.   The  INFORMATION  SYSTEM-STATUS  displays
            whether or not level-zero messages are enabled.

                                ----- Example -----

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _____ ________________________
            $^ESET LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

       NO LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES
       NO LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES

            specifies that level-zero messages  (messages  primarily  of
            interest  to  operations personnel) are sent only to the CTY
            (console terminal).

                                ----- Example -----

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _____ ________________________
            $^ESET LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGES<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>





                                   5-61
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


       LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal
       LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal

            specifies the terminals from which LOGINs will succeed.  The
            value of terminal can be:

                 ANY-TERMINAL
|                 INTERNET-TERMINALS
                 CONSOLE-TERMINAL
                 DECNET-TERMINALS
                 LOCAL-TERMINALS
                 PSEUDO-TERMINALS
                 REMOTE-TERMINALS

            The argument  (terminal)  you  give  adds  to  the  list  of
            terminals allowed.  It does not change the list to only what
            you just typed.

            Before SYSJOB.RUN is processed at system startup, LOGINs are
            allowed  from  PSEUDO-TERMINALS  and  the  CONSOLE-TERMINAL.
            After SYSJOB.RUN is processed, LOGINs are allowed  from  any
            terminal.

                                        NOTE

                You cannot use this command to allow LOGINs from LAT
                terminals.   Use  the  START  command  from  the LCP
                command set.  See Chapter 4 (LCP COMMANDS) for  more
                information   about   allowing   LOGINs   from   LAT
                terminals.

                                 ----- Hints -----

            To  check  the  current  LOGINS-ALLOWED,  type  the  TOPS-20
            command INFORMATION (ABOUT) SYSTEM-STATUS.

            To disallow certain terminals, use ^ESET NO  LOGINS-ALLOWED,
            described as the next Argument to the ^ESET command.

                                ----- Examples -----

            1.  If you previously had LOGINs  at  the  console  terminal
                only and you also want to allow pseudo-terminal LOGINs:

                 ___________
                @ENABLE<RET>
                 _____ ______________      _____________________
                $^ESET LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) PSEUDO-TERMINALS<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

            2.  To allow LOGINs from anywhere:

                 ___________
                @ENABLE<RET>
                 _____ ______________      _________________
                $^ESET LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) ANY-TERMINAL<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                                   5-62
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


                @

       NO LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal
       NO LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) terminal

            specifies to disallow LOGINs from  certain  terminals.   The
            value terminal can be:

                 ANY-TERMINAL
|                 INTERNET-TERMINALS
                 CONSOLE-TERMINAL
                 DECNET-TERMINALS
                 LOCAL-TERMINALS
                 PSEUDO-TERMINALS
                 REMOTE-TERMINALS

            Thus, you can  prevent  certain  users  from  accessing  the
            system.   The  command  removes the specified terminals from
            the list of terminals from which LOGINs are allowed.

                                        NOTE

                You cannot use this command to disallow LOGINs  from
                LAT  terminals.   Use  the STOP command from the LCP
                command set.  See Chapter 4 (LCP COMMANDS) for  more
                information   about   disallowing  LOGINs  from  LAT
                terminals.

                                ----- Example -----

            To disallow LOGINs from remote terminals:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ __ ______________      _____________________
                 $^ESET NO LOGINS-ALLOWED (ON) REMOTE-TERMINALS<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

       MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH 'n'
       MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH 'n'

            specifies a minimum password length to help ensure directory
            security.    The   'n'  must  be  a  value  from  1  to  39,
            representing the minimum number of characters needed  for  a
            password  specification  to the directory.  You can find the
            current setting for the minimum  password  length  with  the
            EXEC command INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS.

       NO MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH
       NO MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH

            specifies that the password must be at least 8 characters in
            length.    This   is   the   default   when   the   argument
            MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH  is  not  specified  in  the   ^ESET
            command.

       OFFLINE-STRUCTURES (timeout interval) mm:ss
       OFFLINE-STRUCTURES (timeout interval) mm:ss
                                   5-63
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


            specifies to enable the offline structure facility  and  set
            the  timeout interval to "mm:ss", where mm is minutes and ss
            is seconds.  The default is  one  (1:00)  minute.   You  can
            specify  from one second (00:01) to fifteen minutes (15:00).
            The time you specify is the length of time  between  when  a
            disk  unit is noticed as offline by the monitor and the time
            when the monitor marks the structure as offline.

       NO OFFLINE-STRUCTURES
       NO OFFLINE-STRUCTURES

            specifies to disable the offline  structure  facility.   The
            TOPS-20  monitor  resumes structure operation as in previous
            releases.

       OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE
       OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE

            specifies that there is an operator present on  the  system.
            It  also  notifies  OPR/ORION  that  form  changing  can  be
            performed on the line printers.

                                ----- Example -----

            When you return after no operator was present, type:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ___________________________
                 $^ESET OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

       NO OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE
       NO OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE

            specifies there is no operator present on the system.   (The
            INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  SYSTEM-STATUS command displays whether
            or not an operator is in attendance.) This command  prevents
            certain   system   programs,   for   example,  PLEASE,  from
            indefinitely waiting for an operator to  respond.   It  also
            notifies  OPR/ORION  to  not allow any forms changing on the
            line printers.  Be sure to give this command  if  you  leave
            the computer room temporarily or if your shift is ending and
            no operator is coming on duty.

            This is the default setting.

                                ----- Example -----

            To indicate that  there  is  no  operator  present,  send  a
            message to all users that you are leaving, and then type:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ __ ___________________________
                 $^ESET NO OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>


                                   5-64
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


                 @

       PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|       PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|
|            specifies  that  certain  combinations  of  characters   are
|            illegal  for  use as passwords.  You can place such words in
|            the   file   SYSTEM:PASSWORD.DICTIONARY   and   have    them
|            automatically matched against newly requested passwords.  If
|            a match occurs, the password is denied and another  must  be
|            selected.
|
|                                ----- Example -----
|
                  ___________
|                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ________________________
|                 $^ESET PASSWORD-DICTIONARY<RET>
                  ____________
|                 $DISABLE<RET>
|                 @
|
       NO PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|       NO PASSWORD-DICTIONARY
|
|            specifies  to  disable  the   PASSWORD-DICTIONARY   feature.
|            Newly-supplied  passwords  are not checked against a list of
|            non-acceptable password combinations.
|
       PASSWORD-EXPIRATION n
|       PASSWORD-EXPIRATION n
|
|            specifies the number of days a password is valid  since  the
|            time it was last changed.  The value of n is a number from 1
|            366.  The default number of days is 30.   After  a  password
|            has  expired, the user is allowed to log in, but must change
|            the password immediately.   (The  INFORMATION  SYSTEM-STATUS
|            command displays the number of days a password is valid.)
|
|                                ----- Example -----
|
|            To set the password expiration to 45 days, type:
|
                  ___________
|                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ ___________________ _______
|                 $^ESET PASSWORD-EXPIRATION 45<RET>
                  ____________
|                 $DISABLE<RET>
|                 @
|
       NO PASSWORD-EXPIRATION
|       NO PASSWORD-EXPIRATION
|
|            specifies to diable the  password-expiration  feature.   The
|            TOPS-20  monitor  does  not  obligate  users to change their
|            password in a specified number of days.

       PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)
       PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)

            specifies that the EXEC is to communicate with your  private


                                   5-65
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


            copy  of the Galaxy subsystem, rather than with the system's
            copy.  For example, when you issue such Galaxy-related  EXEC
            commands  as PRINT or SUBMIT, your private copy of QUASAR (a
            major component of the Galaxy subsystem) gets control.

       NO PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)
       NO PRIVATE-QUASAR (FOR PRIVATE GALAXY)

            specifies that the EXEC is no longer to recognize your  copy
            of  the  Galaxy subsystem.  After this command, the system's
            copy handles your GALAXY-related EXEC commands.

       RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) n (TO) m (PERCENT)
       RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) n (TO) m (PERCENT)

            specifies a guarantee of at least a certain  percentage  (m)
            of  run-time  to  a  particular  job  (n).  The n is the job
            number and the m is the percentage of runtime from 1 to 100.
            Then,  from  the  time  a  job  wants  to  run,  the TOPS-20
            scheduler tries to give  the  job  at  least  the  specified
            percentage  of  central  processing time, for as long as the
            job continues to run.  Be extremely cautious about giving  a
            job 100 percent, because you may not be able to give another
            command.  Note that this  command  has  no  effect  if  your
            system is running the class scheduler.

                                ----- Example -----

            To guarantee 5 percent runtime to job 11:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ __________________           ________
                 $^ESET RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) 11-<RET>
                       _          _____
                  (TO) 5 (PERCENT)<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

       NO RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) number
       NO RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) number

            specifies to cancel a run-time guarantee  for  a  particular
            job.

                                ----- Example -----

            To cancel the runtime guarantee for job 11:

                  ___________
                 @ENABLE<RET>
                  _____ __ __________________           _______
                 $^ESET NO RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE (FOR JOB) 11<RET>
                  ____________
                 $DISABLE<RET>
                 @

       SYSTEM-ACCESS-CONTROL-JOB
|       SYSTEM-ACCESS-CONTROL-JOB
|
|            specifies that the Access Control Job (ACJ) is  run  by  the


                                   5-66
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


|            monitor  as part of job 0, where it is more secure.  The ACJ
|            helps govern access to many of the  system's  resources  and
|            services,  reduce  or  prevent  unauthorized  access  to the
|            system, and investigate occurrences of unauthorized  access.
|            It  can  control scheduling classes, the bias control, batch
|            background queue, logging  in,  use  of  physical  resources
|            (tape   drives,   terminals,   structures),   and   enabling
|            capabilities.
|
|            There  is  no  corresponding  NO   SYSTEM-ACCESS-CONTROL-JOB
|            command.

       TERMINAL n m SPEED (OF INPUT) r (OF OUTPUT) t
       TERMINAL n m SPEED (OF INPUT) r (OF OUTPUT) t

            specifies that terminal (n), or a range of terminals  (n m),
            where  n  is  the  lowest  terminal line number and m is the
            highest, have an input speed of r and an output speed of  t;
            r is the receive baud rate; and t is the transmit baud rate.
            The legal baud rates are 0, 75, 50, 110, 134, 150, 200, 300,
            600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, and 9600.

            This command works like the user command TERMINAL SPEED, but
            it also allows you to set the speeds for any terminal on the
            system.  If you give only one  speed,  it  applies  to  both
            input and output.

                                ----- Example -----

            1.  To set a terminal's receive and transmit speed to 300:

                 ___________
                @ENABLE<RET>
                 _____ ________ __ _____ ________
                $^ESET TERMINAL 20 SPEED 300<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

            2.  To set all terminals from terminal 30 to terminal 45 to
                receive speeds of
                4800 and transmit speeds of 9600:

                 ___________
                @ENABLE<RET>
                 _____ ________ __ __ _____ ____ _________
                $^ESET TERMINAL 30 45 SPEED 4800 9600<RET>
                 ____________
                $DISABLE<RET>
                @

       WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
       WORKING-SET-PRELOADING

            specifies that the  entire  working  set  of  a  process  is
            brought  into memory at once when the process is selected to
            run.  Otherwise, this action occurs on a page-by-page  basis
            (demand paging).



                                   5-67
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


            You should enable working set preloading only if your system
            runs  large  compute-bound  jobs.   If your system runs many
            interactive jobs, disable working set  preloading  with  the
            ^ESET NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING command.

            The INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command  displays  whether  or
            not working set preloading is enabled.














































                                   5-68
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


                                ----- Example -----

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _____ ___________________________
            $^ESET WORKING-SET-PRELOADING<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>

       NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
       NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING

            specifies that the minimum pages in a process's working  set
            are brought into memory.  Pages are added to the working set
            on a page-by-page  basis  as  they  are  referenced  (demand
            paging).

                                ----- Example -----

             ___________
            @ENABLE<RET>
             _____ __ ___________________________
            $^ESET NO WORKING-SET-PRELOADING<RET>
             ____________
            $DISABLE<RET>


  Restrictions
  Restrictions

  The following are error messages associated with the ^ESET command:

       ?Invalid date format

            You typed the date incorrectly.

       ?Invalid terminal range

            You  must  type  the  lowest  terminal  number  first   when
            specifying a range.

       ?Invalid time format

            You typed the time incorrectly.

       ?Must be between 1 and 39

            You must type a value between 1  and  39  for  the  password
            length (MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH).

       ?Non-digit typed where number required

            You must type a number for the argument value.

       ?Non-octal digit typed where octal number required

            You must type an octal number for the argument value.

       ?Nonexistent job


                                   5-69
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                 (^ESET)
                                 (^ESET)


            You typed a job number that does not exist.

       ?Run time guarantee percentage must be from 1-100

            When you specify the percentage for RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE,  you
            must give a number from 1 to 100.


  Example
  Example

       To see the various arguments to the ^ESET command, type a  ?   in
       place of the argument.


        ___________
       @ENABLE<RET>
        _____ _
       $^ESET ? one of the following:
        CLUSTER-INFORMATION     CLUSTER-SENDALLS
        DATE-AND-TIME           FAST-LOGINS-ALLOWED
        LEVEL-ONE-MESSAGE       LEVEL-ZERO-MESSAGE
        LOGINS-ALLOWED          MINIMUM-PASSWORD-LENGTH
        NO                      OFFLINE-STRUCTURES
        OPERATOR-IN-ATTENDANCE  PRIVATE-QUASAR
        RUN-TIME-GUARANTEE      TERMINAL
        WORKING-SET-PRELOADING
        ____________
       $DISABLE<RET>
       @



























                                   5-70
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ESPEAK)
                                (^ESPEAK)


  ^ESPEAK - Giving Commands To SYSJOB
  ^ESPEAK - Giving Commands To SYSJOB


  Function
  Function

       The ^ESPEAK command sends commands to SYSJOB, which is run  under
       job  0.   SYSJOB  is  a  system  task  that controls other system
       processes and jobs.  ^ESPEAK allows you to check  the  status  of
       the processes under SYSJOB and restart them, if necessary.


  Format
  Format

       ^ESPEAK (TO SYSJOB)<RET>
       [Please type SYSJOB commands  - end with  ^Z]
        text               (SYSJOB commands)


  Subcommands
  Subcommands

       The SYSJOB commands, which  you  must  use  to  communicate  with
       processes  run  under  SYSJOB,  are explained below.  For ease of
       discussion, they are not alphabetical.


       PROCESS COMMANDS
       PROCESS COMMANDS

            RUN filespec of program
            RUN filespec of program

                 This command creates an inferior process and  runs  the
                 specified  program in it.  The process is identified by
                 a name consisting of the first six  characters  of  the
                 name portion of the file specification.

            KILL name
            KILL name

                 This command kills the process of the specified name.

            PURGE process number
            PURGE process number

                 This command kills the process of the specified number.
                 Process  numbers  appear  in  the  first  column of the
                 STATUS command display.  With the  PURGE  command,  you
                 can distinguish among processes having the same name.

            FREEZE name
            FREEZE name

                 This command  temporarily  suspends  execution  of  the
                 specified  process (name).  This may later be undone by
                 the RESUME command.



                                   5-71
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ESPEAK)
                                (^ESPEAK)


            RESUME name
            RESUME name

                 This command continues execution of the process  having
                 the  specified  name,  thus  undoing  the  effect  of a
                 previous FREEZE.

            DUMP process number
            DUMP process number

                 This command allows you  to  obtain  a  snapshot  of  a
                 process'    memory   without   disturbing   operations.
                 Execution of the process is temporarily suspended;  the
                 ACs  and  memory  contents  are  saved in file xxx.DMP,
                 where xxx  is  the  process  name;  then  execution  is
                 resumed.  Refer to Example 4.


       JOB COMMANDS
       JOB COMMANDS

            JOB ident text-string
            JOB ident text-string

                 This command transmits text to a job via  a  PTY.   The
                 ident  is an arbitrary small integer not related to the
                 system job number of the  job  being  controlled.   You
                 should  choose  the  smallest number (beginning with 0)
                 not presently  in  use  when  a  new  job  is  desired.
                 Thereafter, that number identifies that job for SYSJOB.

                 The  text-string  is  a  string  of   system   commands
                 surrounded  by  any  character not occurring within the
                 string, for example, /a  string  of  characters/.   The
                 string   may   include   <RET>,  other  format  control
                 characters, and control characters.  You must  indicate
                 a  control character by typing an up-arrow (^) followed
                 by the character.  If you want to indicate an up-arrow,
                 when  it  is  not  being  used  to  indicate  a control
                 character, type two up-arrows.  If there is no  job  in
                 existence  when a JOB command is executed, a ^C is sent
                 ahead of the  specified  text  to  create  one.   Note,
                 however,  that  the job is not automatically logged in,
                 so a LOGIN command must be given via the JOB command.

                 Any output from the job is handled by SYSJOB and  typed
                 on  the  CTY.   Each  line  is  prefixed with the ident
                 number of the job which produced the output.  Output is
                 only  typed  at the end of a line, so prompt characters
                 coming from a job are not seen until the  remainder  of
                 the line has been input.

            KILLJOB ident
            KILLJOB ident

                 This command forces a LOGOUT of the specified job.


                                   5-72
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ESPEAK)
                                (^ESPEAK)


            CCJOB ident
            CCJOB ident

                 This command transmits two ^C's to  the  specified  job
                 and  holds  any  further input until the ^C's have been
                 processed.


       OTHER COMMANDS
       OTHER COMMANDS

            STATUS
            STATUS

                 This command prints, on the  CTY,  the  status  of  all
                 existing inferior processes and jobs presently known to
                 SYSJOB.

            RELOAD
            RELOAD

                 This  command  causes  SYSJOB  to  reload  and  restart
                 itself.  Use this command with great caution, as it can
                 cause an abrupt termination of all  inferior  processes
                 and  detach  any PTY-controlled jobs.  If possible, you
                 should kill all processes and log out all  jobs  before
                 the RELOAD is executed.  This command allows you to put
                 a  new  version  of  SYSJOB   into   operation   during
                 timesharing  and  provides  the possibility of recovery
                 after a severe SYSJOB malfunction.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       All text on the line following the prompt message up to CTRL/Z is
       input  to  SYSJOB.   Actually,  the text is written into the file
       SYSTEM:SYSJOB.COMMANDS.  Then, a  wakeup  request  is  issued  to
       SYSJOB  which  reads  the  file  and performs the commands in it.
       Thus, it is equivalent to:

            COPY (FROM) TTY: (TO) SYSTEM:SYSJOB.COMMANDS

       as soon as SYSJOB wakes up and reads the file.

       The text must consist of SYSJOB commands, which are described  in
       this  section  under  the Subcommands heading.  The same commands
       are  recognized  in  both  the  SYSJOB.COMMANDS  file   and   the
       SYSJOB.RUN  file,  which  SYSJOB  reads  at  system startup.  The
       commands are in the form  of  a  keyword,  possibly  followed  by
       arguments.  The commands (text) can be divided into three types:

            1.  Those affecting an inferior process:

                     RUN, KILL, FREEZE, RESUME



                                   5-73
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ESPEAK)
                                (^ESPEAK)


            2.  Those  affecting  a  job  being  controlled  by  a   PTY
                (pseudo-terminal):

                     JOB, KILLJOB, CCJOB

            3.  Others:

                     STATUS, RELOAD

  Hint
  Hint

       All SYSJOB output appears on the CTY.  Therefore, if you are at a
       terminal  other  than  the CTY and you want to see SYSJOB output,
       enable for OPERATOR or WHEEL capability,  TALK  to  the  terminal
       that  is  the  CTY,  give  the ^ESPEAK command followed by SYSJOB
       commands, and type BREAK after you have seen the output.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       The following  error  message  is  associated  with  the  ^ESPEAK
       command:

       ? CAN'T GET JFN ON <SYSTEM>SYSJOB.COMMANDS

            You have typed ENABLE but you do not have OPERATOR or  WHEEL
            capability.       Therefore,      you      cannot      write
            SYSTEM:SYSJOB.COMMANDS.  You should log into an account that
            has  OPERATOR  capability  (for example, OPERATOR), and then
            type ENABLE and reissue the ^ESPEAK command.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  A sample SYSTEM:SYSJOB.RUN file:

           RUN SYS:INFO
           JOB 0 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR
           ENABLE
           ^ESET LOGIN PSEUDO
           ^ESET LOGIN CONSOLE
           ^ESET OPERATOR
           PTYCON
           GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO
           /
           JOB 1 \LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR
           ENABLE
|           GET SYS:MOUNTR
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:MAILER
|           START/STAY


                                   5-74
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ESPEAK)
                                (^ESPEAK)


|           GET SYS:MAPPER
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:SPRINT
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:NMAIL
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:DMAILR
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:MLSRV
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:ORION
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:QUASAR
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:LPTSPL
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:LPTSPL
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:CDRIVE
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:BATCON
|           START/STAY
|           GET SYS:FAL
|           START/STAY
           \
           JOB 2 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR
           ENABLE
|           RUN SYS:NMLT20
           /

       2.  To check the status of SYSJOB's inferior processes and jobs:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ____________
           $^ESPEAK<RET>
            [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH ^Z]
           STATUS<RET>
           ^Z
            ^
            |
           <CTRL/Z>

           Remember that the output will go to the CTY.  If you  are  at
           another terminal, see the Hint above.

           A sample of the CTY output follows.

           OPR>STATUS
           SYSJOB status at 25-Sep-79 1008
|             0 INFO   DISMS at 1012  25-Sep-79 1008
             0: No job
             1: Job 2, TTY207, (PRIV)


                                   5-75
                           ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                          ^E PRIVILEGED COMMANDS
                                (^ESPEAK)
                                (^ESPEAK)


             2: Job 3, TTY210, (PRIV)

           OPR>

       3.  To restart INFO:

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ____________
           $^ESPEAK<RET>
            [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMAND - END WITH ^Z]
           RUN SYS:INFO<RET>
           ^Z
            ^
            |
           <CTRL/Z>
            ____________
           $DISABLE<RET>
           @

       4.  To examine a process, first give the STATUS command to obtain
           the number assigned to that process:

            _______            _____
           $^ESPEAK (TO SYSJOB)<RET>
            [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH Z]

           ___________
           STATUS<RET>
           <CTRL/Z>
           @STATUS
           SYSJOB status at 22-Jul-81 1110
             0 ACS    DISMS at 151  22-Jul-81 1110

           The output  above  shows  that  there  is  only  one  process
           currently  known  to  SYSJOB.   To  examine it, give the DUMP
           command, and specify the process number, which appears in the
           leftmost column of the status display:

            _______            _____
           $^ESPEAK (TO SYSJOB)<RET>
            [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH Z]

           ____ ______
           DUMP 0<RET>
           <CTRL/Z>

           Output similar to the following appears on the CTY, providing
           you  with  the  name  of  the  file  that  contains the saved
           process-related information:

           DUMP 0
             0 ACS    DISMS at 151  22-Jul-81 1111
           %DUMPING FORK ADDRESS SPACE TO FILE ACS.DMP.3

           Use the FILDDT program to examine the file.




                                   5-76












                                CHAPTER 6
                                CHAPTER 6

                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



  6.1  INTRODUCTION TO PTYCON
  6.1  INTRODUCTION TO PTYCON

  Your TOPS-20 operating system considers all  jobs  to  be  timesharing
  jobs;  thus,  each  job must be associated with a timesharing terminal
  (TTY).  In some situations, however, it is inconvenient to  require  a
  timesharing  terminal  to  be associated with every job on the system;
  for example, where many jobs are  needed  for  a  single  application.
  PTYCON  provides  a  method whereby a single job running from a single
  timesharing terminal can control many subjobs simultaneously.  This is
  accomplished by implementing a "device" called a pseudo-terminal (PTY)
  that, in  effect,  is  a  software  simulation  of  a  terminal.   The
  controlling  job,  PTYCON,  can  send information to a PTY and receive
  information from a PTY.

  PTYCON  starts  running  subjobs  by  means  of  pseudo-terminals  and
  controls  each subjob by sending appropriate information (for example,
  the commands and/or data you give it) over  the  PTY  controlling  the
  subjob.   You can run as many subjobs as there are PTYs on the system,
  up to a maximum of 24.  PTYCON allows you to remain  at  one  terminal
  and still control multiple jobs by means of multiple PTYs.



  6.2  STARTING PTYCON
  6.2  STARTING PTYCON

  PTYCON is normally started  automatically  on  your  console  terminal
  (CTY)  by  SYSJOB when the system is brought up.  At this time, PTYCON
  reads and processes the file <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO (usually  referred  to
  as   an   "Auto-File").   This  file  contains  commands  for  PTYCON.
  Following is example of a <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO  file  that  defines  and
  starts the subjobs OPR, CHECKD, and FILCOM:

       SILENCE
       LOG
       DEFINE 0 OPR
       OPR-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
       DEFINE 1 CKD


                                   6-1
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



       CKD-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
       DEFINE 2 FIL
       FIL-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR
       OPR-ENABLE
       OPR-OPR
       CKD-ENABLE
       CKD-CHECKD
       FIL-FILCOM
       NO SILENCE
       WHAT ALL
       CONNECT OPR
         <RET>                  ;Line contains a carriage return

  This processing consists of bringing up OPR  and  any  other  programs
  that you might need such as CHECKD and FILCOM.  If PTYCON does not use
  PTYCON.ATO automatically, you can attach to PTYCON and, after you  see
  the prompt PTYCON>, type:

       ___ _______________________
       GET <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO<RET>

  For example,

        ______ _____________
       @SYSTAT OPERATOR<RET>

          0   DET  SYSJOB  OPERATOR
          1   205  PTYCON  OPERATOR
          2   207  MFORK   OPERATOR
          3   210  NETCON  OPERATOR
          4   211  OPR     OPERATOR
          6   212  ACJ     OPERATOR
          7   213  FRECHK  OPERATOR
          8   DET  PERF    OPERATOR
          9   214  IBMSPL  OPERATOR
         22     3  EXEC    OPERATOR
         27   DET  EXEC    OPERATOR
        ______ ________ ______
       @ATTACH OPERATOR 1<RET>
                                     _____
        [ATTACHED TO TTY102, CONFIRM]<RET>
                        _____
       PASSWORD:        <RET>
       _____
       <RET>
               ___ _______________________
       PTYCON> GET <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO<RET>
       PTYCON> SILENCE
       PTYCON.LOG.1
       PTYCON> WHAT ALL
       OPR(0)     39       OPERATOR      OPR       TO         0:0:0
       CKD(1)     36       OPERATOR      CHECKD    TO         0:0:0
       FIL(2)     32       OPERATOR      FILCOM    TO         0:0:0
       PTYCON>
       **** OPR(0) 09:00:38 ****
       OPR>
       **** CKD(1) 09:00:39 ****
       CHECKD>


                                   6-2
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



       **** FIL(2) 09:00:40 ****
       *
       PTYCON> CONNECT OPR
       [Connected to subjob OPR(0)]

       OPR>

  You could also follow the GET with a different file  specification  to
  use a special ATO file.

  If the output from SYSTAT OPERATOR showed that PTYCON was not running,
  you must start it yourself.  To do this, type PTYCON at system command
  level.  When PTYCON responds with its prompt, type the GET command  to
  run the auto file.

        ___________
       @PTYCON<RET>
               ___ _______________________
       PTYCON> GET <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO<RET>
       PTYCON> SILENCE
       PTYCON.LOG.1
               .
               .
               .
       OPR>

  The following is an example of the output generated  by  PTYCON  after
  the TOPS-20 monitor starts.

       SJ  0: $PTYCON
       SJ  0: PTYCON> GET <SYSTEM>:PTYCON.ATO
       SJ  0: PTYCON> SILENCE
       SJ  0: PTYCON.LOG.1
       SJ  0: PTYCON> WHAT ALL
       SJ  0: OPR(0)      39     OPERATOR   OPR       TO       0:0:0
       SJ  0: CKD(1)      36     OPERATOR   CHECKD    TO       0:0:0
       SJ  0: FIL(2)      32     OPERATOR   FILCOM    TO       0:0:0
       SJ  0: PTYCON>
       SJ  0: **** OPR(0) 09:00:38 ****
       SJ  0: OPR>
       SJ  0: **** CKD(1) 09:00:39 ****
       SJ  0: CHECKD>
       SJ  0: **** FIL(2) 09:00:40 ****
       SJ  0: *
       SJ  0: PTYCON> CONNECT OPR
       SJ  0:
       SJ  0: OPR>

  It is important to look at this output when the system starts to check
  whether  the  proper programs have been started.  If you attach to the
  PTYCON job, you should also give a WHAT ALL command to PTYCON to check
  the status of these programs.



                                   6-3
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



  The commands to start and control programs under  PTYCON  are  in  the
  file  SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO.   Your  System Manager must decide what those
  commands should be.  If they differ from those in the PTYCON.ATO  file
  supplied,  you  must  change the file with an editor.  The commands in
  this file can be in uppercase or lowercase.

  The PTYCON.ATO file normally runs OPR, and any other service  programs
  that your System Manager decides to run as subjobs of PTYCON.



  6.3  COMMUNICATION WITH PTYCON AND ITS SUBJOBS
  6.3  COMMUNICATION WITH PTYCON AND ITS SUBJOBS

  6.3.1  Subjobs
  6.3.1  Subjobs

  A subjob is a job running on a pseudo-terminal (PTY) under control  of
  PTYCON.   PTYCON allows you to start and control as many jobs as there
  are pseudo-terminals (PTYs) available on your system, but  never  more
  than 24.  To find out how many PTYs are available on your system, type
  the EXEC command INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE DEVICES.  To  find  out
  how many PTYs are in use by PTYCON, type the PTYCON command WHAT ALL.

  Each subjob is identified by a unique number from 0 to n-1, where n is
  the  maximum number of PTYs available on your system.  For example, if
  your system can have 24 PTYs, the subjobs can be numbered  from  0  to
  23.   Each  subjob  is  assigned  a  number when you use the DEFINE or
  CONNECT command to start the subjob.

  To make it easier for you to keep track of the subjobs, you  can  also
  use  the  DEFINE  command  to give a subjob a name.  A subjob name can
  consist of up to five alphanumeric characters.  If you  type  in  more
  than  five  characters,  PTYCON  (in most cases) truncates the name to
  five characters.

  Before you try to start a subjob under PTYCON, be sure that PTYCON  is
  running.   If  it  is,  you should see the prompt PTYCON>.  To get the
  prompt, you might have to type POP or  the  PTYCON  escape  character,
  which  is  <CTRL/X>  by default.  (See the PTY commands CONNECT, PUSH,
  and REDEFINE.

  When PTYCON is running and has printed its prompt,  PTYCON>,  you  can
  communicate with it or its subjobs in the following ways:

       1.  You can type a single- or multiple-line PTYCON  command  (see
           Section   6.5  for  a  complete  description  of  all  PTYCON
           commands).

       2.  You can type a single-line  subjob  command  to  an  existing
           subjob.  A subjob command is:

                PTYCON>n-text


                                   6-4
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



           where n is the subjob name or number and text  is  a  TOPS-20
           command or input to a program running under subjob n.


                                   NOTE

                 n cannot be a subjob  name  longer  than
                 five  characters.   You must type in the
                 subjob name exactly as  shown  when  you
                 type  in  a  question  mark  (?)  at the
                 PTYCON prompt (PTYCON>).


  3.  You can give the CONNECT command to PTYCON to connect to a subjob.
      Then  you  can  communicate  directly  with  the  subjob by typing
      exactly what you would type to a job not under PTYCON.   To  later
      return  to PTYCON command level, type the PTYCON escape character,
      which is <CTRL/X> by default.

  4.  You can give the PUSH command to  PTYCON  to  perform  a  task  at
      TOPS-20  command  level.  You can type commands or run programs as
      you would under any job, but you do not have to log in a job.   To
      return to PTYCON command level, type POP.

  In communicating with a subjob, you can use all the  standard  TOPS-20
  features.    You  can  use  <CTRL/C>,  <CTRL/T>,  <CTRL/R>,  <CTRL/U>,
  recognition, rubout, DDT, EDIT, TV, languages,  and  system  commands.
  However, there are some restrictions.

       1.  You can never pass the current PTYCON escape character  to  a
           subjob,  because  it has a special purpose.  (See the CONNECT
           command.)

       2.  <CTRL/\> (control backslash) cannot be passed  to  a  job  or
           subjob  from  the  CTY,  because  it  causes you to enter the
           console processor command language  (PARSER).   If  you  type
           <CTRL/\> by mistake, immediately type QUIT.

       3.  If you are giving a single-line subjob command as:

                        _________ ____________ ______
                PTYCON> OPR-ABORT BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>

           you cannot use recognition, because the command is not passed
           to the system until you press RETURN or LINE FEED.

       4.  <CTRL/H> does not reprint a faulty command up to the point of
           error.






                                   6-5
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



  6.3.2  Creating Subjobs
  6.3.2  Creating Subjobs

  To create a subjob, use either the CONNECT or  DEFINE  command.   When
  you  give  either command with a number that has not yet been assigned
  to a subjob, you create a subjob with that number.  If you type ESCAPE
  in  place  of a number in the DEFINE command, you create a subjob with
  the next free subjob number.  The DEFINE command also  allows  you  to
  associate a name with the subjob.

                                   NOTE

          Whenever you create a subjob, you must then log in  to
          get  a system job number, as you do for any other job.
          If you enable your privileges,  you  can  use  a  null
          password if you log in under the same name that PTYCON
          is logged in under.

  For example, you use CONNECT to create a subjob:

               _______ ______
       PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
       [Connected to subjob 0]

         Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4(3167)
        ___ ________ ___ _____________
       @LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
         Job 26 on TTY211 29-JAN-79 12:41
        ___________
       @ENABLE<RET>
        ________
       $OPR<RET>
       OPR>

  At this point, you can give commands directly to the  job.   When  you
  want to return to PTYCON command level, type CTRL/X.

  Once a subjob exists, you can communicate with it by:

        o  Sending commands through PTYCON

        o  Connecting directly to the subjob



  6.3.3  Communicating with Subjobs through PTYCON
  6.3.3  Communicating with Subjobs through PTYCON

  You can send commands to subjobs while your terminal is at the PTYCON>
  prompt.  The format is:

       PTYCON> n-text

  where

       n         is the subjob name or number, followed by a hyphen



                                   6-6
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



       text      is a TOPS-20 command or program input to be sent to the
                 subjob

                                   NOTE

             n cannot be  a  subjob  name  longer  than  five
             characters.   You  must  type in the subjob name
             exactly as shown when you  type  in  a  question
             mark (?) at the PTYCON prompt (PTYCON>).

  The subjob name is an alternate way to  specify  a  subjob.   Use  the
  DEFINE command to define a subjob name.

  When you are giving commands to a subjob, be sure  that  you  know  if
  your subjob is waiting for program input or if it is at system command
  level.  The last character output by the subjob is "@" or "$" if it is
  at  system  command  level,  and  a  program-specific  prompt if it is
  awaiting program input.  If it is awaiting program input and you  want
  to  give it a system command, first send a <CTRL/C> (followed by <RET>
  to end the command).  Then, send the desired system command.   In  the
  case  of  OPR  as  a subjob, type EXIT to the OPR> prompt (followed by
  <RET>) to get to system command level.

  PTYCON accepts single- or  multiple-line  commands  after  the  prompt
  PTYCON>.   If  the PTYCON command line is longer than the maximum line
  length allowed by your terminal, you can continue typing  the  command
  past  the  end  of  the  line and onto the next line, without pressing
  RETURN.  PTYCON accepts command components that  are  divided  between
  lines.   If  you  want  to  avoid  divided  words,  use the hyphen (-)
  continuation character.  At the end of the first line, type  a  hyphen
  and press RETURN.  Then, continue typing the command on the next line.
  At the end of the command, press RETURN to confirm the command.

  The following example sends a multiple line command to a subjob.

              ______ _______ ____ ________ __ __ __ __ __ ___ ______
       PTYCON>ACCEPT (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS) 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, -<RET>
       ___ ___ _______
       14, 16, 17<RET>

  The following example creates OPR as a subjob, logs it in, enables it,
  and starts it:

        ___________
       @PTYCON<RET>
               ______ _ ________
       PTYCON> DEFINE 0 OPR<RET>
               _______ ________ ___ _____________
       PTYCON> OPR-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
       PTYCON>
       **** OPR(0) 11:32:28 ****
        Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
       @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
        Job 55 on TTY222 1-Dec-84 11:32:28,
        Last Login 28-Nov-84 10:11:37
       @


                                   6-7
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



               _______________
       PTYCON> OPR-ENABLE<RET>
       **** OPR(0) 11:32:45 ****
       ENABLE
       $
               ____________
       PTYCON> OPR-OPR<RET>
       **** OPR(0) 11:32:50 ****
       OPR
       PTYCON>
       **** OPR(0) 11:32:53 ****
       OPR>
       PTYCON>

  Another example of creating a subjob, logging it in,  and  sending  it
  other commands follows:

        ___________
       @PTYCON<RET>
               ______ ______
       PTYCON> DEFINE 2<RET>
               _____ ____ ___ __________
       PTYCON> 2-LOG DEMO FOO 10400<RET>
       PTYCON>
       **** 2 12:28:39 ****

        Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
       @LOG DEMO 10400
        Job 17 on TTY225 1-Dec-84 12:28:39,
        Last Login 28-Nov-84 11:58:16
       @
               _____________
       PTYCON> 2-FILCOM<RET>
       PTYCON>
       **** 2 12:28:55 ****
       FILCOM
       *
               ___________________
       PTYCON> 2-=A.ATO,B.ATO<RET>
       PTYCON>
       **** 2 12:29:09 ****
       =A.ATO,B.ATO

       No differences encountered

       *
               _________
       PTYCON> 2-^C<RET>
       PTYCON>
       **** 2 12:29:20 ****
       ^C
       @
       @
               ________ ______
       PTYCON> 2-SYSTAT .<RET>
       PTYCON>
       **** 2 12:29:34 ****
       SYSTAT .
         17*  103  EXEC    DEMO
       @
       PTYCON>

                                   6-8
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



  6.3.4  Communicating Directly with Subjobs
  6.3.4  Communicating Directly with Subjobs

  To communicate with a subjob by direct  connection,  use  the  CONNECT
  command, type exactly what you want to communicate to the subjob, then
  finish with the PTYCON escape character, normally CTRL/X.

  When you connect to a subjob that has not been logged  in,  the  first
  character that you type causes the identification message to be output
  on your terminal.  For example,

               _______ ______
       PTYCON> CONNECT 3<RET>
       [Connected to subjob 3]
       _____
       <RET>
        Boston Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
        ___ ________ _____________
       @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR<RET>
        Job 19 on TTY210 18-Nov-84 11:12:00,
        Last Login 17-Dec-84 10:12:51
        ___________
       @DIRECT<RET>

         <OPERATOR>
        A.ATO.1
        B.ATO.1
        PTYCON.ATO.1
          .LOG.1

        Total of 4 files
       @^X
         ^
         |
       <CTRL/X>
       PTYCON>

  You can also start the subjob OPR with the CONNECT command.   This  is
  helpful  when  OPR has not been started or when you want multiple OPRs
  at your installation.  For example,

        ___________
       @PTYCON<RET>
               _______ ______
       PTYCON> CONNECT 3<RET>
       [Connected to subjob 3]
       _____
       <RET>
        BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
        ___ ________ _____________
       @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR<RET>
        Job 53 on TTY232 2-Dec-84 08:37:25,
        Last Login 1-Dec-84 08:15:27
        ___________
       @ENABLE<RET>
        ________
       $OPR<RET>
           _
       OPR>? one of the following:
        ABORT      ALIGN     BACKSPACE      CANCEL     CLOSE
        CONTINUE   DEFINE    DISABLE        DISMOUNT   ENABLE
        ENTER      EXIT      FORWARDSPACE   HELP       HOLD
        IDENTIFY   MODIFY    MOUNT          NEXT       PUSH


                                   6-9
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



        RELEASE    REPORT    REQUEUE        RESPOND    ROUTE
        SEND       SET       SHOW           SHUTDOWN   START
        STOP       SUPPRESS  SWITCH         TAKE       UNDEFINE
        WAIT
         or one of the following:
        LCP   NCP















































                                   6-10
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



       OPR>^X
            ^
            |
         <CTRL/X>

       PTYCON>

                                   NOTE

          You cannot send the current PTYCON escape character to
          a subjob, because that character returns you to PTYCON
          command level if you are connected to a subjob, or  it
          aborts  the  current  command  if  you  are  at PTYCON
          command level.  However, you can change that character
          with the REDEFINE command to PTYCON.



  6.3.5  Subjob Output
  6.3.5  Subjob Output

  You can do the following with the output from subjobs of PTYCON.

        o  Allow it to be typed on your terminal

        o  Buffer it until you request it

        o  Save it in a file

        o  Discard it

  The PTYCON commands that control the  output  of  the  subjobs  either
  collectively or individually are:

        o  ACCEPT

        o  REFUSE

        o  LOG

        o  DISCARD

  If REFUSE is set for a subjob, its output is typed  on  your  terminal
  only  when  you are connected to the subjob.  Otherwise, the output is
  buffered until you request it with the ACCEPT (or NO  REFUSE)  command
  or  until  you connect to the subjob.  If DISCARD is set for a subjob,
  again its output is  printed  on  your  terminal  only  when  you  are
  connected  to  the subjob.  Otherwise, the output is discarded, except
  for recording it in a file if the PTYCON LOG command was given.

  If neither REFUSE nor DISCARD has been set for a subjob, the  subjob's
  output  is  printed  on your terminal.  If PTYCON is at command level,


                                   6-11
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



  output from each subjob is preceded by a header containing the  subjob
  name and/or number and the time.  If you are connected to a subjob:

        o  All output from the  connected  subjob  is  printed  on  your
           terminal without headers.

        o  All other subjob output  is  printed  on  your  terminal  and
           preceded by a header containing the name and/or number of the
           subjob giving output and the time.  The output is followed by
           a  trailer containing the name and/or number of the connected
           subjob and the time.

                                       NOTE

                   If you are  at  command  level  and  you  are
                   entering   a   command,   PTYCON  temporarily
                   suspends output from the  subjobs  until  the
                   command  is  confirmed with a carriage return
                   or line feed.
  For example, you are connected to subjob 3 and output  is  typed  from
  subjob   0,   which  is  defined  as  OPR,  beginning  with  a  header
  (**** OPR(0) hh:mm:ss ****).   (Where  hh:mm:ss   is   the   time   in
  hours:minutes:seconds.)  When  the  output  from subjob 0 is done, the
  trailer is output, indicating that the currently connected subjob is 3
  (**** 3 hh:mm:ss ****).

               _______ ______
       PTYCON> CONNECT 3<RET>
       [Connected to subjob 3]
       **** OPR(0) 12:34:27 ****

       12:34:32        Printer 1         --End--
                       Job DEMO1 Seq # 2599 For: CCOOK
       OPR>

       **** 3 12:34:37 ****
        BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
       @



  6.3.6  Logging Out Subjobs
  6.3.6  Logging Out Subjobs

  When you have completely finished using a subjob, you can log  it  out
  and  deassign  its  subjob  number  with  the  KILL command.  (See the
  description of the KILL command to PTYCON.

  You can log out a subjob by specifying either the subjob name  or  the
  subjob  number.   For  example,  to  log  out  subjob 0, which is also
  defined as subjob OPR:

               ____ ________
       PTYCON> KILL OPR<RET>


                                   6-12
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



       PTYCON>

       or

               ____ ______
       PTYCON> KILL 0<RET>
       PTYCON>

  To leave PTYCON permanently, you should be certain that  you  have  no
  more  use  for any of the subjobs; then use KILL ALL and EXIT.  During
  timesharing, you should never do this to  the  PTYCON-controlling  OPR
  and  any other utility program (such as, DUMPER or CHECKD) because you
  might need them to service users.

  For example, you log out all subjobs and EXIT  from  PTYCON  before  a
  system shutdown for preventive maintenance:

               ____ ________
       PTYCON> KILL ALL<RET>
               _________
       PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
       @

  If you want to leave PTYCON temporarily  to  do  something  at  system
  command level and not use a subjob, use the PUSH command, perform your
  commands, and return to PTYCON with POP.  (See the example  under  the
  description of the PUSH command.)



  6.4  PTYCON COMMAND FEATURES
  6.4  PTYCON COMMAND FEATURES

  PTYCON has the same command recognition, question  mark,  and  control
  character  features  offered  by  the  EXEC,  OPR,  and  other TOPS-20
  programs.  Following is a summary of these features:



  6.4.1  Listing Available Commands and Arguments with a Question Mark
  6.4.1  Listing Available Commands and Arguments with a Question Mark


       1.  To list all the PTYCON commands, type a question mark at  the
           PTYCON prompt.

                   _
           PTYCON> ? a command, one of the following:
           ACCEPT  BELL     CONNECT  DEFINE  DISCARD  EXIT      GET
           HELP    KILL     LOG      NO      PUSH     REDEFINE  REFUSE
           SAVE    SILENCE  WHAT
            or a subjob name, ALL
            or a subjob number
           PTYCON>

       2.  To list all the PTYCON commands that  begin  with  a  certain
           letter, type the letter followed by a question mark.


                                   6-13
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



                   __
           PTYCON> R?  a command, one of the following:
           REDEFINE   REFUSE
           PTYCON>

       3.  To list the arguments to a PTYCON command, type  the  command
           name followed by a space and a question mark.

                   _______ _
           PTYCON> CONNECT ?  subjob number or subjob name
           PTYCON>



  6.4.2  Using Recognition Input
  6.4.2  Using Recognition Input

  PTYCON recognition input works with commands and subjob names.  To use
  recognition  input, type enough letters of a command or subjob name to
  make it unique,  and  then  type  <ESC>.   PTYCON  responds  with  the
  remainder  of  the  command  and its guidewords or the complete subjob
  name.

  PTYCON recognizes command names before subjob names.  For example,  if
  you  have  a  subjob  named LOOK and you type LO<ESC>, PTYCON responds
  with the LOG command.



  6.5  PTYCON COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
  6.5  PTYCON COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

  The commands to PTYCON with their guide words in parentheses are shown
  in the PTYCON help message below.

       ACCEPT (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS)   *
       BELL (WHEN OUTPUT WAITING)   *
       CONNECT (TO SUBJOB)
       DEFINE (SUBJOB #)
       DISCARD (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOB)   *
       EXIT (FROM PTYCON)
       GET (COMMANDS FROM FILE)
       HELP (MESSAGE)
       KILL (SUBJOB)
       LOG (OUTPUT TO FILE)   *
       PUSH (EXEC LEVEL)
       REDEFINE (PTYCON ESCAPE CHARACTER TO BE)
       REFUSE (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS)   *
       SAVE (INPUT IN FILE)   *
       SILENCE (ALL OUTPUT TO TERMINAL)   *
       WHAT (IS STATE OF SUBJOB)

       "*" MEANS THE COMMAND CAN BE PRECEDED BY "NO" TO REVERSE ITS
       MEANING



                                   6-14
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE



       THE ESCAPE CHARACTER TO RETURN TO COMMAND LEVEL IS:  ^X

                                   NOTE

          In the descriptions of  the  PTYCON  commands  in  the
          sections  that  follow,  n represents a subjob name or
          number.  ALL represents all subjobs.














































                                   6-15
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (ACCEPT)
                                 (ACCEPT)


  ACCEPT - Accepting Output on Your Terminal
  ACCEPT - Accepting Output on Your Terminal



  Function
  Function

       The ACCEPT command sets your terminal to receive output from  the
       specified subjobs.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> ACCEPT n,...,n

       PTYCON> ACCEPT ALL

       or

       PTYCON> NO ACCEPT n,...,n

       PTYCON> NO ACCEPT ALL


  Argument
  Argument

       n                  specifies a subjob number.  You can specify up
                          to  24  (0  -  23) subjob numbers separated by
                          commas.  If you defined a name for the subjob,
                          you can specify the name instead of the subjob
                          number.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       The ACCEPT command is the normal mode of operation.

       When  used  after  NO  ACCEPT  or  REFUSE,  the  ACCEPT   command
       immediately  types on your terminal any available output from the
       specified subjobs and continues to do so as it becomes available.
       If  you  do not specify any subjobs, ALL is automatically printed
       and assumed.

       NO ACCEPT is equivalent to REFUSE.  If you  do  not  specify  any
       subjobs, ALL is assumed.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You ACCEPT output from all subjobs on your terminal:

                   ______ ________
           PTYCON> ACCEPT ALL<RET>


                                   6-16
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (ACCEPT)
                                 (ACCEPT)


           PTYCON>

       2.  You specify NO ACCEPT for subjobs 7, 15, 19,  and  23,  which
           are  OPRs,  so  that  your terminal receives output only from
           subjob OPR(0):

                   __ ______ _______________
           PTYCON> NO ACCEPT 7,15,19,23<RET>
           PTYCON>













































                                   6-17
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (BELL)
                                  (BELL)


  BELL - Sounding Bell for Output Waiting
  BELL - Sounding Bell for Output Waiting



  Function
  Function

       The BELL command rings your terminal bell every  ten  seconds  to
       indicate  that  a subjob has output waiting to be printed on your
       terminal.  This is referred to as a refused subjob.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> BELL

       or

       PTYCON> NO BELL


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       The BELL command is the normal mode of operation.

       Therefore, you need to give the BELL command only when  you  want
       to cancel a NO BELL command that you previously issued.

       When you give the PUSH command to PTYCON,  the  output  from  all
       subjobs  is  refused, unless it is already being discarded (refer
       to the DISCARD command).  The BELL command also applies to  these
       refused subjobs.

       NO BELL suppresses any bell, indicating that a refused subjob has
       some  output.   Consequently,  you  are  not warned that there is
       output waiting.


  Example
  Example

       1.  You specify NO BELL to turn off the  bell  sound  for  output
           waiting:

                   __ _________
           PTYCON> NO BELL<RET>
           PTYCON>









                                   6-18
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (CONNECT)
                                (CONNECT)


  CONNECT - Connecting to a Subjob
  CONNECT - Connecting to a Subjob



  Function
  Function

       The CONNECT command connects your terminal to a specified subjob,
       such  that the subjob appears to be a normal timesharing job that
       is not running under PTYCON.


  Format
  Format

       PTYCON> CONNECT n


  Argument
  Argument

       n                  specifies a subjob number.   You  can  specify
                          any  number  from  0  to 23.  If you defined a
                          name for  the  subjob,  you  can  specify  the
                          subjob name instead of the subjob number.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       After issuing the CONNECT command, all commands that you type are
       passed  directly  to  the subjob until you type the PTYCON escape
       character, which is CTRL/X by  default.   You  can  redefine  the
       escape character with the REDEFINE command to PTYCON.

       As soon as you connect to  a  subjob,  you  receive  the  message
       [Connected  to  subjob name(n)] or [Connected to subjob n].  Then
       any output that was being buffered for that subjob by the  REFUSE
       or NO ACCEPT command is printed on your terminal.

       If you do not specify a subjob,  PTYCON  connects  your  terminal
       either  to  the  last  connected  subjob  or  to  the last subjob
       defined, whichever was done most  recently.   If  you  specify  a
       valid  subjob number that you have not defined, a new subjob with
       that number is created for you.  However, you  cannot  specify  a
       subjob name that has not been defined.


  Hint
  Hint

       When you are connected  to  a  subjob,  type  the  PTYCON  escape
       character,  CTRL/X by default, to return to PTYCON.  Then you see
       the PTYCON prompt.




                                   6-19
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (CONNECT)
                                (CONNECT)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You CONNECT to subjob 4, which was not previously defined:
                   _______ ______
           PTYCON> CONNECT 4<RET>
           [Connected to subjob 4]

            BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
            ___ ________ _____________
           @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR<RET>
             Job 37 on TTY213 13-Nov-84 11:34:03,
            Last Login 12-Nov-84 11:15:36
            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ___________
           $CHECKD<RET>
           CHECKD>^X
                   ^
                   |
                <CTRL/X>
           PTYCON>

       2.  You CONNECT to subjob OPR(0), which was previously defined:

                   _______ ______
           PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
           [Connected to subjob OPR(0)]
           _____
           <RET>
           OPR>





























                                   6-20
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (DEFINE)
                                 (DEFINE)


  DEFINE - Defining a Subjob
  DEFINE - Defining a Subjob



  Function
  Function

       The DEFINE command defines a subjob.  For example, it can  create
       a new subjob, and it can associate a name with a subjob.  You can
       also define a new name for  an  existing  subjob  by  giving  the
       DEFINE command again with the desired new name.


  Format
  Format

       PTYCON> DEFINE number name


  Arguments
  Arguments

       number             specifies the subjob  number  to  be  defined.
                          You  can  specify any number from 0 to 23.  If
                          you press ESCape twice after you  type  DEFINE
                          (see  Example  1.),  the  system uses the next
                          available number.

       name               specifies an optional  name  for  the  subjob.
                          The   name   can   consist   of   up  to  five
                          alphanumeric   characters.    PTYCON    simply
                          ignores   any   characters   after  the  fifth
                          character.  If  you  use  any  nonalphanumeric
                          characters,  PTYCON  also ignores them and the
                          characters  that  follow  the  nonalphanumeric
                          characters.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       If you press ESCape for the subjob number, the next  free  subjob
       number  in  the system is chosen.  This is the recommended way to
       define a new subjob.

       If you define a subjob with  a  name  already  given  to  another
       subjob, you get the message:

            % Name already in use, reassigned to this subjob

       and the name is given to the new  subjob.   Also,  defined  names
       take  precedence  over subjob numbers when you define a subjob to
       be another number.  If ALL is the name of a subjob, whenever  you
       use ALL in a PTYCON command, it refers only to that subjob.



                                   6-21
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (DEFINE)
                                 (DEFINE)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You DEFINE the next available subjob number as DUMPER:

                       <ESC>        <ESC>
                         |            |
                         V            V
                   ______            _      ___________
           PTYCON> DEFINE (SUBJOB #) 5 (AS) DUMPER<RET>
                   _____ ________ ___ _____________
           PTYCON> 5-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
           PTYCON>
           **** DUMPER(5) 11:12:03 ****
            BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6144)
           @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
             Job 37 on TTY221 13-Nov-84 11:12:04,
            Last Login 12-Nov-84 8:26:02
                   _____________
           PTYCON> 5-DUMPER<RET>
           PTYCON>
           **** DUMPER(5) 11:12:09 ****
           DUMPER
           PTYCON>
           **** DUMPER(5) 11:12:13 ****
           DUMPER>
           PTYCON>

       2.  You DEFINE subjob 6 as OPR while subjob 0 is also defined  as
           OPR:

                   ______ _ ________
           PTYCON> DEFINE 6 OPR<RET>
           % Name already is use, reassigned to this subjob
                   _____ ________ ___ _____________
           PTYCON> 6-LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR<RET>
           PTYCON>
           **** OPR(6) 11:23:28 ****

            BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6144)
           @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
            Job 63 on TTY230 4-Dec-84 11:23:29,
            Last Login 3-Dec-84 11:12:29
           @
                   _______________
           PTYCON> OPR-ENABLE<RET>
           PTYCON>
           **** OPR(6) 11:23:32 ****
           ENABLE
           $
                   __________
           PTYCON> 6-OPR<RET>
           PTYCON>
           **** OPR(6) 11:23:37 ****
           OPR
           PTYCON>
           **** OPR(6) 11:23:41 ****
           OPR>
           PTYCON>


                                   6-22
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (DISCARD)
                                (DISCARD)


  DISCARD - Eliminating Subjob Output
  DISCARD - Eliminating Subjob Output



  Function
  Function

       The DISCARD command eliminates output to your terminal  from  the
       specified subjob when you are not connected to that subjob.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> DISCARD n,...,n

       PTYCON> DISCARD ALL

       or

       PTYCON> NO DISCARD n,...,n

       PTYCON> NO DISCARD ALL


  Argument
  Argument

       n                  specifies a subjob number.  You can specify up
                          to  24  (0  -  23) subjob numbers separated by
                          commas.  If you defined a name for the subjob,
                          you can specify the subjob name instead of the
                          subjob number.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       The output is thrown away as far as your  terminal  is  concerned
       with  the  use  of the DISCARD command.  However, output from the
       subjob does go into the LOG file, if you  previously  issued  the
       LOG command to PTYCON.

       DISCARD differs from REFUSE, because REFUSE keeps the output  for
       acceptance  at  a  later  time.   Yet,  if you discard a subjob's
       output after you have refused it, the output buffered  by  REFUSE
       is  not  typed  on  your  terminal.   However, at the time of the
       DISCARD, any output buffered by REFUSE goes into  the  LOG  file,
       providing the LOG command to PTYCON is in effect.

       NO DISCARD is the default and allows all output to appear on your
       terminal.   However, if you issued a REFUSE for the subjob before
       the DISCARD, NO DISCARD  restores REFUSE mode for the subjob  and
       buffers the output.  (See the REFUSE command.)



                                   6-23
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (DISCARD)
                                (DISCARD)


  Example
  Example

       1.  You DISCARD the output to your terminal for subjobs 3 and 5:

                   _______ ________
           PTYCON> DISCARD 3,5<RET>
           PTYCON>















































                                   6-24
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (EXIT)
                                  (EXIT)


  EXIT - Leaving PTYCON Command Level
  EXIT - Leaving PTYCON Command Level



  Function
  Function

       The EXIT command exits from PTYCON and gets you  back  to  system
       command level.


  Format
  Format

       PTYCON> EXIT


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       Use the EXIT command only when  you  want  to  permanently  leave
       PTYCON.   To  return  to  system  command level temporarily while
       subjobs are running, use the PUSH command.

       If there are subjobs active when you type EXIT, you get:

            Caution: Exiting may log out the still active subjobs!
            Confirm:  (type <CTRL/A> to get back to PTYCON)

       where "A" is the current  PTYCON  escape  character.   Type  that
       control  character to return to PTYCON immediately.  If you press
       RETURN to CONFIRM, you exit from PTYCON and you  might  lose  the
       subjobs.


  Hint
  Hint

       If  you  mistakenly  type  EXIT  and  press  RETURN  to  CONFIRM,
       immediately  type  CONTINUE  to return to PTYCON and preserve any
       subjobs.

       If you first run a program or give some  command  and  then  type
       CONTINUE,  you  might not be able to get back to PTYCON.  If this
       happens, subjobs become detached and are automatically logged out
       in five minutes unless corrective measures are taken.  Therefore,
       to recover them, immediately run PTYCON again.   Then,  for  each
       subjob  that  became detached, connect to a new subjob and attach
       to a system job corresponding to a  detached  subjob.   (Use  the
       SYSTAT  command  to  see  what jobs were detached.) Note that you
       cannot refer to the former  subjob  numbers;  you  must  use  the
       system job numbers until you establish PTYCON subjobs again.





                                   6-25
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (EXIT)
                                  (EXIT)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You EXIT from PTYCON,  but  you  have  not  killed  all  your
           subjobs.   Press  CTRL/X  to  return to PTYCON, KILL ALL your
           subjobs, and then EXIT:

                   _________
           PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
           Caution:  Exiting may log out the still active subjobs!
           Confirm:  (type CTRL/X to get back to PTYCON)^X
                                                        ^
                                                        |
                                                     <CTRL/X>
                   ____ ________
           PTYCON> KILL ALL<RET>
                   _________
           PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
           @

       2.  You attach system jobs 6 and 7 that became detached  and  you
           make them subjobs with their former names (TV and EDIT):

            ___________
           @ENABLE<RET>
            ___________
           $PTYCON<RET>
                   _______ ______
           PTYCON> CONNECT 0<RET>
           [Connected to subjob 0]
           _____
           <RET>
            BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4(3167)
            ______ ________ ______
           @ATTACH OPERATOR 6<RET>
           @^X
             ^
             |
           <CTRL/X>
                   ______ _ _______
           PTYCON> DEFINE 0 TV<RET>
                   _______ ______
           PTYCON> CONNECT 1<RET>
           [Connected to subjob 1]
           _____
           <RET>
            BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4(3167)
            ______ ________ ______
           @ATTACH OPERATOR 7<RET>
           @^X
             ^
             |
           <CTRL/X>
                   ______ _ _________
           PTYCON> DEFINE 1 EDIT<RET>
           PTYCON>

       3.  You issued the EXIT command and five minutes have passed  and
           the  former  subjobs  have  become logged-out jobs.  You have
           lost  all  the  operator   jobs   originally   started   from
           SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO.  You can do the following:

            ___________
           @PTYCON<RET>
                   ___ ______________________
           PTYCON> GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO<RET>



                                   6-26
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (GET)
                                  (GET)


  GET - Executing an Auto-File
  GET - Executing an Auto-File



  Function
  Function

       The GET command reads and executes the commands in the  specified
       file.


  Format
  Format

       PTYCON> GET filespec


  Argument
  Argument

       filespec           specifies the file specification of  the  file
                          that   contains  the  PTYCON  commands  to  be
                          executed automatically.

                               Default
                               Default filename and type - PTYCON.ATO


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       When the system is first started, SYSJOB normally  starts  PTYCON
       and  has PTYCON do a GET on SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO.  When the commands
       in the file are processed, they are echoed on your terminal as if
       they had been typed in directly (unless SILENCE is in effect).


  Hints
  Hints

       Certain characters in the command file must be typed  differently
       than  if  they  were  typed  directly  on your terminal.  Control
       characters must be typed as ^a,  where  ^  is  the  up-arrow,  or
       circumflex,  and  "a"  is the character.  Do not use the CTRL key
       for typing control characters in the command file.   ESCape  must
       be  typed  as  two  characters  ^$  (up-arrow  dollar-sign).   An
       up-arrow must be typed as ^^ (two up-arrows).

       The PTYCON command file can contain leading and  trailing  spaces
       and tabs, lowercase letters and blank lines.

       When you run PTYCON under OPERATOR (the  normal  case),  for  any
       subjob  you  log  in  under  OPERATOR,  you can give a fictitious
       password, for example, FOO in the examples below.





                                   6-27
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (GET)
                                  (GET)


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  The  following  is  a  sample  SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO  file   with
           comments added:

           SILENCE                   ;silence output to CTY
           LOG                       ;create LOG file PTYCON.LOG
           DEFINE 0 OPR              ;define subjob 0 as OPR
           CONNECT 0                 ;connect to subjob 0
           LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR ;log in
           ENABLE                    ;enable capabilities
           OPR                       ;run OPR
           ^X                        ;return to PTYCON
           NO SILENCE                ;allow output to CTY
           WHAT ALL                  ;print status of subjob

           You now execute the PTYCON.ATO file with the GET command:

            ___________
           @PTYCON<RET>
                   ___ ______________________
           PTYCON> GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO<RET>
           PTYCON> SILENCE
           PTYCON.LOG.1
           PTYCON> WHAT ALL
           OPR(0)     44         OPERATOR      OPR      RN        0:0:0
           PTYCON>
           **** OPR(0) 15:08:08 ****
           OPR>
           PTYCON>

       2.  The following is a  sample  special  ATO  file  that  creates
           subjob 5 as DUMPER with comments added:

           LOG                       ;create LOG file PTYCON.LOG
           CONNECT 5                 ;connect to subjob 5
           <RET>                     ;Line contains a carriage
                                     ;return
           LOG OPERATOR FOO OPERATOR ;log in
           DUMPER                    ;start DUMPER as subjob 5

           You now execute DUMPER.ATO with the GET command:

            ___________
           @PTYCON<RET>
                   ___ _________________________
           PTYCON> GET <OPERATOR>DUMPER.ATO<RET>
           PTYCON> LOG
            PTYCON.LOG.2
           PTYCON> CONNECT 5

            BOSTON Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 6(6136)
           @
           @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR
            Job 65 on TTY222 4-Dec-84 15:28:35,


                                   6-28
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (GET)
                                  (GET)


            Last Login 3-Dec-84 15:05:42

           @DUMPER
           DUMPER>

















































                                   6-29
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (HELP)
                                  (HELP)


  HELP - Printing PTYCON Commands
  HELP - Printing PTYCON Commands



  Function
  Function

       The HELP command prints a list  of  PTYCON  commands  with  guide
       words.


  Format
  Format

               _________
       PTYCON> HELP<RET>


  Example
  Example

               _________
       PTYCON> HELP<RET>

|       PTYCON 7(35) commands:
|
|       * ACCEPT (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|       * BELL (WHEN OUTPUT WAITING)
|         CONNECT (TO SUBJOB) lastsubjob
|         DEFINE (SUBJOB  ) number (AS) name
|       * DISCARD (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOB) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|         EXIT (FROM PTYCON)
|         GET (COMMANDS FROM FILE) ptycon.ato
|         HELP (MESSAGE)
|         KILL (SUBJOB) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|       * LOG (OUTPUT TO FILE) ptycon.log
|         PUSH (EXEC LEVEL)
|         REDEFINE (PTYCON ESCAPE CHARACTER TO BE) controlcharacter
|       * REFUSE (OUTPUT FROM SUBJOBS) subjob,subjob,... or ALL
|       * SAVE (INPUT IN FILE) saved-input.txt
|       * SILENCE (ALL OUTPUT TO TERMINAL)
|         WHAT (IS STATE OF SUBJOB) subjob or ALL
|
|       "subjob,subjob,..." means a list of subjobs or ALL for all active
|       subjobs.
|       "*" means the command can be preceded by "NO" to reverse its
|       meaning.
|       The escape character to return to command level is:  X
|       PTYCON>









                                   6-30
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (KILL)
                                  (KILL)


  KILL - Killing PTYCON Subjobs
  KILL - Killing PTYCON Subjobs



  Function
  Function

       The KILL command kills the indicated subjobs (logs them out)  and
       deassigns  the  subjob  numbers,  provided that PTYCON is running
       with OPERATOR or WHEEL capability enabled, or  that  the  subjobs
       are logged in under the same user name as PTYCON.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> KILL n,...,n

       or

       PTYCON> KILL ALL


  Argument
  Argument

       n                  specifies a subjob number.  You can specify up
                          to  24  (0  - 23) subjobs separated by commas.
                          If you defined a name for the subjob, you  can
                          use the name instead of the subjob number.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       If the subjob is not logged in under the same user as PTYCON, the
       KILL command does not succeed, and you receive the message:

            Could not kill subjob n

       Then, you must connect to the subjob, log out, return to  PTYCON,
       and  issue  the  KILL command.  For KILL ALL you must type ALL in
       its entirety.

       The KILL command  is  necessary  to  deassign  a  subjob  number.
       Simply logging out a subjob does not deassign the subjob number.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You KILL subjob 7 which was defined as ULIST:

                   ____ __________
           PTYCON> KILL ULIST<RET>
           PTYCON>



                                   6-31
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (KILL)
                                  (KILL)


       2.  You KILL ALL subjobs before you exit from PTYCON:

                   ____ ________
           PTYCON> KILL ALL<RET>
                   _________
           PTYCON> EXIT<RET>
           @
















































                                   6-32
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (LOG)
                                  (LOG)


  LOG - Recording Interactions with PTYCON
  LOG - Recording Interactions with PTYCON



  Function
  Function

       The LOG  command  causes  all  interactions  with  PTYCON  to  be
       recorded in the specified file specification.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> LOG filespec

       or

       PTYCON> NO LOG


  Argument
  Argument

       filespec           specifies the file specification of  the  file
                          that  contains  the  recording of interactions
                          with PTYCON and its subjobs.

                               Default
                               Default file name and type - PTYCON.LOG


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       If you specify a file that already  exists,  any  new  output  is
       appended  after  the  last  entry of the existing file.  Use this
       command to keep a  record  of  what  was  typed  at  the  console
       terminal.

       NO LOG, which is the normal mode, stops output to a log file  and
       closes  the  file.  This is the only command that stops output to
       the LOG file.

       Once the LOG command is  given,  the  log  file  contains  PTYCON
       prompts,  commands, and error messages, all input to subjobs, and
       all output from subjobs.  The order of information  in  the  file
       resembles the input and output to PTYCON at your terminal.


  Hints
  Hints

       If you do a DISCARD for a subjob, or GET a file that  contains  a
       SILENCE  command,  the log file contains all interactions as they
       occur, but your terminal  output  does  not.   (See  DISCARD  and
       SILENCE.)


                                   6-33
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (LOG)
                                  (LOG)


       When you do a DISCARD for a subjob after a REFUSE, the  log  file
       gets  all  the  output  buffered by the REFUSE, and then gets all
       output from the subjob as it occurs.  However, your terminal does
       not  get  output  from  a  subjob once a DISCARD command has been
       issued.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You specify LOG with a filename of  NOV18-79  to  record  all
           interactions with PTYCON.  The default file type is LOG.

                   ___ _____________
           PTYCON> LOG NOV18-79<RET>
           PTYCON>

       2.  You specify NO LOG after system startup to close the log file
           from  the  PTYCON.ATO  and then you create a new log file for
           the day's interactions with PTYCON.

                   __ ________
           PTYCON> NO LOG<RET>
                   ___ ______________
           PTYCON> LOG DEC28.TXT<RET>
           PTYCON>































                                   6-34
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (PUSH)
                                  (PUSH)


  PUSH - Performing Tasks at EXEC Level
  PUSH - Performing Tasks at EXEC Level



  Function
  Function

       The PUSH command allows you to perform a task at  system  command
       level without affecting subjobs.


  Format
  Format

       PTYCON> PUSH


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       When you give the  PUSH  command,  the  output  from  subjobs  is
       suspended.  Like REFUSE, PUSH causes a bell or beep to sound when
       output is waiting, providing the BELL command is in effect.  When
       you return to PTYCON, waiting output is printed on your terminal.

       The advantage of this command is that you  do  not  have  to  use
       another subjob or job number to do a task at system command level
       (EXEC level).  However, commands given after a PUSH  from  PTYCON
       and before a POP are not entered in the LOG file.


  Hint
  Hint

       To return to PTYCON, type POP.

                                     NOTE

               Do not run PTYCON at the new EXEC command  level.
               Return   to  PTYCON  by  using  the  TOPS-20  POP
               command.


  Restriction
  Restriction

       You cannot give the LOGOUT command when you have  PUSHed  out  of
       PTYCON.   If  you  do,  you  receive  the following error message
       instead of being logged out:

            ?LOG capability required
             Not logged off

       This prevents you  from  accidently  losing  your  subjobs  under
       PTYCON.



                                   6-35
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (PUSH)
                                  (PUSH)


  Example
  Example

       1.  You PUSH to system command level to  EDIT  a  file  and  then
           return to PTYCON's subjob OPR.

           OPR>^X
                ^
                |
             <CTRL/X>
                   _________
           PTYCON> PUSH<RET>

            TOPS-20 Command processor 4(554)
            ____ _______________
           @EDIT PTYCON.ATO<RET>
           Edit: PTYCON.ATO.1
            _________
           *I850<RET>
                   __ ________
           00850   NO LOG<RET>
            ________
           *ENU<RET>

           [PTYCON.ATO.2]

            ________
           @POP<RET>
                   _______ ________
           PTYCON> CONNECT OPR<RET>
           [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR(0)]
            _____
            <RET>
           OPR>




























                                   6-36
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (REDEFINE)
                                (REDEFINE)


  REDEFINE - Changing the PTYCON ESCape Character
  REDEFINE - Changing the PTYCON ESCape Character



  Function
  Function

       The REDEFINE command changes the ESCape character  to  return  to
       PTYCON  command  level.   By  default,  the  ESCape  character is
       <CTRL/X>.  With this command you can change  it  to  any  control
       character that is not treated specially by the system.


  Format
  Format

       PTYCON> REDEFINE <CTRL/character>


  Argument
  Argument

       <CTRL/character>   specifies the control character to be used  as
                          the   PTYCON  subjob  ESCape  character.   The
                          character can be one of the following:   A, B,
                          D, E, H, K, N, P, T, X, Y, or Z.   Do  not use
                          <CTRL/Q> or <CTRL/S>,  if  you  have  TERMINAL
                          PAGE mode set.  You must press the key labeled
                          CTRL and the desired character.


  Example
  Example

       1.  You REDEFINE escape character to be <CTRL/Z>:

                   ________ _______
           PTYCON> REDEFINE ^Z<RET>
                             ^
                             |
                          <CTRL/Z>
                   _______ ________
           PTYCON> CONNECT OPR<RET>
           [Connected to subjob OPR(0)]
            _____
            <RET>
           OPR>^Z
                ^
                |
             <CTRL/Z>
           PTYCON>









                                   6-37
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (REFUSE)
                                 (REFUSE)


  REFUSE - Refusing Output from Unconnected Subjobs
  REFUSE - Refusing Output from Unconnected Subjobs



  Function
  Function

       The REFUSE command refuses output from the specified  unconnected
       subjobs.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> REFUSE n,...,n

       PTYCON> REFUSE ALL

       or

       PTYCON> NO REFUSE n,...,n

       PTYCON> NO REFUSE ALL


  Argument
  Argument

       n                  specifies the subjob number.  You can  specify
                          up  to 24 (0 - 23) subjob numbers separated by
                          commas.  If  you  specified  a  name  for  the
                          subjob,   you  can  specify  the  subjob  name
                          instead of the subjob number.  If you  do  not
                          give a subjob name or number, ALL is assumed.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       A bell or beep sounds every ten seconds if a refused  subjob  has
       output  waiting.   (See  the BELL command to PTYCON.) Because the
       output is buffered, you can later get the output on your terminal
       by  typing ACCEPT or NO REFUSE for the subjob or by connecting to
       the subjob.  At that time, the output is also  written  into  the
       log file, providing the PTYCON LOG command is in effect.


  Hint
  Hint

       NO REFUSE, which is the normal mode, is equivalent to ACCEPT.







                                   6-38
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                 (REFUSE)
                                 (REFUSE)


  Example
  Example

       1.  You REFUSE output from subjob OPR(0) while you PUSH to system
           command  level  and  perform  a SYSTAT.  When you POP back to
           PTYCON and give the NO REFUSE command, all  temporarily  held
           OPR messages are printed on your terminal.

                   ______ ________
           PTYCON> REFUSE OPR<RET>
                   _________
           PTYCON> PUSH<RET>

            TOPS-20 Command processor 4(554)
            ___________
           @SYSTAT<RET>
                  .
                  .
                  .
                  .
                  .
            ________
           @POP<RET>
                   __ ______ ________
           PTYCON> NO REFUSE OPR<RET>
           PTYCON>
           **** OPR(0) 12:17:43 ****

           12:17:29 Printer 0         --Begin--
           Job COMREF Seq # 3914 For: LATTA
           OPR>
           PTYCON>



























                                   6-39
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (SAVE)
                                  (SAVE)


  SAVE - Recording Input to PTYCON Subjobs
  SAVE - Recording Input to PTYCON Subjobs



  Function
  Function

       The SAVE command  records  all  input  to  PTYCON  subjobs  in  a
       specified file.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> SAVE filespec

       or

       PTYCON> NO SAVE

  Argument
  Argument

       filespec       specifies the file specification of the file  that
                      contains   the   recording  of  inputs  to  PTYCON
                      subjobs.

                           Default
                           Default file name and type - SAVED-INPUT.TXT


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       If you specify a file that  already  exists,  all  new  input  to
       subjobs is recorded after the last entry in the existing file.

       NO SAVE, which is the normal mode, stops recording and closes the
       file.    This  is  the  only  command  that  stops  output  to  a
       saved-input file.

       The SAVE command  records  only  the  input  to  PTYCON  subjobs.
       PTYCON  prompts,  commands, error messages, and subjob output are
       not recorded.


  Hint
  Hint

       The SAVE command can be used to create a command file such  as  a
       PTYCON.ATO  or a batch control file.  Edit the file to delete the
       file  header  and  any  editing  control  characters  that   were
       recorded, such as <CTRL/U> and <CTRL/W>.

       If the file is to be executed with the PTYCON  GET  command,  use
       CONNECT commands to direct input to the proper subjobs.



                                   6-40
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (SAVE)
                                  (SAVE)


  Restriction
  Restriction

       Command-recognition input  is  not  recorded  accurately  in  the
       saved-input  file.   For  example,  if  you  give  the EXEC START
       command by typing ST<ESC>, the EXEC responds with ART  (PROGRAM).
       However,  the  saved-input  file contains only the letters ST and
       the escape symbol, ^$.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  You specify SAVE with a saved-input file name of  OPR-CMD.TXT
           to record all input to PTYCON subjobs.

                   ____ ________________
           PTYCON> SAVE OPR-CMD.TXT<RET>
           PTYCON>

       2.  You specify NO SAVE to close the saved-input file,  and  then
           you create a new saved-input file.

                   __ _________
           PTYCON> NO SAVE<RET>
                   ____ ________________
           PTYCON> SAVE FTS-CMD.TXT<RET>
           PTYCON>






























                                   6-41
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (SILENCE)
                                (SILENCE)


  SILENCE - Silencing Output to Your Terminal
  SILENCE - Silencing Output to Your Terminal



  Function
  Function

       The SILENCE command silences any output that  would  normally  be
       output on your terminal while PTYCON processes the file specified
       in the GET command.


  Formats
  Formats

       SILENCE

       or

       NO SILENCE


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       The SILENCE and NO SILENCE commands are effective only when given
       in the file on which you do a GET.

       SILENCE does not stop output to a log file.

       NO SILENCE, which is the normal mode, allows all output  on  your
       terminal  while  PTYCON  processes  the  file  specified in a GET
       command.


  Hint
  Hint

       If you have a SILENCE command in a file on which you intend to do
       a  GET, you should then include a NO SILENCE in the file.  If you
       do not include  the  NO  SILENCE  command,  the  SILENCE  command
       suppresses the last PTYCON prompt on your terminal.


  Examples
  Examples

       1.  Your PTYCON.ATO file  might  contain  SILENCE  as  the  first
           command  to  silence  output  to  your  terminal  when SYSJOB
           executes the GET PTYCON.ATO command at system startup.

            ____ _______________
           @TYPE PTYCON.ATO<RET>
           00100   SILENCE
           00200   LOG
           00300   DEFINE 0 OPR
                   .


                                   6-42
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                (SILENCE)
                                (SILENCE)


                   .
                   .
                   .

       2.  In the same PTYCON.ATO file above,  the  NO  SILENCE  command
           might  be  one  of the last commands so that output prints on
           your terminal after the execution of the PTYCON.ATO file.

                   .
                   .
                   .
                   .
           01000   NO SILENCE
           01100   WHAT ALL
           01200   CONNECT OPR
                   .

           (For  actual  examples,  see  the  examples  under  the   GET
           command.)


































                                   6-43
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (WHAT)
                                  (WHAT)


  WHAT - Displaying the Status of Subjobs
  WHAT - Displaying the Status of Subjobs



  Function
  Function

       The WHAT command gives you a status report for specified subjobs.


  Formats
  Formats

       PTYCON> WHAT n

       or

       PTYCON> WHAT ALL


  Argument
  Argument

       n                  specifies the subjob number.  You can  specify
                          any  number  from 0 to 23.  If you specified a
                          name for the subjob, you can specify the  name
                          instead  of the subjob number.  If you specify
                          a nonexistent subjob number, the message:

                               Subjob "n" not in use.

                          appears on your terminal (n is the number  you
                          specified).   If  there  are  no  subjobs, the
                          message  None   active!    appears   on   your
                          terminal.


  Characteristics
  Characteristics

       If you do not specify a subjob  number  or  name  with  the  WHAT
       command,  PTYCON  gives the status for all the subjobs.  One line
       of information is given for each subjob.

       The information for a logged-in subjob is:

       1.  Subjob name    (if it has one)

       2.  Subjob number  (in parentheses if there is a subjob name)

       3.  System job number

       4.  User logged in under the subjob




                                   6-44
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (WHAT)
                                  (WHAT)


       5.  Program running under the subjob

       6.  State of the job:

           a.  RN meaning running

           b.  TI meaning ready for terminal input

           c.  TO meaning the subjob has terminal output waiting

           d.  Any of the three  above  followed  by  (R),  meaning  the
               REFUSE  or NO ACCEPT command is in effect for the subjob,
               or (D), meaning the DISCARD command is in effect for  the
               subjob

       7.  Run time of the job is in hours:minutes:seconds

       The information for a subjob that is defined but  not  logged  in
       is:

       1.  Subjob name    (if it has one)

       2.  Subjob number  (in parentheses if there is a subjob name)

       3.  System job number  (if assigned, or, if the subjob  has  only
           been defined, the message:  NO JOB NUMBER ASSIGNED)

       4.  Message:  NOT LOGGED IN  (if the login is not complete)

       5.  State of the job  (see above)

       6.  Run time of the job  (hours:minutes:seconds)


  Example
  Example

       1.  You specify the WHAT command to display  the  status  of  the
           PTYCON subjobs.  ALL is the default.

                   _________
           PTYCON> WHAT<RET>
           OPR(0)     19         OPERATOR   OPR        TI        2:15:26
           FIL(1)     22         OPERATOR   FILCOM     TO        0:05:01
           2          NO JOB NUMBER ASSIGNED           TI        0:00:00
           DUM(3)     27         OPERATOR   DUMPER     RN        0:21:15
           WAT(4)     25         OPERATOR   WATCH      RN        0:37:13
           5          31         OPERATOR   OPR        TI(R)     1:09:37
           EXEC(6)    32         OPERATOR   EXEC       TO        0:45:21
           7          NOT LOGGED IN                    TI        0:00:00
           PTYCON>




                                   6-45
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (WHAT)
                                  (WHAT)


  6.6  PTYCON WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES
  6.6  PTYCON WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES



  Warning Message
  Warning Message


  %Name already in use, reassigned to this subjob

       You have defined a subjob with a name that was  already  assigned
       to  another  subjob.  Therefore, PTYCON has removed the name from
       the other subjob and assigned it to the  one  you  just  defined.
       You  can still reference the other subjob by its subjob number or
       name.


  %This is only effective from within a command file

       You have issued a SILENCE command at PTYCON command  level.   The
       SILENCE  and NO SILENCE commands can only be used in a PTYCON.ATO
       file.


  Error Messages
  Error Messages


  ?Doing a "GET" within a "GET" is illegal

       You are not allowed to process a GET from a file upon  which  you
       have done a GET.


  ?Error while converting ATO file - conversion and GET aborted

       This error is not a result of any error on your part.  This is an
       I/O  error  that occurred while converting a control character in
       the ATO file.  Notify your software contact  or  System  Manager.
       PTYCON continues to run.


  ?Fatal JSYS error

       This error is not a result of any error  on  your  part.   PTYCON
       does not continue to run.  Notify your software contact or System
       Manager.  You can try CONTINUE immediately after the message  and
       check the status of the subjobs.


  ?Illegal PTYCON escape character

       You typed an escape CTRL character that is not the default CTRL/X


                                   6-46
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (WHAT)
                                  (WHAT)


       or the CTRL character defined with the PTYCON REDEFINE command.


  ?Illegal subjob designator

       You referenced a subjob name that did not exist, or you tried  to
       assign  to  a  subjob  a number that is larger than the number of
       PTYs on the system.


  ?Insufficient system resources - no resident free space

       You tried to  create  another  subjob;  but  there  was  no  more
       resident free space for a PTY.


  ?Line too long

       You entered a line that  is  too  long  for  the  PTYCON  command
       buffer.


  ?No EXEC

       You did a  PUSH,  and  there  was  no  system  command  language,
       SYSTEM:EXEC.EXE, to run.  Notify your system manager.


  ?No lower forks available

       You did  a  PUSH  command,  and  there  were  no  free  processes
       available.


  ?No more PTY's available

       You tried to create another subjob, but there were no  free  PTYs
       to  run the job.  To find out how many PTYs are available on your
       system, type  the  EXEC  command  INFORMATION  (ABOUT)  AVAILABLE
       DEVICES.   To  find out how many PTYs are in use by PTYCON (up to
       24), type the PTYCON command WHAT ALL.


  ?Subjobs active, use "PUSH" command

       You typed a CTRL/C to PTYCON and there were subjobs  active.   If
       you  want to do a task at system level, use the PUSH command.  If
       you really want to exit from PTYCON,  see  the  EXIT  command  to
       PTYCON.




                                   6-47
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (WHAT)
                                  (WHAT)


  ?Too few arguments

       You did not give the proper arguments for the command you  typed.
       Because  of  the  severity of the DISCARD and KILL commands, they
       require either a subjob name or  number,  or  ALL  typed  in  its
       entirety.   Also, these two commands do not accept ESCape for the
       argument.


  ?Too many arguments

       You typed more than 23 subjob numbers.


  ?Type "EXIT" to exit from PTYCON

       You typed a CTRL/C to PTYCON and there were  no  subjobs  active.
       However, you must still type EXIT to exit from PTYCON.


  ?Unexpected PTYCON error - cannot enable for CONTROL-C intercept

       You  cannot  run   PTYCON   if   you   have   done   a   SET   NO
       CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY.  Do a SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY and then run
       PTYCON.


  ?Unexpected PTYCON error - couldn't get handle on TTY for binary
   channel

       This is an unexpected error and is not a result of any  error  on
       your  part.  Notify your software contact or system manager.  You
       can try START immediately after the message and check the  status
       of  the  subjobs.   If  that does not work, run PTYCON again, and
       within five minutes attach to the subjobs  that  became  detached
       jobs.


  ?Unexpected PTYCON error - couldn't open the TTY in binary for PTY
   communication

       This is an unexpected error and is not a result of any  error  on
       your  part.  Notify your software contact or system manager.  You
       can try START immediately after the message and check the  status
       of  the  subjobs.   If  that does not work, run PTYCON again, and
       within five minutes attach to the subjobs  that  became  detached
       jobs.


  ?Unexpected PTYCON error - NOUT failed



                                   6-48
                          PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                         PTYCON COMMAND LANGUAGE
                                  (WHAT)
                                  (WHAT)


       This is an unexpected error and is not a result of any  error  on
       your  part.   Notify  your  software  contact  or system manager.
       PTYCON continues to run.


  ?Unexpected PTYCON error - panic level interrupt occurred - reason

       This is an unexpected error and is not the result of any error on
       your  part.   Notify  your  software  contact  or system manager.
       PTYCON will continue to run.


  ?Unrecognized PTYCON command - reason

       You typed something to PTYCON which was  not  a  PTYCON  command.
       Type HELP to PTYCON for a list of PTYCON commands and their guide
       words.




































                                   6-49




                                  INDEX



              -A-
              -A-                     Defining nodes, 3-30
                                      Defining printer names, 3-34
                                      D
  Aborting jobs from OPR, 3-2         Device
  Alias names                           displaying parameters, 3-187
    printers, 3-168                   Device
  Aligning printer, 3-8                 displaying parameters, 3-201
  Allowing system process features,     setting on-line, 3-132
      3-52                              setting parameters, 3-115
  Answering messages, 3-101             starting a, 3-217
                                        stopping a, 3-212, 3-222
              -B-
              -B-                     Device parameters
                                        setting, 3-115
  Backspacing printer, 3-13           Directory
  Batch stream control file             changing parameters of, 5-8
    displaying, 3-180                   creating a, 5-8
  Batch stream parameters               deleting a, 5-8
    displaying, 3-201                   displaying parameters of, 5-50
    setting, 3-116                    Disabling system process features,
                                          3-39
              -C-
              -C-                     Disk-drive configuration, 3-177
                                      Disk-drive parameters
  Canceling jobs, 3-18                  displaying, 3-201
  Card punch parameters                 setting, 3-123
    displaying, 3-201                 Dismounting structures, 3-48
    setting, 3-119                    Dismounting tapes, 3-48
                                      D
  Changing job priorities, 3-77       Displaying
  CI                                    device parameters, 3-187
    starting, 3-140                   Displaying
    stopping, 3-140                     batch stream control file,
  Closing ORION log buffer file,            3-180
      3-22                              cluster link status
  Cluster                                 Galaxy, 3-175
    Galaxy                              date, 3-211
      link status, 3-175                disk-drive configuration, 3-177
  Command files                         job requests, 3-193
    taking, 3-233                       messages, 3-182
  Comments (to SYSERR), 3-93            node routing, 3-197
  Configuration                         operators, 3-184
    disk-drive, 3-177                   ORION messages status, 3-173
  Control file                          printer aliases names, 3-168
    displaying, 3-180                   scheduler, 3-199
                                        system parameters, 3-167
              -D-
              -D-                       time, 3-211

                                                  -E-
  Date                                            -E-
    displaying, 3-211
  DDT                                 Enabling system process features,


                                 Index-1




    to debug the EXEC, 5-49               3-52




















































                                 Index-2




  Entering                            Jobs (Cont.)
    another command level, 3-61         Rescheduling, 3-90
    LCP, 3-61                           rescheduling, 3-95
    NCP, 3-61                           restarting, 3-24
  Error messages                        selecting, 3-83
    OPR, 2-16
                                                  -L-
  Errors                                          -L-
    reporting, 3-93
  EXEC                                LCP
    debugging the, 5-49                 CLEAR command, 4-8
    halting, 5-55                       entering, 3-61
    returning to, 3-88                  SET command, 4-11
  Exiting OPR, 3-63, 3-88               SHOW command, 4-14
                                        START command, 4-19
              -F-
              -F-                       STOP command, 4-20
                                      Link status
  Form-feeds                            cluster
    suppressing, 3-227                    Galaxy, 3-175
  Forwardspacing printer, 3-64        Log buffer file
                                        ORION, 3-22
              -G-
              -G-                     Logical name
                                        defining a, 5-46
  Galaxy                                deleting a, 5-46
    displaying
      cluster link status, 3-175
                                                  -M-
                                                  -M-
              -H-
              -H-
                                      Messages
  HELP                                  displaying, 3-182
    OPR, 3-68                           OPR, 2-15
  Holding jobs, 3-70                    responding to, 3-101
                                        sending
              -I-
              -I-                         with ^ESEND, 5-57
                                          with OPR, 3-112
  Identifying mount requests, 3-73    Modifying job priorities, 3-77
                                      Mount requests
              -J-
              -J-                       identifying, 3-73
                                      Mounting structures, 3-80
  Job                                 Multiple OPRs, 2-6
    displaying requests, 3-193
    setting parameters, 3-126, 5-59
                                                  -N-
  Job parameters                                  -N-
    setting, 3-126, 5-59
  Job priorities                      NCP
    changing, 3-77                      entering, 3-61
    modifying, 3-77                   NI
  Jobs                                  starting, 3-145
    aborting, 3-2                       stopping, 3-145
    canceling, 3-18                   Node
    holding, 3-70                       defining, 3-30
    releasing, 3-90                     displaying routing, 3-197


                                 Index-3




    requeueing, 3-95                    parameters, 3-128




















































                                 Index-4




              -O-
              -O-                     Printer
                                        aligning, 3-8
  Operators                             backspacing, 3-13
    displaying, 3-184                   forwardspacing, 3-64
  OPR                                   suppressing form-feeds, 3-227
    exiting, 2-2, 3-63, 3-88          Printer names
    HELP, 3-68                          aliases, 3-168
    more than one, 2-6                  defining, 3-34
    starting, 2-2                     Printer parameters
  OPR error messages, 2-16              displaying, 3-201
  ORION log buffer file                 setting, 3-147
    closing, 3-22                     Printer specifications
  ORION messages                        defining name for, 3-34
    remote broadcasting status,
                                                  -Q-
        3-173                                     -Q-
  Output
    redirecting, 3-104                Quitting OPR, 3-63
    routing, 3-104
                                                  -R-
                                                  -R-

              -P-
              -P-                     Reader parameters
                                        displaying, 3-201
  Paper tape punch parameters         Redirecting output, 3-104
    displaying, 3-201                 Releasing jobs, 3-90
    setting, 3-134                    Remote broadcasting
  P
  Parameters                            ORION messages
    displaying, 3-187                     status, 3-173
  Parameters                          Remote stations, 2-5
    batch stream, 3-116, 3-201        Requeueing jobs, 3-95
    card punch, 3-119, 3-201          Rescheduling jobs, 3-90, 3-95
    devices, 3-115                    Responding to messages, 3-101
    disk-drive, 3-123, 3-201          Restarting jobs, 3-24
    displaying, 3-167                 Returning to EXEC, 3-88
      device, 3-201                   Returning to TOPS-20, 3-88
      directory, 5-50                 Routing output, 3-104
    job, 3-126, 5-59
                                                  -S-
    node, 3-128                                   -S-
    paper tape punch, 3-134, 3-201
    plotter, 3-137, 3-201             Scheduler
    printer, 3-147, 3-201               displaying parameters, 3-199
    reader, 3-201                     Scheduler parameters
    removing structure, 3-235           setting, 3-153
    scheduler, 3-153                  Selecting jobs, 3-83
    structure, 3-156                  Stopping system process features,
    system, 5-59                          3-39
    tape-drive, 3-161, 3-201          Structure parameters
    terminal, 5-59                      setting, 3-156
  Performance                           undefining, 3-235
    controlling, 3-153                Structures
  Plotter parameters                    dismounting, 3-48
    displaying, 3-201                   mounting, 3-80


                                 Index-5




    setting, 3-137                    SYSERR, 3-93




















































                                 Index-6




  SYSJOB                              Tape-drive parameters
    giving commands to, 5-71            displaying, 3-201
  System parameters                     setting, 3-161
    setting, 5-59                     Tapes
                                        dismounting, 3-48
                                      Terminal parameters
                                        setting, 5-59
              -T-
              -T-                     Time
                                        displaying, 3-211
  Tape-drive                          TOPS-20
    switching, 3-231                    returning to, 3-88










































                                 Index-7